EHX Configuration Software User Guide

EHX Configuration Software User Guide
EHX User
Guide
Eclipse® 8.5
EHX Software
User Guide
Part Number: 399G147 Rev A
Date: 7 May 2015
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Document Reference
EHX User Guide
Part Number: 399G147 Revision: A
Legal Disclaimers
Copyright © 2015 HME Clear-Com Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Clear-Com, the Clear-Com logo, and Clear-Com Concert are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HM Electronics, Inc.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement
and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting
its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation / reverse engineering. No part
of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior
written authorization of Clear-Com, an HME Company.
Clear-Com Offices are located in California, USA; Cambridge, UK; Dubai, UAE,
Montreal, Canada; and Beijing, China. Specific addresses and contact
information can be found on Clear-Com’s corporate website:
www.clearcom.com
Clear-Com Contacts
Americas and Asia-Pacific Headquarters
California, United States
Tel: +1.510.337.6600
Email: [email protected]
Europe, Middle East, and Africa Headquarters
Cambridge, United Kingdom
Tel: +44 1223 815000
Email: [email protected]
Canada Office
Quebec, Canada
Tel: +1 (450) 653-9669
China Office
Beijing Representative Office
Beijing, P.R.China
Tel: +8610 65811360/65815577
Page 2
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Table of contents
Eclipse® 8.5 EHX Software User Guide ....................................................... 1
Document Reference ................................................................................... 2
1
2
Introduction to EHX .............................................................................23
1.1
Further information........................................................................... 24
1.2
Terminology ..................................................................................... 24
1.3
System components.......................................................................... 24
1.3.1
Central matrix............................................................................. 24
1.3.2
Eclipse HX configuration software (EHX)....................................... 26
1.3.3
Setting up an Eclipse HX matrix system ....................................... 26
Getting started: installing, starting and exiting EHX .........................28
2.1
System requirements ........................................................................ 28
2.2
Installing EHX ................................................................................... 29
2.2.1
Backing up your existing projects and configurations .................... 29
2.2.2
Uninstalling and reinstalling EHX .................................................. 30
2.2.3
Installing EHX ............................................................................. 30
2.2.4
Running EHX............................................................................... 30
2.3
3
Installing .NET Framework................................................................. 31
2.3.1
Client-Server Login ..................................................................... 33
2.3.2
Identifying the EHX version ......................................................... 34
2.3.3
Importing your projects and configurations into EHX..................... 34
EHX: setting up a system ....................................................................36
3.1
Introduction...................................................................................... 36
3.2
Matrix Ethernet operation.................................................................. 39
3.2.1
3.3
Configuration restrictions............................................................. 39
Selecting Ethernet or serial connection............................................... 40
3.3.1
Ethernet connection .................................................................... 40
3.3.2
Serial connection ........................................................................ 46
3.3.3
Checking Ethernet connections with the Windows ping utility ........ 47
3.4
Creating a project file........................................................................ 48
3.5
Setting up a new matrix .................................................................... 48
Page 3
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4
3.5.1
Adding an offline matrix .............................................................. 49
3.5.2
Adding a discovered matrix ......................................................... 50
3.5.3
Matrix preferences menu ............................................................. 52
3.5.4
Apply changes to matrix .............................................................. 60
3.5.5
Configuration options .................................................................. 62
3.5.6
Firmware options ........................................................................ 65
3.5.7
User access control ..................................................................... 67
3.5.8
Change IP settings ...................................................................... 67
3.5.9
Show matrix redundant IP address .............................................. 67
3.5.10
Delete matrix from project ....................................................... 67
3.5.11
Matrix filtering ......................................................................... 67
Managing configurations and users....................................................69
4.1
4.1.1
Creating a new project ................................................................ 69
4.1.2
Opening a project ....................................................................... 69
4.1.3
Closing a project ......................................................................... 70
4.1.4
Importing and exporting a project................................................ 70
4.1.5
Saving a project.......................................................................... 70
4.1.6
Save Production Maestro Pro information ..................................... 71
4.1.7
Deleting a project ....................................................................... 71
4.1.8
Importing/exporting configuration keysets ................................... 71
4.1.9
User management....................................................................... 73
4.1.10
Creating a new EHX user .......................................................... 76
4.1.11
Editing an existing EHX user ..................................................... 77
4.1.12
Deleting a user ........................................................................ 77
4.2
5
Introduction...................................................................................... 69
The EHX screen after a project has been loaded ................................. 78
Configuring the Eclipse HX system .....................................................79
5.1
Using the EHX menus........................................................................ 79
5.2
Matrix hardware................................................................................ 80
5.3
Selecting card slots ........................................................................... 80
5.4
Fonts................................................................................................ 80
5.4.1
Basic Latin .................................................................................. 81
5.4.2
Cyrillic ........................................................................................ 81
Page 4
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.4.3
Hangul ....................................................................................... 81
5.4.4
Hiragana, Katakana and Kanji...................................................... 82
5.4.5
Arabic......................................................................................... 82
5.4.6
Half-width Hiragana, Katakana and Kanji compatible panels .......... 82
5.5
System configuration limits ............................................................... 84
5.6
Online configuration .......................................................................... 84
5.7
Matrix hardware setup ...................................................................... 84
5.7.1
System limits .............................................................................. 85
5.8
Adding an MVX-A16 card................................................................... 87
5.9
Removing an MVX-A16 card .............................................................. 88
5.10
Port list options.............................................................................. 88
5.11
Selecting ports on the card ............................................................. 89
5.12
Show all ports ................................................................................ 89
5.13
Detect new hardware ..................................................................... 89
5.14
Show Alt Text ................................................................................ 89
5.15
Port number .................................................................................. 89
5.16
Port function .................................................................................. 90
5.16.1
5.17
Device details .......................................................................... 91
Summary of expansion panels ........................................................ 93
5.17.1
Deleting a port assignment ....................................................... 93
5.18
Label ............................................................................................. 93
5.19
Description .................................................................................... 94
5.20
Sorting ports.................................................................................. 94
5.21
Column/row resizing ...................................................................... 94
5.22
Port properties ............................................................................... 94
5.22.1
Assignment panel (AP) options ................................................. 95
5.22.2
Auxiliary relay options .............................................................. 95
5.22.3
Basic options ........................................................................... 95
5.22.4
Panel options ........................................................................... 97
5.22.5
IP port options ....................................................................... 101
5.22.6
Menu options ......................................................................... 103
5.22.7
Voice operated switch (VOX) options....................................... 104
5.22.8
Global options........................................................................ 105
5.22.9
Gain options .......................................................................... 108
Page 5
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.22.10 Audible alert options .............................................................. 109
5.22.11 Tally options .......................................................................... 110
5.22.12 Fast key assign options .......................................................... 110
5.22.13 Logic input options ................................................................. 112
5.22.14 Attached control options ......................................................... 113
5.22.15 DTMF options......................................................................... 114
5.23
General Purpose Inputs (GPIs)...................................................... 115
5.23.1
Adding and removing GPI-6 modules ...................................... 115
5.23.2
Configuring GPIs .................................................................... 115
5.24
General Purpose Outputs (GPOs) .................................................. 116
5.24.1
Adding RLY-6 modules............................................................ 117
5.24.2
Configuring GPOs ................................................................... 117
5.25
Configuring the E-FIB fiber card.................................................... 118
5.25.1
Adding an E-FIB card ............................................................. 118
5.25.2
Removing an E-FIB card ......................................................... 118
5.25.3
Configuring an E-FIB card....................................................... 119
5.26
Configuring the E-Que card........................................................... 120
5.26.1
5.27
Adding an E-Que card ............................................................ 120
E1 direct...................................................................................... 121
5.27.1
Port function .......................................................................... 121
5.27.2
Label ..................................................................................... 121
5.27.3
Description ............................................................................ 121
5.27.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 122
5.27.5
Codec.................................................................................... 122
5.27.6
EM Signalling ......................................................................... 122
5.28
T1 direct...................................................................................... 123
5.28.1
Port function .......................................................................... 123
5.28.2
Label ..................................................................................... 123
5.28.3
Description ............................................................................ 123
5.28.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 123
5.28.5
Codec.................................................................................... 123
5.29
E1 trunk ...................................................................................... 124
5.29.1
Port function .......................................................................... 124
5.29.2
Label ..................................................................................... 124
Page 6
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.29.3
Description ............................................................................ 124
5.29.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 124
5.29.5
Clock recovery ....................................................................... 125
5.29.6
Codec.................................................................................... 125
5.30
T1 trunk ...................................................................................... 125
5.30.1
Port function .......................................................................... 126
5.30.2
Label ..................................................................................... 126
5.30.3
Description ............................................................................ 126
5.30.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 126
5.30.5
Clock recovery ....................................................................... 126
5.30.6
Codec.................................................................................... 126
5.31
E1 direct/trunk............................................................................. 127
5.31.1
Port function .......................................................................... 127
5.31.2
Label ..................................................................................... 127
5.31.3
Description ............................................................................ 127
5.31.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 127
5.31.5
Clock recovery ....................................................................... 127
5.31.6
Codec.................................................................................... 128
5.32
T1 direct/trunk............................................................................. 128
5.32.1
Port function .......................................................................... 128
5.32.2
Label ..................................................................................... 128
5.32.3
Description ............................................................................ 128
5.32.4
Card properties ...................................................................... 129
5.32.5
Clock recovery ....................................................................... 129
5.32.6
Codec.................................................................................... 129
5.33
E-Que antenna/E-Que FS II-TA antenna........................................ 130
5.33.1
Port function .......................................................................... 130
5.33.2
Label ..................................................................................... 130
5.33.3
Description ............................................................................ 130
5.34
E-Que splitter/E-Que FS II-TA splitter ........................................... 130
5.34.1
Port function .......................................................................... 131
5.34.2
Label ..................................................................................... 131
5.34.3
Description ............................................................................ 131
5.35
Page 7
Removing an E-Que card .............................................................. 131
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.36
Configuring the antenna on an E-Que card .................................... 131
5.36.1
Antenna connections .............................................................. 132
5.36.2
Cable length .......................................................................... 132
5.36.3
Description ............................................................................ 132
5.36.4
Comments ............................................................................. 132
5.36.5
Label ..................................................................................... 132
5.37
E-Que card splitter connections..................................................... 132
5.37.1
Cable length .......................................................................... 133
5.37.2
Description ............................................................................ 133
5.37.3
Engineer comments................................................................ 133
5.37.4
Label ..................................................................................... 133
5.38
Configuring the antenna for an E-Que FS II card............................ 133
5.38.1
Antenna connections .............................................................. 134
5.38.2
Cable Length Compensation ................................................... 134
5.38.3
Description ............................................................................ 134
5.38.4
Comments ............................................................................. 134
5.38.5
Listen label ............................................................................ 134
5.38.6
Talk label ............................................................................... 135
5.38.7
Antenna Group....................................................................... 135
5.39
Configuring an E-Que FS II card for splitter ................................... 135
5.39.1
Cable length compensation..................................................... 135
5.39.2
Description ............................................................................ 135
5.39.3
Comments ............................................................................. 135
5.39.4
Label ..................................................................................... 135
5.40
Antenna role map for FreeSpeak/CellCom ..................................... 136
5.41
Antenna role map for FreeSpeak II™ ............................................ 136
5.42
E-Que trunk basic settings............................................................ 137
5.42.1
Port count.............................................................................. 137
5.42.2
Remote port count ................................................................. 137
5.42.3
Remote matrix ....................................................................... 137
5.43
Configuring the IVC-32 card ......................................................... 137
5.44
Adding an IVC-32 card ................................................................. 137
5.44.1
Port number .......................................................................... 138
5.44.2
Port function .......................................................................... 138
Page 8
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.44.3
Label ..................................................................................... 139
5.44.4
Description ............................................................................ 139
5.44.5
General ................................................................................. 139
5.44.6
IP port ................................................................................... 140
5.44.7
IP address assignment ........................................................... 140
5.44.8
IP address ............................................................................. 140
5.44.9
Subnet mask ......................................................................... 141
5.44.10 Default gateway..................................................................... 141
5.44.11 External IP address ................................................................ 141
5.44.12 External IP address IP port ..................................................... 141
5.44.13 Panel codecs.......................................................................... 141
5.45
Configuring an IVC-32 redundant card .......................................... 141
5.45.1
5.46
Configuring the LMC-64 card ........................................................ 144
5.46.1
5.47
Switch-back........................................................................... 143
Adding an LMC-64 card .......................................................... 144
Configuring the E-MADI64 card..................................................... 147
5.47.1
Adding an e-MADI64 CARD (automatic discovery) ................... 147
5.47.2
Adding an E-MADI64 card (manual addition) ........................... 147
5.47.3
Upgrading the E-MADI64 card firmware .................................. 149
5.48
Fixed groups ................................................................................ 151
5.48.1
Fixed groups setup and configuration ...................................... 151
5.48.2
Fixed group attached controls ................................................. 153
5.48.3
Fixed group basic options ....................................................... 153
5.48.4
Fixed group global settings ..................................................... 154
5.48.5
Global group numbers ............................................................ 154
5.48.6
Call Management Group options ............................................. 154
5.48.7
Fixed group fast assign options ............................................... 159
5.49
Fixed group tallies........................................................................ 160
5.50
Sort groups ................................................................................. 161
5.50.1
5.51
Basic options ......................................................................... 162
Key groups .................................................................................. 162
5.51.1
Basic options ......................................................................... 163
5.51.2
Key group members............................................................... 164
5.52
Page 9
Partylines .................................................................................... 165
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.52.1
Partyline attached controls ..................................................... 167
5.52.2
Partyline basic options............................................................ 168
5.52.3
Partyline global options .......................................................... 168
5.52.4
Partyline fast key assign options ............................................. 169
5.52.5
Partyline tallies ...................................................................... 170
5.52.6
Partyline global numbers ........................................................ 170
5.53
Routes......................................................................................... 170
5.53.1
Description ............................................................................ 171
5.53.2
Route origin ........................................................................... 171
5.53.3
Route action .......................................................................... 171
5.53.4
Route target .......................................................................... 173
5.53.5
Activate with talk ................................................................... 173
5.53.6
Activate with listen ................................................................. 173
5.53.7
Creating a route..................................................................... 173
5.53.8
Assigning a source and destination to a route .......................... 173
5.53.9
Delete a route........................................................................ 174
5.54
Speed dials .................................................................................. 174
5.54.1
Speed dial (DTMF sequences) ................................................. 174
5.54.2
Speed dial setup .................................................................... 175
5.54.3
Delete a speed dial................................................................. 176
5.55
Controls....................................................................................... 176
5.55.1
Creating and deleting controls ................................................ 178
5.55.2
Properties .............................................................................. 178
5.55.3
Available................................................................................ 179
5.55.4
Attached................................................................................ 179
5.55.5
Relay naming ......................................................................... 179
5.55.6
TEL-14 configuration options .................................................. 180
5.55.7
Configuring DTMF access codes .............................................. 183
5.56
Logic Maestro .............................................................................. 185
5.56.1
5.57
Preferences............................................................................ 185
FreeSpeak Beltpacks .................................................................... 185
5.57.1
Beltpack properties ................................................................ 186
5.57.2
FreeSpeak beltpack roles ........................................................ 187
5.58
Page 10
FreeSpeak II™ (FS II) beltpacks ................................................... 193
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.58.1
Registering beltpacks ............................................................. 193
5.58.2
Registering beltpacks over the air ........................................... 193
5.58.3
Fetching registered beltpacks ................................................. 199
5.58.4
Beltpack roles and properties.................................................. 200
5.58.5
Basic options ......................................................................... 202
5.58.6
Panel options ......................................................................... 203
5.58.7
Menu options ......................................................................... 204
5.58.8
Fast key assign options .......................................................... 205
5.58.9
Gain options .......................................................................... 206
5.58.10 Global options........................................................................ 206
5.58.11 Alarm options ........................................................................ 207
5.58.12 Headset and microphone options ............................................ 208
5.58.13 FreeSpeak II™ beltpack programming..................................... 208
5.58.14 Upgrading beltpack and antenna firmware............................... 211
6
7
Virtual Interrupt Fold Backs............................................................. 215
6.1
Viewing and creating virtual IFBs..................................................... 219
6.2
Configuring IFB properties ............................................................... 220
6.2.1
Global properties....................................................................... 221
6.2.2
Basic options ............................................................................ 221
6.2.3
Fast key assign options ............................................................. 221
6.2.4
Tally options ............................................................................. 222
6.2.5
Attached control options ............................................................ 222
IP devices.......................................................................................... 223
7.1
Introduction to IP devices................................................................ 223
7.2
IP panels ........................................................................................ 225
7.3
Assigning a panel to an IVC-32 port................................................. 229
7.4
IP cards.......................................................................................... 230
7.5
IVC-32 IP settings........................................................................... 231
7.5.1
IP port ...................................................................................... 232
7.6
IVC-32 card panel list ..................................................................... 233
7.7
Concert users ................................................................................. 236
7.7.1
Concert server dialog ................................................................ 237
7.7.2
Assigning a concert user to an IVC-32 port................................. 240
Page 11
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8
Panel programming .......................................................................... 242
8.1
The panel programming screen........................................................ 242
8.2
V-series panel programming............................................................ 242
8.2.1
V-series lever key panels ........................................................... 243
8.2.2
V-series pushbutton panels........................................................ 247
8.2.3
V-series rotary panels ............................................................... 251
8.2.4
V-series panel options ............................................................... 256
8.3
Concert panel programming ............................................................ 259
8.3.1
Activation ................................................................................. 260
8.3.2
Destination listen ...................................................................... 261
8.3.3
Local assignment ...................................................................... 261
8.3.4
Interlock group ......................................................................... 261
8.3.5
Key Groups............................................................................... 262
8.3.6
Local advanced latch disable ...................................................... 262
8.3.7
Level adjustment applies to ....................................................... 263
8.3.8
Go to key destination ................................................................ 263
8.3.9
Delete key ................................................................................ 263
8.4
Concert panel options ..................................................................... 263
8.4.1
Page:Main ................................................................................ 263
8.4.2
Page Names.............................................................................. 264
8.4.3
Zoom ....................................................................................... 264
8.4.4
Save......................................................................................... 264
8.4.5
Load......................................................................................... 264
8.4.6
Clear ........................................................................................ 265
8.4.7
Copy ........................................................................................ 265
8.4.8
Paste........................................................................................ 265
8.4.9
Clear Page ................................................................................ 266
8.4.10
8.5
Identify panel ........................................................................ 266
I-Series programming ..................................................................... 267
8.5.1
Assigning labels ........................................................................ 267
8.5.2
Re-assignment of labels ............................................................ 268
8.5.3
I-Series label functions .............................................................. 269
8.5.4
I-series advanced functions ....................................................... 272
8.5.5
Using EHX to set up I-Series fixed group membership options ..... 272
Page 12
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.5.6
Using EHX to Set up I-Series IFB options ................................... 273
8.5.7
Using EHX to set up I-Series partyline membership options......... 273
8.6
I-Series panel options ..................................................................... 274
8.6.1
Page......................................................................................... 274
8.6.2
Save......................................................................................... 274
8.6.3
Load......................................................................................... 274
8.6.4
Copy ........................................................................................ 275
8.6.5
Paste........................................................................................ 275
8.6.6
Clear ........................................................................................ 275
8.6.7
Identify panel ........................................................................... 275
8.7
Fast key assign restrictions (I-series)............................................... 275
8.8
Setting up assignment panel partyline membership options .............. 276
8.9
Setting up assignment panel fixed group membership options .......... 276
8.9.1
8.10
Keep hidden keys active (I-series panels) .................................. 277
General panel setups.................................................................... 277
8.10.1
Stacked keys ......................................................................... 277
8.10.2
Creating a stacked key ........................................................... 277
8.10.3
Removing labels from a stacked key ....................................... 278
8.10.4
Palette options....................................................................... 279
8.10.5
Key assignment ..................................................................... 279
8.10.6
Default assignment mode ....................................................... 280
8.10.7
Select unique search result ..................................................... 280
8.10.8
Entity searching ..................................................................... 281
8.10.9
Entity filtering ........................................................................ 281
8.10.10 Quick filtering ........................................................................ 281
8.11
Agent IC Mobile Client .................................................................. 282
8.11.1
8.12
Mobile C lient panels ............................................................... 282
Local advanced ............................................................................ 285
8.12.1
Forced listen .......................................................................... 289
8.12.2
Blocked listen ........................................................................ 289
8.12.3
Local latch disable .................................................................. 290
8.12.4
Local ISO ............................................................................... 290
8.12.5
Route monitor........................................................................ 290
8.12.6
Mute relay ............................................................................. 290
Page 13
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.12.7
Preset talk ............................................................................. 291
8.12.8
Preset listen........................................................................... 291
8.12.9
Preset call.............................................................................. 291
8.12.10 Call signal to a TEL-14............................................................ 291
8.12.11 Nearby panels ........................................................................ 291
9
Audio Mixer ....................................................................................... 293
9.1
Introduction to Audio Mixer ............................................................. 293
9.2
Audio Mixer panel ........................................................................... 293
10
9.2.1
Save to EHX configuration and exit ............................................ 294
9.2.2
Restore to default values ........................................................... 295
9.2.3
Save to file ............................................................................... 296
9.2.4
Load from file ........................................................................... 296
9.2.5
Layout settings ......................................................................... 296
9.2.6
Input area ................................................................................ 297
9.2.7
Crosspoints............................................................................... 303
9.2.8
Output area .............................................................................. 306
Online mode ................................................................................... 307
10.1
Introduction to Online mode ......................................................... 307
10.2
Entering online mode ................................................................... 308
10.3
Using online mode........................................................................ 310
10.4
Online limitations ......................................................................... 311
10.5
Exiting online mode...................................................................... 312
11
Networking .................................................................................... 313
11.1
Network system configuration....................................................... 313
11.1.1
Configuration passwords......................................................... 313
11.1.2
Using the layout pane ............................................................ 314
11.1.3
Allocating a configuration to a matrix ...................................... 316
11.1.4
Deleting a matrix from the project .......................................... 316
11.1.5
Uploading the last downloaded configuration from the matrix ... 316
11.2
Intelligent linking (trunking) ......................................................... 317
11.2.1
Fiber trunking ........................................................................ 317
11.2.2
Four-wire trunks .................................................................... 319
11.2.3
IP directs and trunks .............................................................. 319
Page 14
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11.2.4
Intelligent linking with PiCo-Link ............................................. 323
11.3
Programming remote labels .......................................................... 325
11.4
Remote fixed groups .................................................................... 326
11.5
Remote partylines ........................................................................ 327
11.6
Remote 2-way radio ..................................................................... 328
11.7
Remote telephone ........................................................................ 328
11.7.1
Remote manual dial ............................................................... 329
11.7.2
Remote speed dial.................................................................. 329
11.7.3
Off hook and off hook tally ..................................................... 329
11.7.4
Auto listen ............................................................................. 330
11.8
Remote controls........................................................................... 330
11.9
Remote secondary actions ............................................................ 331
11.10 Remote IFBs ................................................................................ 331
12
Client server................................................................................... 332
12.1
13
Client/server operation................................................................. 332
12.1.1
Client .................................................................................... 332
12.1.2
Server ................................................................................... 332
12.1.3
Initial setup ........................................................................... 333
Eclipse HX downloads.................................................................... 341
13.1
Apply changes to matrix............................................................... 341
13.1.1
Apply changes with reset (red reset) ....................................... 342
13.1.2
Apply changes with reset and clear all memory (black reset).... 343
13.2
Apply to all matrices..................................................................... 344
13.3
Preserving locally assigned keys ................................................... 344
13.4
Apply changes to all matrices ....................................................... 344
14
Using the diagnostic tools ............................................................. 346
14.1
Crosspoint map............................................................................ 346
14.1.1
14.2
Crosspoint settings and averaging .......................................... 349
Matrix event log ........................................................................... 350
14.2.1
Request info .......................................................................... 351
14.2.2
Audio alerts ........................................................................... 353
14.2.3
Changing matrix IP address .................................................... 353
14.2.4
System monitoring ................................................................. 355
Page 15
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
14.3
Beltpack status ............................................................................ 358
14.3.1
Static log ............................................................................... 360
14.3.2
Automatic Log Saving............................................................. 361
14.4
Antenna status............................................................................. 361
14.5
Resource chart............................................................................. 362
14.6
Save diagnostics information utility............................................... 363
14.7
Clear unused memory .................................................................. 364
15
Glossary ......................................................................................... 365
16
Limited Warranty ........................................................................... 370
17
Technical Support & Repair Policy ................................................ 374
TECHNICAL SUPPORT POLICY ................................................................ 374
Page 16
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT–THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND CLEAR-COM.
BEFORE DOWNLOADING, ACCESSING, OR USING ANY PART OF THE
SOFTWARE, YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND
CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
("AGREEMENT") AS THEY GOVERN YOUR ACCESS TO AND USE OF THE
SOFTWARE. CLEAR-COM IS WILLING TO LICENSE AND ALLOW THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO
ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THIS AGREEMENT, YOU ARE NOT GRANTED
PERMISSION TO ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE.
This Agreement applies to any computer program and related files (the
“Software”) offered to you by either Clear-Com LLC or HME Clear-Com Ltd.
(each of whom is referred to herein as “Clear-Com”) and whether the software
is delivered in the form of a diskette, DVD, USB storage device or CD-ROM (the
“Storage Media”), over the Internet or through an on-line network. Your use
of the Software constitutes your acceptance of the following terms and
conditions.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1)
License Grant. The Software is provided by Clear-Com, and this
Agreement provides to you a personal, revocable, limited, nonexclusive, royalty-free, non-transferable license to use the
Software conditioned on your continued compliance with the terms
and conditions of this Agreement. This Agreement permits you to
use and access for personal or business purposes the Software only
at a single physical location in connection with the use of ClearCom products. You may also load information from the Software
into your laptop, workstation, or computer temporary memory
(RAM) and print and download materials and information from the
Software solely for your personal or business use, provided that all
hard copies contain all copyright and other applicable notices
contained in such materials and information. If you are using the
Software on behalf of a company or other form of entity, please
note that such a company or entity may have a separate
agreement with Clear-Com regarding access and usage privileges
for the Software. Nevertheless, your use of the Software will be
subject to the obligations and restrictions regarding use of the
Software as set forth in this Agreement.
2)
Restrictions. The license granted under this Agreement is limited.
You may not use, copy, store, reproduce, transmit, distribute,
display, rent, lease, sell, modify, alter, license, sublicense, or
commercially exploit any data provided by Clear-Com through the
Page 17
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Software in any manner not expressly permitted by this
Agreement. In addition, you may not modify, translate, decompile,
create any derivative work(s) of, copy, distribute, disassemble,
broadcast, transmit, publish, remove or alter any proprietary
notices or labels, license, sublicense, transfer, sell, mirror, frame,
exploit, rent, lease, private label, grant a security interest in, or
otherwise use the Software in any manner not expressly permitted
herein.
3)
User Obligations. By downloading, accessing, or using the
Software in order to view our information and materials or submit
information of any kind, you represent that you are at least 18
years of age and will, at all times, provide true, accurate, current,
and complete information when submitting information or materials
on the software including, without limitation, when you provide
information via a software registration or submission form. In
addition, you agree to abide by all applicable local, state, national,
and international laws and regulations with respect to your use of
the software. This Agreement is also expressly made subject to
any applicable export laws, orders, restrictions, or regulations.
4)
Proprietary Rights. This Agreement provides only a limited license
to access and use the Software. Accordingly, you expressly
acknowledge and agree that Clear-Com transfers no ownership or
intellectual property interest or title in and to the Software to you
or anyone else. All text, graphics, user interfaces, visual
interfaces, photographs, sounds, artwork, computer code (including
html code), programs, software, products, information, and
documentation as well as the design, structure, selection,
coordination, expression, "look and feel," and arrangement of any
content contained on or available through the Software, unless
otherwise indicated, are owned, controlled, and licensed by ClearCom and its successors and assigns and are protected by law
including, but not limited to, United States copyright, trade secret,
patent, and trademark law, as well as other state, national, and
international laws and regulations. Except as expressly provided
herein, Clear-Com does not grant any express or implied right to
you or any other person under any intellectual or proprietary rights.
Accordingly, your unauthorized use of the Software may violate
intellectual property or other proprietary rights laws as well as
other laws, regulations, and statutes. The name of the Software,
the Clear-Com logo, and all other names, logos, and icons
identifying Clear-Com and its programs, products, and services are
proprietary trademarks of Clear-Com, and any use of such marks,
including, without limitation, as domain names, without the express
written permission of Clear-Com is strictly prohibited. Other
service and entity names mentioned herein may be the trademarks
and/or service marks of their respective owners.
Page 18
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
Feedback and Submissions. Clear-Com welcomes your feedback
and suggestions about Clear-Com’s products or services or the
Software. By transmitting any suggestions, information, material,
or other content (collectively, "feedback") to Clear-Com, you
represent and warrant that such feedback does not infringe or
violate the intellectual property or proprietary rights of any third
party (including, without limitation, patents, copyrights, or
trademark rights) and that you have all rights necessary to convey
to Clear-Com and enable Clear-Com to use such feedback. In
addition, any feedback received will be deemed to include a
royalty-free, perpetual, irrevocable, transferable, non-exclusive
right and license for Clear-Com to adopt, publish, reproduce,
disseminate, transmit, distribute, copy, use, create derivative
works, and display (in whole or in part) worldwide, or act on such
feedback without additional approval or consideration, in any form,
media, or technology now known or later developed for the full
term of any rights that may exist in such content, and you hereby
waive any claim to the contrary.
6)
Limited Warranty.
6.1 Clear-Com warrants that any Storage Media on which the
Software is stored will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for 90 days from the date you acquire it. If a defect in
the Storage Media occurs, return the Storage Media to Clear-Com and
Clear-Com will replace it at no cost to you. This remedy is your
exclusive remedy for breach of this warranty. This limited warranty is
void if the damage or defect has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
6.2 WHILE CLEAR-COM ENDEAVORS TO PROVIDE RELIABLE
INFORMATION, SERVICES, PROGRAMS, SOFTWARE, AND MATERIALS,
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED IN SECTION 6.1, THE SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS-IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS AND MAY
INCLUDE ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR OTHER INACCURACIES. YOU
ASSUME THE SOLE RISK OF MAKING USE OF THE SOFTWARE. CLEARCOM MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE
RESULTS THAT CAN BE ACHIEVED FROM OR THE SUITABILITY,
COMPLETENESS, TIMELINESS, RELIABILITY, LEGALITY, OR ACCURACY
OF THE SOFTWARE FOR ANY PURPOSE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR ANY OTHER
IMPLIED WARRANTY UNDER THE UNIFORM COMPUTER INFORMATION
TRANSACTIONS ACT AS ENACTED BY ANY STATE. CLEAR-COM ALSO
MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERRUPTED FASHION OR
THAT ANY DOWNLOADABLE FILES OR INFORMATION WILL BE FREE OF
VIRUSES OR CONTAMINATION OR DESTRUCTIVE FEATURES.
Page 19
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7)
Limitation of Liability. You expressly absolve and release ClearCom from any claim of harm resulting from a cause beyond ClearCom’s control, including, but not limited to, failure of electronic or
mechanical equipment or communication lines, telephone or other
connection problems, computer viruses, unauthorized access, theft,
operator errors, severe weather, earthquakes, or natural disasters,
strikes, or other labor problems, wars, or governmental
restrictions. MOREOVER, IN NO EVENT SHALL CLEAR-COM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, MULTIPLE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE USE OF
THE SOFTWARE, WITH ANY DELAY OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE, OR FOR ANY INFORMATION, SERVICES, PROGRAMS,
PRODUCTS, AND MATERIALS AVAILABLE THROUGH THE
SOFTWARE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF CLEAR-COM HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY.
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, TOTAL LIABILITY OF
CLEAR-COM FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER RELATED TO USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY
YOU TO CLEAR-COM TO PURCHASE THE SOFTWARE.
8)
Indemnity. You agree to protect, defend, indemnify, and hold
harmless Clear-Com and its affiliates and all of their respective
employees, agents, directors, officers, shareholders, attorneys,
successors, and assigns from and against any and all claims,
proceedings, damages, injuries, liabilities, losses, costs, and
expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and litigation
expenses) relating to or arising from any breach by you of this
Agreement.
9)
Legal Matters.
9.1 If you are resident or domiciled anywhere other than Europe, the
Middle East or Africa, this Agreement will be construed and enforced
solely in accordance with the laws of the State of California, U.S.A.,
and courts in California shall have exclusive subject matter jurisdiction,
personal jurisdiction, and venue to adjudicate any dispute arising out of
this Agreement.
9.2 If you are resident or domiciled in Europe, the Middle East or
Africa (the “EMEA”), this Agreement will be construed and enforced
solely in accordance with English law and English Courts shall have
exclusive subject matter jurisdiction, personal jurisdiction and venue to
adjudicate any dispute arising out of this Agreement.
Page 20
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
9.3 You agree to waive any right to a jury trial in connection with any
action or litigation in any way arising out of or related to this
Agreement and acknowledge that either party may seek attorney's fees
in any proceeding. Any claim you might have against Clear-Com must
be brought within two (2) years after the cause of action arises, or
such claim or cause of action will be barred. You also acknowledge and
agree that any applicable state law implementation of the Uniform
Computer Information Transactions Act (including any available
remedies or laws) shall not apply to this Agreement and is hereby
disclaimed.
9.4 Clear-Com makes no representation that the Software is
appropriate or available for use in locations outside the State of
California or the EMEA and access to or use of the Software from
states, territories, or nations where any aspect of the Software is illegal
is prohibited. You access or use the Software on your own volition and
are responsible for compliance with all applicable local laws with
respect to your access and use of the Software.
9.5 A printed version of this Agreement and of any related notice
given in electronic form shall be admissible in judicial or administrative
proceedings based upon or relating to this Agreement to the same
extent and subject to the same conditions as other business do cuments
and records originally generated and maintained in printed form.
9.6 Clear-Com has no obligation to provide free updates to or
upgrades of the Software or to provide support of any kind with respect
to the Software.
9.7 If you are acquiring the Software for an agency of the United
States Government, the provisions of Federal Acquisition Regulations
Section 12.212 or Department of Defense FAR Supplement Section
227.7202-3, as applicable, apply to such acquisition.
10) Term and Termination. This Agreement and your right to use the
Software will take effect at the moment you click "I ACCEPT" or you
install, access, or use the Software and is effective until terminated
as set forth below. This Agreement will terminate automatically if
you click "I REJECT." In addition, Clear-Com reserves the right at
any time and on reasonable grounds, which shall include, without
limitation, any reasonable belief of fraudulent or unlawful activity or
actions or omissions that violate any term or condition of this
Agreement, to deny your access to the Software or to any portion
thereof in order to protect its name and goodwill, its business, or
other authorized users, and this Agreement will also terminate
automatically if you fail to comply with this Agreement, subject to
the survival rights of certain provisions identified below.
Termination will be effective without notice. You may also
terminate this Agreement at any time by ceasing to use the
Software, but all applicable provisions of this Agreement will
Page 21
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
survive termination, as identified below. Upon termination, you
must destroy all copies of any aspect of the Software in your
possession. In addition to the miscellaneous section below, the
provisions concerning Clear-Com’s proprietary rights, feedback,
indemnity, disclaimers of warranty, limitation of liability, and
governing law will survive the termination of this Agreement for
any reason.
11) Miscellaneous. You acknowledge that any breach, threatened or
actual, of this Agreement will cause irreparable injury to ClearCom, such injury would not be quantifiable in monetary damages,
and Clear-Com would not have an adequate remedy at law. You
therefore agree that Clear-Com shall be entitled, in addition to
other available remedies, to seek and be awarded an injunction or
other appropriate equitable relief from a court of competent
jurisdiction restraining any breach, threatened or actual, of your
obligations under any provision of this Agreement. Accordingly,
you hereby waive any requirement that Clear-Com post any bond
or other security in the event any injunctive or equitable relief is
sought by or awarded to Clear-Com to enforce any provision of this
Agreement. The parties agree that this Agreement is for the
benefit of the parties hereto as well as Clear-Com's licensors.
Accordingly, this Agreement is personal to you, and you may not
assign your rights or obligations to any other person or entity
without Clear-Com's prior written consent. Failure by Clear-Com to
insist on strict performance of any of the terms and conditions of
this Agreement will not operate as a waiver by Clear-Com of that or
any subsequent default or failure of performance. If any provision
(or part thereof) contained in this Agreement is determined to be
void, invalid, or otherwise unenforceable by a court of competent
jurisdiction or on account of a conflict with an applicable
government regulation, such determination shall not affect the
remaining provisions (or parts thereof) contained herein and the
illegal, invalid, or unenforceable clause shall be modified in
compliance with applicable law in a manner that most closely
matches the intent of the original language. No joint venture,
partnership, employment, or agency relationship exists between
you and Clear-Com as a result of this Agreement or your utilization
of the Software. Headings herein are for convenience only. This
Agreement represents the entire agreement between you and
Clear-Com with respect to use of the Software, and it supersedes
all prior or contemporaneous communications and proposals,
whether electronic, oral, or written between you and Clear-Com
with respect to the Software.
Page 22
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1
Introduction to EHX
This guide describes the features of EHX, and helps you to use the software to
build and configure a matrix intercom system.
EHX is used to create and manage communication pathways between your
Eclipse HX devices, including matrices, interface cards, interface modules and
user panels.
For example, use EHX to:
 Create individual, point-to-point talk and listen paths between
members of a matrix intercom system.
 Create groups and one-to-many calls (fixed groups).
 Create many-to-many partylines.
 Store complete system setups (configurations) on the EHX PC.
 Download and instantly implement a configuration on the matrix.
 Store four complete configuration maps in the matrix on-board
memory, any of which can be activated immediately from the front of
the matrix with the push of a button.
 Communicate with CellCom®, FreeSpeak® and FreeSpeak II™
beltpacks allowing direct communication between panels and roaming
users.
 Communicate with remote panels over IP.
 Interface with the Clear-Com Concert ™ multi-user conferencing
system over IP.
 Interface with HelixNet Partyline™, the Clear-Com digital partyline
system.
 Interface with telephones, two-way radios, camera intercoms, and
more.
 Bring an outside audio source, such as program source, into the
system’s audio stream and interrupt the program audio for
announcements (IFBs).
 Use the GPIO facility to activate an applause light in a studio, a lock on
a door, or other control functions each time an external device such as
a switch is triggered.
 Control, monitor, or run diagnostics on a matrix system remotely from
anywhere in the world, if the matrix is set up on a LAN network.
 Link matrices across cities, nations, and continents.
Page 23
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1.1
Further information
For more information about the Eclipse HX matrix system, including matrices,
interface cards, interface modules and user panels, see the complete Eclipse®
HX documentation set, available from both the Clear-Com website
(www.clearcom.com) and the Eclipse HX 8.5 software and documentation
DVDs.
1.2
Terminology
Remote devices (including interface cards, interface modules, interface frames
and user panels) connected to the matrix may be referred to as panels in this
guide. Occasional references may be made to stations (a legacy Clear-Com
term).
1.3
System components
A complete Eclipse HX system comprises the Eclipse HX configuration software
(EHX), a central hardware matrix, user panels and other remote devices interfaces, four-wire equipment—connected to the matrix. The following
sections give a brief overview of the matrix system.
1.3.1
Central matrix
The matrix hardware assembly comprises the following components:
 The metal housing (sometimes called the chassis or frame).
 The central processing unit (CPU).
 The internal circuitry which controls the attached devices.
 Power supplies.
 The rear panel interfaces which link the matrix to user panels and
remote devices such as interface modules.
 The rear panel interfaces which link the matrix to
CellCom/FreeSpeak/FreeSpeak II antennas, IP-enabled panels and
other matrices using fiber optic links.
Page 24
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 1-1 Eclipse HX-Omega Matrix
Chassis
The matrix chassis (frame) is a metal rectangular container which houses the
matrix internal circuitry and power supplies, as follows:
 The Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta are designed to host
removable CPU cards, interface cards, and interface modules.
 The Eclipse HX-Omega is designed to host removable CPU and interface
cards.
 The Eclipse HX-PiCo contains fixed internal circuitry.
The larger matrices (Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HXDelta) have removable power supplies, which can be exchanged when
necessary.
Central processing unit (CPU)
The central processing unit (CPU) provides the serial data and Ethernet
connection to the PC hosting the EHX software.
The CPU also coordinates the data flow for other features of the system, such
as general-purpose outputs and inputs. The CPU stores four complete system
configurations in its memory, which can be retrieved and activated directly
from the matrix front-panel controls, even when the matrix is not connected to
a computer.
 Each matrix system contains at least one central processing unit,
located either on its own removable CPU card, or in internal circuitry.
The Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta are supplied
with two CPU cards (in a master and slave relationship), ensuring fail-safe
operation.
Internal circuitry
The matrix internal circuitry controls the operation of the panels and interfaces
connected to it. Panels and interfaces connect to the internal circuitry through
Page 25
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
an RJ-45 connector, or port, on the rear panel of the matrix. The internal
circuitry sends balanced duplex audio and RS-422 data signals to and from
connected audio equipment.
Power supplies
Each Eclipse HX-Median, Eclipse HX-Omega or Eclipse HX-Delta matrix can
hold two independent power supplies. These may be connected to a main and
backup power source for redundancy. If one of these power supplies fails, the
second supply automatically takes over.
In the event of a complete power failure, a matrix can automatically restore
itself to complete functioning by retrieving configuration information from its
non-volatile operational memory.
The Eclipse HX-PiCo matrix has dual AC power supplies which can operate
independently.
Rear-panel connectors
A matrix connects to remote devices such as user panels, interfaces, general
purpose inputs and outputs, local area networks (LANs), the computer that
hosts the EHX configuration software, and other matrices through its rearpanel connectors.
1.3.2
Eclipse HX configuration software (EHX)
The Eclipse HX configuration software (EHX) controls the operation of the
system’s connected audio devices, using a configuration (sometimes called a
configuration map) that is downloaded to the matrix.
A matrix and connected devices operate in a star configuration, with each
device connecting back to the matrix directly. Audio signals are routed through
the central matrix and out to the connected audio devices in accordance with
the configuration created in EHX.
EHX can also be used to monitor the matrix for faults and to log errors for
analysis.
The EHX software comprises a graphical user interface with a main screen that
is divided into two parts:
 The Menu pane – This is located on the left of the EHX main screen. It
contains the System, Hardware, Configuration and Diagnostics dropdown menu lists.
 The System pane – This is located on the right of the EHX main screen.
It contains a graphical representation items selected from the Menu
pane.
1.3.3
Setting up an Eclipse HX matrix system
The following procedure shows the basic steps for setting up an Eclipse HX
matrix system. For more quick start information, see the Eclipse HX Quick
Page 26
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Start Guide. For detailed installation information, see the Eclipse HX
Installation Guide.
To set up an Eclipse HX matrix system:
1)
Ensure that there is a working connection between the EHX PC and
the matrix (see 2.3.3 Importing your projects and
configurations into EHX.
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-Server mode:
1)
Open EHX. Select File > Import Project.
2)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. To import the file, click Open.
Remember to save your project, after opening it.
3)
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to import.
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-only mode:
1)
Open EHX. Select File > Open.
2)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. Click Open.
If you import a .ccn file, remember to save your imported project as an *.hxn
format file.
Page 27
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2
Getting started: installing, starting and
exiting EHX
2.1
System requirements
EHX 8.5 runs on the following versions of Windows:
 Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit).
 Microsoft Windows 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit).
 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32-bit and 64-bit) and later.
 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit) and later.
Note: Operation on other platforms is no longer supported.
Note: When running EHX on Windows OS, you can run the client and server
on separate machines, connected over the network.
The minimum requirements for the PC hosting EHX are as follows:
Specification
Value / Description
Processor
1 GHz
Memory
1 GB RAM
Hard Disk Free Space
2 GB
Input Devices
CD/DVD-ROM drive
Display Resolution
SVGA
User Entry
Keyboard, Mouse
Network
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet card
Table 2-1 Minimum PC Requirements
The recommended requirements for the PC hosting EHX are:
Specification
Value / Description
Processor
2 GHz for a client.
As many cores as possible for a server
Memory
2
3
4
4
Hard Disk Free Space
2 GB
Display Resolution
1600 x 1200
Ports
One serial port
GB
GB
GB
GB
for
for
for
for
a
a
a
a
32-bit
32-bit
64-bit
64-bit
client
server
client
server
Table 2-2 Recommended PC Requirements
Page 28
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2.2
Installing EHX
2.2.1
Backing up your existing projects and configurations
If you are upgrading from an earlier version of EHX/ECS, Clear-Com
recommends backing up your projects and configurations before you install
EHX.
Backing up ECS 5.2.4 projects and configuration
To back up and export your existing ECS 5.2.4 projects and configurations:
1)
Open the project you want to export.
2)
Select File > Export Project.
3)
Save the project to a location on your hard drive. The project is
saved as a *.ccn format file, which you can import later into EHX.
EHX can open *.ccn format files as well as its own *.hxn format files.
4)
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to save.
Backing up EHX 7.0/7.1/7.5/7.6/8.0 projects and configurations
To back up and export your EHX 7.0/7.1/7.5/8.0 projects and configurations in
Client Server mode:
1)
Open the project you want to export.
2)
Select File > Export Project.
3)
Save the project to a location on your hard drive. The project is
saved as a *.ccn format file, which you can import later into EHX.
EHX can open *.ccn format files as well as its own *.hxn format files.
4)
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to save.
To back up and export your EHX 7.0/7.1/7.5/7.6/8.0 projects and
configurations in Client Only mode:
1)
Open the project you want to export.
2)
Select File > Save Project.
3)
Save the project to a location on your hard drive. The project is
saved as a *.ccn format file, which you can import later into EHX.
EHX can open *.ccn format files as well as its own *.hxn format files.
4)
Page 29
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to save.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2.2.2
Uninstalling and reinstalling EHX
Configurations
If you are required to uninstall and re-install your EHX installation for any
reason, ensure that you save your projects first for re-importing into EHX (see
2.2.1 Backing up your existing projects and configurations and 2.3.3
Importing your projects and configurations into EHX). You can uninstall
EHX from your Windows All Programs menu.
If you are running EHX in Client-Server mode, export your projects to a secure
location on your hard drive in the same way as in 2.2.1 Backing up your
existing projects and configurations.
2.2.3
Installing EHX
The Eclipse HX software DVD contains a number of executables for installing
EHX:
Installation *.exe
Description
EHXSetup.exe
Installer for the 32-bit and 64-bit versions
of the client. Use the EHX client version to
connect directly to the matrix in Client only mode or to an EHX server in Client Server mode.
EHXServerSetup.exe
Installer for the 32-bit server and 64-bit
server versions of EHX. The EHX server
enables multiple EHX clients to work
together when configuring an Eclipse HX
system.
Table 2-3 EHX Installation Executables
Note: Before Installing EHX Server, please see Installing and Configuring
IIS on the Server on page 333.
2.2.4
Running EHX
Logging into EHX
To log into EHX in Client-only mode (EHX is run on a single machine, without
connecting to a server):
1)
Page 30
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Clear-Com
> Eclipse HX Configuration System. The EHX user login screen
is displayed (see below). If you are logging in for the first time, the
default username (Administrator) is already entered for you. No
password is required on initial login
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 2-1 EHX Login Screen
2)
Click OK.
When logged in to EHX, you can use the User Management facility to change
the password for the default user and add further users (see 2.3.3 Importing
your projects and configurations into EHX
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-Server mode:
3)
Open EHX. Select File > Import Project.
4)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. To import the file, click Open.
Remember to save your project, after opening it.
5)
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to import.
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-only mode:
6)
Open EHX. Select File > Open.
7)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. Click Open.
If you import a .ccn file, remember to save your imported project as an *.hxn
format file.
2.3
Installing .NET Framework
If the EHX installer encounters a problem when installing .NET, you will have to
install it manually. To do so:
1)
Go to the Microsoft website (www.microsoft.com) and download the
appropriate version of .NET.
For EHX 8.5 Client:
.NET 4.5 http://www.microsoft.com/engb/download/details.aspx?id=30653
Page 31
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
For EHX 7.6 Server
.Net 4.5 Service Pack 1 http://www.microsoft.com/engb/download/details.aspx?id=22
.NET 4.5 http://www.microsoft.com/engb/download/details.aspx?id=30653
2)
Run the .NET installer.
Note: The .NET Framework 4 can be installed side-by-side with previous
versions of the .NET Framework on a single computer. If IIS was
previously enabled on the computer, the setup process for the .NET
Framework automatically registers ASP.NET 4 with IIS. However, if you
install the .NET Framework 4 before you enable IIS, you must run the
ASP.NET IIS Registration tool in order to register the .NET Framework
with IIS and create application pools that use the .NET Framework 4.
Open a command prompt and navigate to the folder
%WindowsDir%\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727\ and then enter
the following command:
aspnet_regiis.exe -i
This will register ASP.Net with IIS.
You may have to have to reboot after installation.
3)
Some versions of Windows have .Net pre-installed. If this is the case,
you will be notified when running the installer. In this case, the
appropriate version of .Net should be installed using the Turn
Windows Features On or Off option from the Windows Control Panel.
It is essential that you select all the following sub-options when
installing .Net:

.Net Framework 3.5
o Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation
o Windows Communication Foundation Non-HTTP Activation

.Net Framework 4.5 Advanced Services
o ASP.NET 4.5
o WCF Services
o HTTP Activation
o Message Queuing (MSMQ) Activation
o Named Pipe Activation
o TCP Activation
o TCP Port Sharing
4)
Page 32
Re-run the EHX installer.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2.3.1
Client-Server Login
If you are running EHX in Client-Server mode, you must enter the address of
the remote server before logging in.
To log into EHX in Client-Server mode:
1)
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Clear-Com
> Eclipse HX Configuration System. The EHX user login screen
is displayed (see below). If you are logging in for the first time, the
default username (Administrator) is already entered for you. No
password is required on initial login.
Figure 2-2 EHX Log in Server Option
2)
Click Options.
3)
Enter the address of the remote server to log into (for example,
http://RemoteHost:80/EclipseServer). RemoteHost is the
machine name or IP address of the machine running the EHX
server software.
4)
Click OK.
Note: The same versions of EHX must be installed to both the client and the
server.
First screen after log in
After successfully logging in (either locally or to a server) the EHX initial screen
is displayed.
Page 33
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 2-3 EHX Initial Screen
2.3.2
Identifying the EHX version
1)
To identify the version of EHX, select Help > About on the
Windows toolbar.
Figure 2-4 EHX About Screen
Note: The operational mode of EHX (Client-Only or Client-Server mode) is
displayed, as well as the version of EHX.
2.3.3
Importing your projects and configurations into EHX
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-Server mode:
2)
Open EHX. Select File > Import Project.
3)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. To import the file, click Open.
Page 34
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Remember to save your project, after opening it.
4)
Repeat the above procedure for all the projects you want to import.
To import a saved project from an earlier version of EHX or ECS into EHX in
Client-only mode:
5)
Open EHX. Select File > Open.
6)
Navigate to the project file (*.hxn or *.ccn format) saved to your
hard drive. Click Open.
If you import a .ccn file, remember to save your imported project as an *.hxn
format file.
Page 35
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3
EHX: setting up a system
3.1
Introduction
Complete the following procedure to set up a new Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse
HX-Median or Eclipse HX-Delta matrix.
Note: For the latest, detailed guidance, see the relevant User Guide for each
matrix. For information on setting the default IP address on Eclipse HXPico matrices, see the Eclipse HX-PiCo User Guide.
To set up a new Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median or Eclipse HX-Delta
matrix:
1)
Reset the matrix to the factory default IP address
(169.254.0.100):
The default IP address is a link local IP address. This means that the PC is
connected directly to the matrix using an Ethernet cable, and communicates
with the rack in DHCP mode. When the rack's IP configuration is defaulted back
to the above link local address it also defaults to DHCP enabled.
2)
Page 36
The matrix is fitted with two CPU cards, in a master and slave
relationship. Remove the slave CPU card.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-1 CPU Card
3)
Press and hold the ENG and FULL RESET front panel buttons
simultaneously (bottom of card), and then press the RESET button
(top of card) on the master CPU card.
4)
Replace the slave CPU card.
5)
Remove the master CPU card.
6)
Press and hold the ENG and FULL RESET front panel buttons
simultaneously (bottom of card) then press the RESET button (top
of card, see Figure 3-1) on the slave CPU card.
7)
Replace the master CPU card.
8)
Ensure that the matrix and the EHX PC are connected using an
Ethernet connection, either directly or over a network.
9)
Configure the Ethernet connection on the EHX PC, then create a
configuration with the factory default IP address.
Page 37
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
10) Download the complete configuration map to the matrix, using the
factory default IP address.
Page 38
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3.2
Matrix Ethernet operation
The Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta CPU card
Ethernet ports are normally connected to a LAN and used to communicate with
clients such as EHX and Production Maestro. The Ethernet port functionality
depends on the IP address setup.
If an IP address of 0.0.0.0 is configured on the second Ethernet port, it is not
used for Tx or Rx. This is the default setup if the default IP address is set as
described above.
All matrix to matrix traffic is sent out on both Ethernet ports. This applies to
both directed and broadcast packets. All matrix to matrix traffic is also
received on both Ethernet ports. If the traffic is transaction related, the second
(duplicate) message received is not consumed, but simply dropped.
The matrices listen for client connections on both Ethernet ports. Once the
connection is made it is added to the list of connections to service. Broadcast
type Tx data is duplicated out on each connection (for example, an HCI
connection to the matrix from 3rd party applications).
EHX makes a connection on either the main or backup Ethernet port of each
system in the linked set. If both are up, this defaults to the primary port. In
the event that connection is lost to the currently active port on a matrix, EHX
swaps over to using the other Ethernet port. If this connection is lost only on
one matrix in a linked set, the others are not affected.
3.2.1
Configuration restrictions
The network ID on the first Ethernet port must be different from that of the
second port. The network ID is defined by the IP address and the network
mask for the port.
For example:
A network address of 172.16.2.1 and a mask of 255.255.0.0 give a network
ID of 172.16. Therefore in this scheme the second port could not have an IP
address starting with 172.16.
If the network mask is extended to 255.255.255.0 the network ID becomes
172.16.2. This means that the second port could have an address of
172.16.3.1 and a mask of 255.255.255.0, giving a network ID of 172.16.3
for the second port.
Note: If both Ethernet ports are set up with the same network ID this
condition results in data loss on one or both of the Ethernet ports.
Clear-Com does not recommend Ethernet redundancy and the use of a default
gateway. An IP address and gateway combination on an Ethernet port means
that all Tx traffic to any address is possible on the port. Traffic that actually
matches the other Ethernet port can therefore be sent out on the wrong port.
Page 39
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3.3
Selecting Ethernet or serial connection
EHX can communicate with a matrix using one of the following methods:
 Ethernet connection.
 Serial connection if the EHX PC is connected directly to the matrix via
an RS-232 cable.
Select Tools > Matrix Connection to choose a connection option. Ethernet is
the recommended connection type for all applications. Serial connections are
limited to a single matrix, have a limited range of functionality and should only
be used for backup purposes.
Note: Matrices are shipped DHCP enabled, and with a default address. If
there is no valid DNS server, the address can be set manually via the
serial connection. Right click on the serially connected matrix, select
Change IP Settings, and enter the new IP details.
3.3.1
Ethernet connection
Ethernet connection allows single or multiple EHX PCs to control, configure,
monitor and diagnose issues with single or multiple matrices anywhere on the
WAN / LAN.
The PC is usually connected to the matrix using:
 The LAN1 connector (a standard RJ45 connector) on the rear of the
Eclipse HX-Median, Eclipse HX-Omega or Eclipse HX-Delta matrix.
LAN1 is the default connector on the matrix. LAN2 (also a standard RJ45
connector) is not configured when it leaves the factory, and must be enabled in
EHX.
 The LAN connector (a standard RJ45 connector) on the rear of the
Eclipse HX-PiCo.
A ferrite core must be added to the socket end of each Ethernet cable to
comply with European EMC standards. A suitable ferrite core is Wurth
Electronik part: 74271132. Shielded CAT5e cable is recommended for Electro
Magnetic Compliance in EU countries.
A crossover cable should be used (though a straight-through CAT5 cable can
be used with a switch):
PIN
FUNCTION
Pin 1
Transmit data +
Pin 2
Transmit data -
Pin 3
Receive data +
Pin 4
N/C
Pin 5
N/C
Pin 6
Receive data -
Pin 7
N/C
Page 40
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Pin 8
N/C
Table 3-1 Pin Assignments for LAN Connectors
To establish communication between the PC and the Eclipse HX matrix, the PC
and the matrix must be set to the same subnet. Windows provides many
different methods of reconfiguring network settings.
Reconfiguring network settings in Windows 7
1)
Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >
Network and Sharing Centre. The following screen appears:
Figure 3-2 Network and Sharing Center
2)
Select Local Area Network. The following screen appears:
Figure 3-3 Local Area Network Status
Page 41
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Select Properties. The following screen appears:
Figure 3-4 Local Area Connection Properties
4)
Select Internet Protocol Version 4, and then select Properties.
The following screen appears:
Figure 3-5 Internet Protocol Version 4
Page 42
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
Select Use the following IP address, and then enter the correct
IP address (169.254.0.10) and Subnet mask (255.255.0.0), and
then click OK.
Reconfiguring network settings in Windows 8
1)
Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >
Network and Sharing Center. The following screen appears:
Figure 3-6 Network and Sharing Center
2)
Page 43
Select Ethernet 3. The following screen appears:
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-7 Ethernet 3 Status
3)
Page 44
Select Properties. The following screen appears:
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-8 Ethernet 3 Properties
4)
Page 45
Select Internet Protocol Version 4, and then select Properties.
The following screen appears:
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-9 Internet Protocol Version
5)
3.3.2
Select Use the following IP address, and then enter the correct
IP address (169.254.0.10) and Subnet mask (255.255.0.0), and
then click OK.
Serial connection
To establish a serial connection between the EHX PC and the matrix the
hardware must be connected first and then the software configured.
To establish the hardware connection, connect a serial (RS-232) cable between
the computer's serial port and the connector labelled RS-232 on the rear of the
Eclipse HX matrix.
Page 46
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
To set up a serial connection between EHX and the Eclipse HX matrix:
1)
From the EHX command line, open the Tools menu and select
Matrix Connection. The Matrix Connection dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-10 Matrix Connection
Ethernet connection is the default.
2)
Select the Serial radio button.
3)
From the drop-down menu, select the COM port on the PC the
serial cable is connected to.
Click Only Show Available Ports to display the available COM ports on the
computer.
4)
Select OK.
Note: When using a serial connection, the left-hand menu pane is highlighted
in purple.
3.3.3
Checking Ethernet connections with the Windows ping
utility
If there is a problem connecting to the Eclipse HX matrix, you can use the
Windows Ping utility on Ethernet to verify that the cabling and IP settings are
correct.
To check the connection to the matrix with Ping:
1)
From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
The Run dialog is displayed.
2)
Page 47
To open the command window, type cmd in the Open field and click
OK.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Type ping xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, where the X’s represent the IP address of
the Eclipse HX matrix.
3)
Press Enter.
If the ping was successful, a reply is received. If the ping was not successful
check the cabling and IP settings.
Note: When checking the connection, ensure that Network Bridging and any
firewalls are disabled.
3.4
Creating a project file
A project (stored and exported as an *.hxn file) provides a container for your
configurations, and may consist of one or many configurations for one or many
matrices.
A project can be used to define every aspect of a complex intercom system,
including the connectivity between multiple, intelligently linked matrices and/or
the configurations for individual matrices.
An unlimited number of projects may be stored on the EHX PC or on a server.
A configuration determines the operating parameters of the Eclipse HX system.
When you first create a configuration, the file does not have any content. EHX
is used to populate the configuration with details of the system, including:
 The user panels, interface cards, interface modules and control devices
associated with the matrix / matrices.
 The labels (alphanumeric names) assigned to each device.
To create a project file:
1)
Select File > New Project (Control-N).
Control-N can be used when in any EHX mode to start a new configuration
map.
2)
If you are running EHX in Client-Server mode, enter a name for the
project in the dialog. Click Save.
The project name is displayed on the title bar at the top of the screen.
3.5
Setting up a new matrix
When a new project has been created, matrices can be added to the project.
There are two ways to set up a new matrix:
 Adding an offline matrix
 Adding a discovered matrix
Note: Matrices that are added to a project are allocated the next available
system number at the time that they are added to the project.
Page 48
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3.5.1
Adding an offline matrix
If the matrix you want to configure is unavailable (for example, the matrix has
yet to be installed), you can still add that matrix to EHX.
To add an offline matrix:
1)
Right click the right hand System pane.
2)
Click Add Matrix. A matrix, with generic information, is added to
the layout pane.
Note: An offline matrix is always displayed gray on the layout pane.
Figure 3-11 Adding an offline matrix (shell)
3)
You can now configure the offline matrix with the relevant, specific
configuration information (if known).
Configuring an offline matrix
The offline matrix, which is a shell at this stage, requires basic configuration,
before you can start adding cards and panels.
Figure 3-12 New Matrix Icon
To configure the matrix:
1)
To enter a name for the matrix (optional), click New Matrix at the
top of the matrix, and then enter a name.
2)
To set the matrix type, click Please choose a matrix type on the
matrix.
From the drop-down menu, select the appropriate matrix type (Eclipse
HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median, Eclipse HX-Delta or Eclipse HX-PiCo).
Page 49
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-13 Select Matrix Type
3)
The Hardware and Configuration menus for the matrix are now
available from the sidebar menu for the matrix on the left of the
screen. Click to open / view all menu options.
The Configuration menu flashes amber, because there is no connection with
physical hardware.
4)
3.5.2
The default IP address (169.254.0.100) is shown on the matrix on
the layout pane. Type the IP address of the offline matrix into the
text field, if known.
Adding a discovered matrix
A matrix can only be discovered if:
 The Ethernet address of the matrix is accessible to the EHX PC.
 The EHX PC can receive broadcast packets from the matrix.
For more information, see Ethernet connection on page 40.
To add a discovered matrix to the project:
1)
Page 50
Select System > Layout. If there are active matrices on the
network, EHX lists the discovered matrices left of center on the
screen.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-14 Layout Screen
2)
To add a matrix to the new project, either:

Drag a discovered matrix into the right hand pane
(recommended). The matrix is added to the project and the
Hardware, Configuration and Diagnostic menu links are
displayed in the left hand menu pane.

Click Add Matrix to System on the matrix icon. A dialog is
displayed with the following options:
Option
Description
Empty Configuration
If this option is selected the matrix is
added and the Hardware, Configuration
and Diagnostic menu links are displayed
in the menu pane. The Hardware link
flashes amber if no cards or panels have
been configured.
The matrix IP address and system
preferences are set up as described
below, after which the hardware should be
configured manually.
Discover Hardware
Select this option to fully and
automatically populate the project with
available cards and panels.
A progress bar is displayed while the
hardware is being discovered (see below).
The matrix is added to the project and the
Hardware, Configuration and
Diagnostic menu links are displayed in
the left hand menu pane.
Upload Configuration from Matrix
Page 51
This option is a backup facility that
enables you to retrieve the last
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Option
Description
downloaded configuration from the matrix
(provided one has been loaded). It is not
a general way to configure the matrix.
Once the configuration has been loaded
the Hardware, Configuration and
Diagnostics menu links are displayed
and the configuration (which already
contains the system and panel setups)
can be edited. This is not possible if the
matrix CPU and EHX software are
incompatible.
Table 3-2 Add Matrix to Project Dialog
3.5.3
Matrix preferences menu
To configure the global system settings of a matrix:
1)
From the System pane, select the matrix, and then from the Menu
pane, select Configuration > Preferences.
The settings are organized under a series of tabs.
Figure 3-15 Preferences tabs (open at Intelligent Linking)
Intelligent linking
Use this tab to:
 Specify the format of Alias Labels. Aliases mean that labels can be
displayed differently on a connected, remote system from the way they
are displayed on the local system.
Page 52
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Define which ports are used for Comfort Tones (warning tones).
Comfort tone ports are used to indicate a trunking failure to panel
users.
ISO and IFB
Use the ISO and IFB tab to define how ISO and IFB operations are
implemented on the Eclipse HX v8.5 system.
Figure 3-16 ISO and IFB tab
If none of the checkboxes are selected, then the default ISO behavior is that
when a path between the source panel and an ISO destination becomes active,
then any other listen paths at the ISO destination also remain active. This
enables the ISO destination to hear both the caller and the other listens during
the ISO conversation.
This default behavior is shown in the example in Figure 3-13, where the Source
panel is calling CAM-3.
Default ISO Operation (Box not checked)
Normal Operation
CAM-1
CAM-2
CAM-1
CAM-2
ISO
CAM-3
CAM-3
Source
Source
Figure 3-17 ISO Default Operation
If you select this checkbox, then the ISO destination can only talk and listen to
the calling source.
The previous listen paths are interrupted (turned off) for the duration of the
ISO conversation.
The calling panel continues to hear the other listens, but talk paths are turned
off for the duration of the ISO conversation. This is shown in Figure 3-18
where the source panel is calling CAM-3.
Page 53
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
ISO Interrupts all other incoming audio at the ISO
(Box checked)
Normal Operation
CAM-1
CAM-2
CAM-1
CAM-2
ISO
CAM-3
CAM-3
Source
Source
Figure 3-18 ISO Interrupts at ISO (modified operation)
If you select this checkbox, then the ISO source can only talk and listen to the
ISO destination.
The previous listen paths are interrupted (turned off) for the duration of the
ISO conversation.
All listen paths to the ISO source are also turned off, so that the ISO source
can only talk and listen to the ISO destination.
This is shown in Figure 3-19 where the source panel is calling CAM-3.
ISO Interrupts all other incoming audio at the caller
(Box checked)
Normal Operation
CAM-1
CAM-2
CAM-3
Source
CAM-1
ISO
CAM-2
CAM-3
Source
Figure 3-19 ISO Interrupts at Caller (modified operation)
If none of the checkboxes are selected, then the default IFB behavior is that
when an IFB path is active between a panel (the IFB source) and a destination
port, then none of the other talk paths are deactivated from that panel.
The communication path to the IFB destination is also carried by the other
active talk paths.
If the IFB Interrupts other talks from Source Station checkbox is selected
however, all the other talk paths from the panel are interrupted (turned off) for
the duration of the IFB talk.
This enables you to make a private call to a remote dialled-in IFB destination.
If you select this checkbox, an AP panel can assign multiple sources to an IFB
destination. The IFB hears all the incoming audio from the selected sources.
System access codes
You can protect aspects of system functionality with access codes. Use this tab
to enter codes to unlock features.
Page 54
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-20 System Access Codes tab
Use the DTMF Passcodes section to set the global access codes within the
Eclipse HX System. Eight DTMF codes are available for accessing the Eclipse
HX System from a remote location (using DTMF Inward Access).
When you assign a value to any of the eight available DTMF codes, that co de
becomes recognizable to any MVX-A16 port in the Eclipse HX System.
Note: For Eclipse HX-PiCo, only ports 17 to 32 can be configured for DTMF
access codes.
You can configure a TEL-14 module that is connected to a MVX-A16 port with a
setting that tells the port to recognize any, all, or none of the configured DTMF
access codes.
If any MVX-A16 port has been configured to recognize one or more of the
DTMF access codes, then that port allows any caller to access the system who
correctly enters a recognized access code.
Note: Access codes are formed of numeric characters and must be four digits
long. EHX does not allow a password field containing fewer than four
characters, and only accepts numerals.
When a user manually dials, the DTMF tones go out on the last selected talk to
an interface. An interface is either a TEL-14, CCI-22, FOR-22 or a Direct.
Page 55
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-21 Example DTMF Passcodes
The PIN protected menus on V-Series panels are:
 Sys Config Access
 Local Pref Menu access
 Diagnostic Menu Access
For FreeSpeak II beltpacks, the Admin Options menu is protected.
You can enter a 16 digit passcode to enable Production Maestro Pro to operate
with the matrix. The passcode also enables the Agent IC Mobile Client.
This passcode is purchased / obtained from Clear-Com. For more information,
see your Clear-Com representative.
Note: If the passcode is changed, an apply with reset is required to
implement the change.
Wireless beltpacks
Use this tab to configure the system identifier and DECT parameters for
CellCom / FreeSpeak / FreeSpeak II wireless beltpacks.
For CellCom and FreeSpeak (but not FreeSpeak II), a password is required to
access the DECT Frequency Carrier Mask configuration facility. For FreeSpeak
II, this is not configured in the EHX software. For more information, contact
Clear-Com support.
Figure 3-22 Wireless Beltpacks Tab
Page 56
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
To configure the DECT frequency:
1)
Click Configure, and enter the DECT configuration password to
display the DECT configuration screen (Select Frequency Region).
Figure 3-23 Select Frequency Region
The frequency range used by the wireless system can be set:

Directly by entering the required value into the field.

By selecting the appropriate region, using the radio buttons.

By selecting the country where the wireless system is used
from the drop-down menu.
If you use either of the last two options, the correct frequency range
value is automatically inserted.
2)
To confirm the frequency range, click OK.
Over the air registration PIN code
Enter a four-digit PIN code to allow FreeSpeak II beltpacks to register
wirelessly with antennas. The default PIN code is 0000, but Clear-Com strongly
recommends that you change this for security reasons.
Panel and key operation
The Panel & Key Operation tab allows you to tailor certain panel functions
for all panels connected to the matrix frame.
Page 57
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-24 Key Operation Tab
Use this section to change the incoming Tally light color (the default is red).
The options are:
 Red. Tally light color is red
 Green. Tally light color is green.
The default function for In Use Tally is to make a port label tally (show
indication) when another port actively talks to it. This preference check box
allows that tally to be displayed when another port actively talks to it or if it
talks out to another port.
The default for the option is unchecked.
This option allows tallies to only be displayed if the corresponding listen key is
active on the panel.
If you select this option, the label of any Forced Listen port appears in the
Reply / Answerback stack of the listening panel. This can be over-ridden by
each individual port’s option to Prevent Reply Signalisation.
The option is unchecked by default.
Use this section to determine the order in which incoming calls to a panel are
stacked on the Reply Key.
 If the First caller option is selected then the calls are ordered on the
basis of first in stays on top of the stack so the reply key answers the
calls in the order they are received. I
 If the Last caller option is selected, then the calls are ordered on the
basis of last in goes to the top of the stack. This means that the Reply
Key answers stacked calls by starting with the most recent call.
The default is that the first call is answered first.
By default, there is a default crosspoint level that can be set by a V-Series
panel. This prevents panels from being able to completely mute audio. The
tickbox allows the user to remove this limitation and achieve a full cut for
crosspoint levels at the panel.
IP panels
Use this tab to determine the default Codec and IP port to be used by the IVC32 card when communicating with panels over IP. You can also configure the
jitter buffer. For more information about jitter, see 7.6 IVC-32 card panel
list.
Page 58
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-25 IP Panels tab
The Codec option specifies the algorithm used to compress the audio in digital
form for transmission over IP. Currently the default is G.722. It cannot be
disabled.
The remaining IVC-32 card parameters such as IP address and port are
configured in Cards and Ports (see 5 Configuring the Eclipse HX system).
To configure the jitter buffer, use the up and down arrow keys to select a
maximum and minimum value for LAN, WAN or Internet. For defaults, select
Use defaults.
Production Maestro Pro
Use this tab to select the type of audio level metering to be used by the
system.
Figure 3-26 Production Maestro Pro Options Metering Scale and Ballistics
The metering scale and ballistics options specify how the audio levels are
scaled and displayed.
The Nordic N9 option displays the audio level as a peak programme meter
(PPM) and gives an accurate level reading. The scale is of the type used in
Scandinavia.
The VU option displays the audio level as a Volume Unit (VU) meter and uses
Root Mean Square voltage to display the audio level. This is a commonly used
type of audio metering but does not always give the most accurate reading.
The VU meter scale has zero point at +4dBu with a decibel scale ranging nonlinearly from 20dB below this point to 3dB above.
Page 59
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Configuration download
Figure 3-27 Configuration Download tab
The Configuration Download tab allows you to specify which of the options are
selected by default when applying changes to matrix frames.
You can select (or deselect) one or more of the following options:
 Delete all locally made key assignments (Key assignments that
were made locally from either panel menus or in Online mode).
 Delete all locally made IFBs or Forced Listen assignments (IFBs
or Forced Listen assignments that were made locally from either panel
menus, Production Maestro Pro or in Online mode).
 Delete all locally made I/O level changes (Input and Output levels
that were modified by panels or Production Maestro Pro. Crosspoint I/O
levels are unaffected).
 Delete all locally made Fixed Group member changes (Fixed
Group members that were modified from a panel).
 Delete all locally made Partyline member changes (Partyline
members that were added locally from a panel).
Note: The following option only applies if an E-QUE FS II-TA Antenna/Splitter
is configured.
 Delete all un-fetched over-the-air beltpack registrations (Deletes
all beltpacks registered over-the-air but not yet brought into the
configuration using Hardware > Beltpacks > Fetch Registered
Beltpacks From Matrix. See 5.58.3 Fetching registered
beltpacks.
3.5.4
Apply changes to matrix
1)
Right click the matrix icon on the layout pane to display the context
menu.
2)
To apply the changes you have made to the configuration to the
matrix, select Apply Changes to Matrix.
Page 60
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-28 Download Dialog
Merge
3)
To merge the current EHX configuration with the rack configuration
before download, click Merge.
Use Merge if the rack configuration has been changed as a result of making
changes in EHX Online mode or from assignment panels. In these cases
changes would not be captured by the current EHX configuration and would be
lost if a download was performed without first merging the configurations.
Note: Merge has the same effect as performing a merge in Online mode and
displays the same information messages.
4)
To continue with the download to the matrix, click OK.
Options
Options displays a further dialog, which enables you to customize the
implementation of the download.
Page 61
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-29 New Configuration Download Options
You can select any or all of the following actions in Apply Changes Settings:
 Delete all locally made key assignments
 Delete all locally made IFB or Forced Listen assignments
 Delete all locally made I/O level changes
 Delete all locally made Fixed Group member changes
 Delete all locally made Partyline member changes
Note: The following option only applies if an E-QUE FS II-TA Antenna/Splitter
is configured.
 Delete all un-fetched over-the-air beltpack registrations (Deletes
all beltpacks registered over-the-air but not yet brought into the
configuration using Hardware > Beltpacks > Fetch Registered
Beltpacks From Matrix. See 5.58.3 Fetching registered
beltpacks.
You can select one of the following reset options in Reset Matrix:
 Apply changes with reset (to initialize new hardware or add trunks).
 Apply changes with reset and clear all memory (overwrite matrix with
EHX configuration).
5)
3.5.5
To continue with the download, click OK. A new configuration is
built and downloaded to the matrix.
Configuration options
You can configure each matrix using the matrix menu configuration options.
The options and sub menus are:
 Configuration Manager
 Create a New Configuration
 Upload a Configuration from Matrix Frame
 Configuration Banks
 Backup Key Status
 Restore Key Status
Configuration Manager
Use the Configuration Manager to save, load, import and export
configurations. You can also protect configurations through password
protection.
Page 62
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
In the System pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select
Configuration > Configuration Manager. The following screen
appears:
Figure 3-30 Configuration Manager Screen
2)
Enter the name of the new matrix. You might also want to enter an
optional description and configuration password.
3)
Select the Read Only checkbox if this configuration is to be fixed
as read-only.
4)
Select the Template checkbox if this configuration is to be used as
a basis for creating new configurations, by opening the
configuration and saving it as a new project.
The Profile column is color-coded:

Green indicates the configuration can be downloaded without
a reset.

Red indicates a black reset is required (clearing the matrix
memory after download). Such a reset may break trunk
tables, and is undesirable in a multi-user multi matrix
system.
The profile of a matrix describes how it interacts with other matrices in
a linked system. This column indicates whether the selected
configuration matches the existing matrix profile or whether it affects
other matrices in the linked system.
5)
Click Update Details to update the project without closing the
Configuration Manager screen.
6)
If multiple configurations are available (if configurations have been
copied or imported), select the configuration you wish to use or
edit, then press Activate Configuration to confirm.
Page 63
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Create new configuration
You can create a new configuration which may be empty or which contains
only the hardware discovered from the matrix.
To create a new configuration:
1)
In the System pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select
Configuration > Create New Configuration, and then select
either Discover Hardware or Empty.
2)
Select Configuration > Create New Configuration and then
either Discover Hardware or Empty.
3)
If you select Discover Hardware, a warning message appears
before the current hardware configuration is replaced (see below).
To continue, click Yes. EHX interrogates the matrix to obtain the
current hardware configuration.
Figure 3-31 Discover Hardware Confirmation
4)
If you select Empty, the configuration is created with no hardware
or configured devices.
Upload configuration from matrix
You can upload the last downloaded configuration, including labels, from the
matrix. This option is a backup facility that enables you to retrieve the last
downloaded configuration from the matrix (provided one has been lo aded).
You should not use it as a general way to configure the matrix.
To upload the last downloaded configuration from the matrix, in the System
pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select Configuration > Upload
Configuration from Matrix. The configuration uploads to EHX from the
matrix.
Back up key status
Use this option to upload and store a record of all the talk and listen key states
on the EHX server.
This function also saves the states of the panel microphones, panel headsets
and panel loudspeakers. For example, you could use this facility to record the
Page 64
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
state of talk and listen keys prior to a Black reset of the matrix or as a known
state prior to a production.
In the System pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select Configuration >
Back up Key Status.
This function is used in conjunction with the Restore Key Status function (see
below).
Restore key status
Use this option to download a previously saved record of the state of talk and
listen keys to the matrix to restore the talk and listen keys to their previous
states.
This function also restores the states of the panel microphones, panel headsets
and panel loudspeakers.
In the System pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select Configuration
>Restore Key Status.
This function is used in conjunction with the Back up Key Status function
(see above).
3.5.6
Firmware options
Use the Firmware options to:
 Update firmware on this matrix.
 Request a firmware report that contains the details of all the firmware
versions on the matrix cards and attached panels which support the
function.
Note: Updating the firmware is covered in 2 Getting started: installing,
starting and exiting EHX (together with upgrading CPU firmware).
Note: You can also update the firmware from the Tools menu, by selecting
Apply Firmware To Matrices.
To display a firmware report, in the System pane, right-click the matrix icon,
and select Firmware > Firmware Report
The firmware versions are listed in a text window and can be exported to a
*.csv file. This file type is usually opened by spreadsheet programs, such as
Excel. An example of a firmware report is shown in Figure 3-32.
Page 65
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 3-32 Firmware Report Display
The report provides a summary of the firmware versions, followed by a
detailed list for all devices that provide this information.
Device
Firmware information listed
CPU card
CPU cards list the boot PROM version, the
application version, the versions of the
CPLDs and the current settings of the DIP
switches.
MVX-A16 card
MVX-A16 cards list the application version
and HDLC version.
Fiber card
Fiber cards list the FPGA version.
E-QUE card
E-Que cards list the boot code version,
the FPGA version and the application
version.
IVC-32 card
IVC-32 cards list the boot code version,
the FPGA version and the application
version.
LMC-64 card
LMC-64 cards list the boot code version,
the FPGA version and the application
version.
MADI
E-MADI cards list the boot code version,
the FPGA version, the DSP version, and
the application version.
V-Series panel
V-Series main panels list the boot code
version, the application version, panel
kernel version and the file system version.
V-Series expansion panels only list boot
Page 66
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Device
Firmware information listed
and application versions.
I-Series panel
I-Series panels report the application
version.
FreeSpeak Transceiver/antennas
App, boot, hardware version.
Online FreeSpeak beltpacks (since the last
black reset)
App, boot, hardware version, role.
Table 3-3 Firmware Report Information
3.5.7
User access control
Each matrix in a project can be protected from access by unauthorized user
accounts. This is controlled using tick boxes listing the available users, and
whether they are permitted to change the selected matrix.
3.5.8
Change IP settings
You can use this feature to change the matrix IP settings.
3.5.9
Show matrix redundant IP address
You can use this feature to display the matrix redundant IP address.
3.5.10 Delete matrix from project
You can remove matrices from the project using the right click menu.
1)
In the System pane, right-click the matrix icon, and select Delete
Matrix from Project. The following warning appears:
Figure 3-33 Matrix Delete Confirmation
2)
To continue, click OK.
When the operation is complete the matrix icon is deleted from the System
pane.
3.5.11 Matrix filtering
If there are many matrices in a project, it is possible to select which matrices
are visible and configurable in the Palette. If there is more than one matrix in
Page 67
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
the project, the Configure Filters button is visible in the top left of the
screen.
1)
Select Configure Filters, the following screen appears.
Figure 3-34 Filter Matrices
2)
Deselect any matrices that you do not wish to be visible in the
Palette.
3)
Select Apply. You return to the Palette.
Note: Deselecting a matrix does not remove it from the project.
Note: Entities from filtered out matrices do not show on screens for nonfiltered frames. For example, if you filter matrix 2, then go to, say the
fixed groups screen on matrix 1, you do not see any entities from
matrix 2. This is only true for entities that are available to be assigned
- you always see already assigned entities (existing group members)
whether they are filtered or not. In addition, panel programming
maintains a separate list of filters.
Page 68
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4
Managing configurations and users
4.1
Introduction
Use the File menu to create, open and save projects
In client-server mode, you can also delete projects and export projects as
*.hxn files so that you can import them back into EHX at a later time.
4.1.1
Creating a new project
To create a new project, select File > New Project.
In Client-Only mode, the project is created immediately.
In Client-Server mode, a dialog is displayed. Enter a name for the project. To
create the new project, click Save.
4.1.2
Opening a project
To open a project, select File > Open.
In Client-Only mode, a standard Windows Open dialog is displayed. Navigate to
the project file and click Open.
A list of recently opened files is also available from the File menu.
In Client-Server mode, a dialog is displayed with a list of available projects.
Select the project and click Open.
Figure 4-1 Client-Server mode: Project list dialog
Note: If a project is already open, EHX asks if the current project should be
saved before opening the new project.
Password protection override
EHX users with Network Admin rights can open any configuration within a
project, even if a configuration password has been set in the Configuration
Page 69
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Manager. Users with Network Admin rights can also reset the password if
required.
If an EHX user without Network Admin rights tries to open a password
protected configuration within a project, they must enter the correct password.
4.1.3
Closing a project
To close a project, select File > Close. If there are unsaved changes, EHX
prompts you to save the project before closing.
Figure 4-2 Save prompt when closing a project
4.1.4
Importing and exporting a project
Note: Client-Server mode only. In Client-Only mode, files are opened directly
from the PC.
1)
To import a project / configuration (*.ccn or *.hxn file format) into
EHX select File > Import Project.
2)
Navigate to the project file you want to import. Select the file and
click Open.
The project is then displayed in the normal project selection screen and you
can select and load the required project, as described previously (see above).
Note: After a project file is imported from a previous version of EHX, it is
advisable to ensure that the matrix type is set correctly.
If the imported configuration is currently active on the matrix, and has not
been renamed, Clear-Com recommends applying the imported configuration to
the matrix before entering Online mode.
4.1.5
3)
You can export a project (*.hxn file format only) from EHX by
selecting File > Export Project.
4)
Navigate to the desired folder location. Name the file and click
Save.
Saving a project
To save the project, select File > Save Project (Ctrl-S).
Page 70
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Save project as
1)
To change the name or details of a configuration you want to save,
select File > Save Project As.
2)
In Client-Only mode, a standard Windows Save As dialog is
displayed. Enter a project name and click Save.
3)
In Client-Server mode, the Save Project dialog is displayed.
Change the name and/ or description of the project and then click
Save.
Note: Client-Server mode only: Save saves changes to the EHX database but
does not download the configuration to the Eclipse HX matrix.
To apply a configuration to the matrix, do any of the following:
o Select Tools > Apply Changes to Matrix
o From the left hand screen Tools menu, click Apply Changes to
Matrix
o Right click the matrix icon on the system frame and select Apply
Changes to Matrix from the matrix icon menu.
4.1.6
Save Production Maestro Pro information
You can save a file that holds the project information required for Production
Maestro Pro to link to frames in the project.
4.1.7
Deleting a project
Note: Client-Server mode only. In Client-Only mode, you can delete project
files directly from the PC.
To delete a project:
4.1.8
1)
Select File > Delete Project.
2)
The delete project screen is displayed. Select the project to be
deleted and click Delete.
3)
A confirmation dialog is displayed. To continue with the deletion,
click Yes.
Importing/exporting configuration keysets
You can use the Import/Export Configuration Keysets wizard (File >
Import/Export Configuration Keysets) to:
 Export all the keysets in the current configuration to an external file.
 Import all the keysets from an external file and apply those keysets to
the current configuration. Saved configuration keysets can be imported
Page 71
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
into other configurations avoiding the need to manually recreate panel
setups.
Importing configuration keysets
To import configuration keysets:
1)
Select File > Import/Export Configuration Keysets.
2)
The welcome screen of the wizard is displayed. Select Import
keysets.
Figure 4-3 Import and Export Configuration Keysets Dialog
3)
Click Next.
4)
Click Browse... to navigate to the keyset file you want to import.
To load the file into the dialog, select the file and click Open.
The default file extension for the keyset files is *.KEYSET.
Figure 4-4 Import Keyset File Dialog
5)
Page 72
To import the keysets into the current configuration, click Finish.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Exporting configuration keysets
To export configuration keysets:
1)
Select File > Import/Export Configuration Keysets.
2)
The welcome screen of the wizard is displayed. Select Export
keysets (see Figure 4-3).
3)
Click Browse... to select a folder to save the file to. Enter the
required filename.
The default file extension for the keyset files is *.KEYSET.
Figure 4-5 Exporting Configuration Keysets
4)
4.1.9
To export the keyset configurations, click Finish.
User management
1)
To access the user management facility, select File > User
Management.
Only EHX users with network administrator rights (Network Admin) can access
the user management facility.
The user management facility provides the tools necessary to administer EHX
users and control the level of system access. It is possible to:
 Add or delete users.
 Change passwords.
 Assign access levels or roles.
Currently EHX has four access levels:
 Network Admin
 Local Admin
Page 73
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 User
 Guest
Note: EHX remembers the last used login. If you are not required to save the
login, deselect the Save option in the dialog. EHX displays the name
and role of the current user on the title bar of the EHX window.
Network admin access level
The network administrator role provides unrestricted access to all of the
configuration settings on all the systems in a linked set. Network administrator
rights include:
 Configuration Management
 Configuration Allocation
 All configuration editing
 Digital Wireless setup
 IP Addressing
 Trunk Allocation
 User Management
 Online configuration
 Monitoring
 Live status under System
 Firmware update
Local-admin access level
The local administrator level provides unrestricted access to all of the
configuration settings on all the local system the user is logged in to. The
network administrator can control which matrices the local administrator can
access.
The local administrator has no access to user management and cannot change
the configuration settings on other systems in a linked set using the layout
pane, but can view a linked set configuration. The local administrator can also
view the live status of system components using the layout pane.
Local administrator rights include:
 Configuration Management
 Configuration Allocation
 All configuration editing
 Digital Wireless setup
 IP Addressing
 Online configuration
Page 74
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Monitoring
 Live status under System
 Firmware update
User access level
The user level provides access to all configuration editing and downloading
capability, including:
 Configuration Management
 Configuration Allocation
 All configuration editing
 Digital Wireless setup
 IP Addressing
 Online configuration
The user level has no access to user management or the layout pane and its
associated functions.
Guest access level
The guest level provides a minimum level login and is the default role if the
user is removed from all other groups.
The guest role only allows access to panel programming on the current system
configuration.
The guest user can open more than one system configuration in a linked set
but cannot modify any system parameters. The guest role does not allow
access to user management.
Managing user access levels
1)
To access the user management facility, select File > User
Management.
Only EHX users with network administrator rights (Network Admin) can access
the user management facility.
When EHX is initially installed a single network administrator account is
preconfigured with the username Administrator. This account can then be used
to set up other accounts as required.
When user management mode is entered a complete list is shown of all the
registered users. Users can be added, deleted and edited from this screen
Note: If the user is removed from all other groups the user becomes a Guest
user by default.
Page 75
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 4-6 User Management screen
4.1.10 Creating a new EHX user
To create a new EHX user:
1)
Select File > User Management.
Note: Only EHX users with network administrator rights (Network Admin) can
access the user management facility.
2)
The User Management screen is displayed. To add a new User ID,
click New.
A new user is added. The default access level is Network Admin (see
above).
Figure 4-7 Creating a New User
3)
Page 76
Edit the Username, Description, and Password fields. Double
click to highlight the entry.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
To delete the default entry for these fields, click Delete and type in the
new entry.
4)
To change the access level of the new user:
o Go to the Available Groups pane.
o Select either Local Admin or User and use the right arrow (>>)
to transfer that role into Group user is in.
The previous access level is replaced by the new access level in the
Group user is in pane.
5)
When you have completed your changes, click Close.
4.1.11 Editing an existing EHX user
To edit a user:
1)
Select File > User Management. The User Management screen
is displayed.
Only EHX users with network administrator rights (Network Admin) can access
the user management facility.
2)
Select the user you want to edit from the list. To modify the
Username, Password, Description or access level groups the
user belongs to, follow Steps 3 - 5 in Creating a New EHX User
above.
3)
When you have completed your changes, click Close.
4.1.12 Deleting a user
To delete a user:
1)
Select File > User Management. The User Management screen
is displayed.
Only EHX users with network administrator rights (Network Admin) can access
the user management facility.
Ensure that a network administrator is logged into EHX to access user
management.
2)
Select the user you want to delete and click Delete.
A confirmation prompt is displayed. To continue with the removal of the
user, click Yes.
3)
To exit the User Management screen, click Close.
Note: One valid network administrator account must always be available to
allow login to EHX and to access User Management. You cannot delete
Page 77
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
either the default network administrator account or the currently
logged in user account.
Note: If you delete a user from the User Management screen, the user will
be highlighted in red in the Access Control Screen to indicate that
the user previously had access permission. If you deselect the user, the
user will no longer be visible in the Access Control Screen.
4.2
The EHX screen after a project has been loaded
When a project has been loaded for editing:
 The EHX menus are displayed on the left hand side of the screen.
 The Tools > Apply changes to matrix link is enabled.
The Diagnostics menu is only displayed if a valid system configuration is
present.
Figure 4-8 Menu Display with Projects Loaded
Note: The Go Online button enables EHX to enter Online mode. This enables
some matrix configuration items (highlighted in green) to be modified
interactively without needing to download a new configuration.
Page 78
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5
Configuring the Eclipse HX system
5.1
Using the EHX menus
The EHX menus are used to configure and manage your Eclipse HX system
devices, including:
 Matrix hardware ports and interface cards (including MVX-A16 analog
port cards, E-QUE E1/T1 cards, IVC-32 IP cards, LMC-64 metering
cards, E-FIB fiber cards, E-MADI64 cards and E-QUE wireless cards).
 Interface modules (AES-6, TEL-14, FOR-22, CCI-22, RLY-6, and GPI-6
modules).
 User panels (V-Series and I-Series) and Agent IC Mobile Client.
 Concert Clients.
 Wireless intercom systems (such as CellCom / FreeSpeak and
FreeSpeak II).
You can use the EHX menus to set up and manage partylines, Sort Groups,
Key Groups, routes, speed dials, wireless beltpacks and beltpack roles, and
configure GPIs and GPOs, as well as many other tasks.
Figure 5-1 Eclipse HX Main Menu
Various menu items may be highlighted amber to indicate possible
configuration issues:
Menu
Highlighted when …
System
There is an open project, but not an open
configuration.
There is an open configuration but the
matrix type is not set.
Page 79
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Menu
Highlighted when …
There are multiple matrices in the system
but the fiber ring is judged to be incorrect.
Cards and Ports
There are no ports configured for a
particular matrix.
IP Devices
There are IP cards which do not have any
available ports
Beltpacks
There are antennas but no beltpacks
Panels
There are key groups which do not have
members
There are configured panels but no
configured keys
Controls
There are speed dials but no controls.
Table 5-1 Highlighted configuration issues
5.2
Matrix hardware
The Hardware menu is used to build up the configuration of the Eclipse HX
system.
The Eclipse HX system combines hardware items with port functions. Hardware
items may include configuration cards, interface cards, ports (panels or
Interfaces) and RLY-6/GPI-6 modules. Port functions also use this link and
provides access to the advanced settings for ports and also where local
preferences are configured.
Note: To build a configuration, at least one MVX-A16 or IVC-32 card must be
configured in an Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median or Eclipse HXDelta matrix. If no cards are fitted, the first available slot should be
configured in EHX as if an MVX-A16 card or E-QUE wireless card was
present in order for the map to build.
5.3
Selecting card slots
When in the Cards and Ports menu, you have a list of card slots in the lefthand side of the System Pane. You can select a slot by clicking on it. You can
select multiple slots by pressing the Shift key and clicking. You can also select
and deselect non-adjacent slots by pressing the Ctrl key and clicking.
5.4
Fonts
A number of fonts are supported by Eclipse HX systems allowing suitable
panels to display labels in Latin and certain non-Latin scripts. The fonts
supported by Eclipse HX systems are described below with the panel support.
Eclipse HX has additional font support for the V-Series panels:
 Basic Latin. The backslash is a Yen character. This is a size-maximized
font (no descenders, lower-case characters are not relative in size to
Page 80
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
upper-case characters). This covers Unicode 32 to 127 (decimal), 0x20
to 0x7F (hex). The V-Series panel display supports ten characters.
 Cyrillic. This is a normal, relatively-sized font. The V-Series panel
display supports ten characters. Covers Unicode 1024 to 1279
(decimal), 0x400 to 0x4FF (hex) with some missing characters.
 Hiragana. The V-Series panel display supports five characters. This
covers the codepoint range 12352 to 12447 (decimal), 0x3040 to
0x309F (hex).
 Full-width Katakana. The V-Series panel display supports five
characters as this is a normal wide font. This covers the codepoint
range 12448 to 12543 (decimal), 0x30A0 to 0x30FF (hex) with some
missing characters.
 Kanji. There are about 17,000 out of the 21,000 characters. The VSeries panel display supports five characters. This covers the codepoint
range 19968 to 40895 (decimal), 0x4E00 to 0x9FBF (hex).
 Hangul. The V-Series panel display supports five characters, codepoint
range is 44032 to 55215 (decimal), 0xAC00 to 0xD7AF (hex).
 Half-width katakana. The V-Series panel supports ten characters.
The codepoint range is 65376 to 65440 (decimal), 0xFF60 to 0xFFA0
(hex).
 Arabic. The V-Series panel supports the Basic Arabic character set
0x0600 to 0x06FF.
 Hebrew.
5.4.1
Basic Latin
Basic Latin labels can be displayed on all the panels with a display capability.
The maximum number of characters displayed depends on the type of panel.
5.4.2
Cyrillic
Cyrillic labels requires Russian language support to be installed in Windows and
either an ASCII keyboard with Russian character support or a Cyrillic keyboard.
Cyrillic is only supported on V-Series panels.
5.4.3
Hangul
Hangul labels require Korean language support to be installed in Windows and
either an ACSCII keyboard with Korean language support or a Korean language
keyboard. Hangul is only supported on V-Series panels.
Page 81
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.4.4
Hiragana, Katakana and Kanji
Hiragana, Katakana and Kanji labels require Japanese language support to be
installed in Windows and either an ASCII keyboard with Japanese character
support or a Japanese language keyboard.
Hiragana, Katakana, half-width Katakana and Kanji labels can be displayed on
V-Series panel only while some other panel types can support half-width
Katakana. If an attempt is made to place a Hiragana, Katakana or Kanji label
onto a panel with a display that is not compatible the label either fails to
display correctly (may display question marks) or does not display at all.
5.4.5
Arabic
The V-Series panel supports the Basic Arabic character set 0x0600 to
0x06FF.The following are not supported:
 Arabic Extended-A
 Arabic Presentation Forms A
 Arabic Presentation Forms B
 Rumi Numeral Symbols
 Arabic Mathematical Alphabetic Symbols
The Arabic characters are drawn right to left unless it is an Arabic number 0 to
9 (0x0660 to 0x669) which is written left to right.
The Unicode Characters in the General Punctuation Block characters 0x2000 to
0x206F are stripped out of the text string.
5.4.6
Half-width Hiragana, Katakana and Kanji compatible
panels
The following panels can display half-width Katakana labels:
 V12LD
 V24LD
 V12LDD
 V12PD
 V24PD
 V12PDD
 V12RD
 V24RD
 V12RDD
 V12LDE
 V12PDE
Page 82
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 V12RDE
Katakana and Kanji labels may be entered in exactly the same way as normal
labels provided the prerequisite software and hardware is present.
Page 83
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.5
System configuration limits
The configuration limits for the Eclipse HX matrix system are as follows:
Configuration item
Limit (Max. number)
Fixed Groups
999 (across whole linked set)
Partylines
399 (across whole linked set)
Partyline members
64
IFBs
200
GPSF
3200
Controls
999
Physical ports
496 (36 on Eclipse HX-PiCos)
Beltpack roles
200
Matrices
64
Keys
249600
Table 5-2: Configuration limits
5.6
Online configuration
Online configuration allows the EHX user to directly access configuration
information from the matrix and update the matrix configuration used by EHX.
All the Online Configuration facilities require an Ethernet connection to the
matrix.
Note: Online mode is described in more detail in 10 Online mode.
5.7
Matrix hardware setup
To begin configuring the matrix hardware, go to Hardware > Cards and
Ports.
Page 84
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-2 Initial Matrix Hardware Screen (HX Omega)
If the matrix is available on the network (the correct firmware has been loaded
and the IP address has been set up), the hardware can be auto -detected by
clicking Detect New Hardware at the top of the screen.
Note: Detect New Hardware is only visible if the Port List Options drop
down list at the top of the screen is active.
From the Cards and Ports screen, you can add cards to the available slots on
the matrix. You can choose between the following cards:
 MVX-A16 cards – used mainly to connect intercom panels and four-wire
devices to the matrix
 E-Que cards – used to connect wireless intercom systems such as
FreeSpeak, CellCom and FreeSpeak II and for E1/T1 connection
between matrices.
 IVC-32 cards – used to connect IP-enabled V-Series panels, Concert
and Agent IC Mobile Client.
 LMC-64 cards – used to allow Eclipse HX matrices to be provide audio
level metering data to Production Maestro clients over an IP network.
 E-FIB cards – used to provide trunking between matrices.
 E-MADI cards – used to provide up to 64 duplex channels over a
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI).
5.7.1
System limits
The following limits apply:
Page 85
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 IVC-32, E-Que and LMC-64 cards are high-power devices, and you can
only install a total of four of these cards in an Eclipse Median or Delta
frame. If more high-power cards are installed, the CPU only services
the first four cards (based on lower slot numbers). In this case, a
warning message is sent to the event log every 10 minutes. See 14.2
Matrix event log.
 In an Eclipse Omega frame that is fitted with a Power-One PSU
(720379Z), you can install up to a total of six high-power cards. In this
case, you are recommended to install a fan tray. However, you cannot
install more than four antenna/splitter E-Que cards, or more than four
E-Que cards with EM Signalling enabled. For more information about
the Power-One PSU, including part number see 5.7 Power Supplies in
the Eclipse HX Omega User Guide.
This information is summarized in the table below:
Card
Maximum number
with Power-One PSU
(720379Z)
Maximum number
with other PSU
IVC-32
6
4
LMC-64
6
4
E-Que
antenna/splitter
4
4
E-Que with EM
signalling enabled
4
4
E-Que other
6
4
If you attempt to add a high-power card to a matrix that already has the
maximum number installed, a warning displays.
Figure 5-3 Overheating warning
If you add fifth or sixth high-power card to an Omega matrix the following
message appears:
Page 86
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-4 Power Supply Warning
To continue, add the model number of your PSU.
Note: Fitting a fan tray is recommended if you install more than four highpower cards.
5.8
Adding an MVX-A16 card
The MVX-A16 is a 16 port matrix card designed to connect 16 intercom panels,
interfaces or external four-wire devices to the Eclipse HX System (Eclipse HXOmega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta only). MVX-A16 cards can be
added, removed and viewed in the matrix hardware screen.
Figure 5-5 Eclipse HX Empty Slots
To add an MVX-A16 card:
1)
Page 87
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2)
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select MVX-A16.
3)
Repeat this step for the number of required MVX cards.
Note: MVX-A16 cards must already be fitted into the Eclipse HX matrix with
no empty slots left between the cards.
Note: You can also change an existing card by right-clicking the slot and
selecting Set Card Type. (Changing the type of card deletes any ports,
panels and keys that exist on the card).
5.9
Removing an MVX-A16 card
To remove an MVX-A16 card from the configuration:
1)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to the slot number of
the MVX-A16 card you want to delete.
2)
Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
3)
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select Empty.
4)
A warning dialog is displayed. To confirm the deletion, click Yes.
Figure 5-6 Ports on MVX-16 Card
5.10
Port list options
Click Port List Options at the top of the screen to hide or show the Show All
Ports, Detect New Hardware and Show Alt Text buttons, and the Search
dialog.
Page 88
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.11
Selecting ports on the card
When you select a card in the list of Card Slots, you see all the card's ports,
configured and unconfigured, in the System Pane.
Note: If you use the shift and Ctrl keys to select more than one card, only
configured ports are shown.
5.12
Show all ports
This option is available from the top of the screen. When you select this option,
all the cards are selected, and all configured ports on any card are shown in
the System pane.
5.13
Detect new hardware
This option is available from the top of the screen. If the matrix is available on
the network (the correct firmware has been loaded and the IP address has
been set up), the hardware can be auto-detected by clicking Detect New
Hardware. Click Detect New Hardware to auto detect new hardware.
5.14
Show Alt Text
There is an alternative text key called Alt Text that you can configure on
panels to enable text to change between normal text and alternate text.
The Show Alt Text key can be placed anywhere on the panel. This key can be
placed on all shift pages concurrently if desired to allow easy access.
When selected it will turn red, and the panel will show the alternate text.
Alias, VSM and PM text labels will override whichever state the panel is in.
You can enter alternate text on all the entity screens. You can toggle the Show
Alt Text button to show or hide the alternate text.
One possible use of alternate text is to set up a dual language configuration on
the panel, for example to allow panels to display Arabic by default in a
particular Middle Eastern broadcast installation. English speakers could then
select the Show Alt Text key on a panel to see the English equivalents to the
Arabic labels.
Another use could be that both the role name and user name could be
configured for each panel or beltpack port. This would allow panel users to see
either the name or the role depending on the Alt Text mode selected.
Click Show Alt Text to display or hide the alternative text.
5.15
Port number
The Port Number field is non-editable. Port numbering is presented in the
format <Card>.<Position> (<Absolute Position>), where:
<Card> is the card slot of the interface card.
Page 89
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
<Position> is the port number on the interface card.
<Absolute Position> is the port number that is achieved by counting through
all the ports on the matrix (including all the ports on the cards that were
installed to the matrix before this card).
5.16
Port function
Each port in a system must be assigned a port function which specifies the
port’s intended use, including what type of device is connected to the port.
The port’s intended use is important as the system treats a port differently if it
is connected to a user panel rather than a telephone interface for example.
Port Function can be entered manually, or automatically detected by the Detect
Hardware feature if devices that support the function are connected and
powered.
The Port Function column displays each port’s functions according to the
current configuration. Each line in this column features a drop-down menu
listing the available port type options.
To set the port function:
1)
Click the Port Function field. A drop-down menu is displayed.
Figure 5-7 Port Function > Port Type menu
2)
From the drop-down menu, select the desired device (user panels
and interfaces that may be connected to the port).
The available device types are listed below:

Page 90
Empty
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

AES Mono

CCI-22

HelixNet

Direct (4 wire external)

FOR-22

I-Station

Panel Aux

Telephone (TEL-14)

Trunk (matrix to matrix network trunk line)

V 1RU Lever

V 1RU Push

V 1RU Rotary

V 2RU Lever

V 2RU Push

V 2RU Rotary

V Desktop Lever

V Desktop Push

V Desktop Rotary
Note: If you right-click on a port and select Find Usages, a list of .other EHX
entities which refer to the port is given.
5.16.1 Device details
 AES Mono - Used with the AES-6-RJ and AES-6-CX interfaces
providing a monaural connection to third party equipment.
 CCI-22— Used with the CCI-22 interface card, or other interface to a
physical 2-Wire Party Line. Call signals are sent to and received from
an external Clear-Com party line in the same way that they are sent
between panels within the Eclipse HX System.
 HelixNet—Used with the HelixNet digital partyline system.
 Direct— Used to connect directly to an external 4 wire or balanced
audio device.
 FOR-22— Used with the FOR-22 interface card. This has a number of
different functions. The commonly used applications are:
o Two-Way Radio—When the 2-Way Radio port function is
selected, the port is configured to operate a push-to-talk two-way
Page 91
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
radio system. The call signal output activates a relay to key the
radio’s transmitter.
If the FOR-22 is to be used as a 2-Way Radio from remote systems, the FOR22 relay should be added as a secondary action in Attached Control Options.
When the FOR-22 is in 2-Way Radio mode, the rack has control of the relay
and automatically fires it.
o Four-wire —When the port is wired directly to an external device.
Normally four-wire functions are only audio connections and do
not use call signals. By default, when a four-wire port is connected
to an FOR-22 four-wire Audio Interface, a call signal sent to the
port from the Eclipse HX System activates the FOR-22 channel’s
relay. Alternatively, this relay can be activated by attaching the
relay name to a control label configured in the Control Manager.
When the FOR-22 is in four-wire mode the relay will not automatically fire. To
make the relay fire when a talk path to the FOR-22 is created a control must
be created and added as a secondary action in the Attached Control Options
for the FOR-22.
o When enabled in Partyline mode the FOR-22 allows panels to
listen to all commands to/from the interface.
 I-Station - Used to drive an I-Station.
 Panel Aux - Used with an AES-6-CX interface providing a binaural
connection to a panel supporting split-ear operation. This port type
must be configured as part of a pair of ports to provide a binaural
connection to the panel. The first or master port of the pair is
configured for the attached panel in the normal way and the Aux Port is
the second port configured under Basic Settings.
 Telephone (TEL-14)—Used to operate a TEL-14 Telephone Interface.
The call signal output is used as a request from the Eclipse HX system
for the interface to go off-hook. A call signal sent from the TEL-14
interface to the Eclipse HX indicates that the line is ringing or that the
line is off-hook.
 Trunk - Used to allow the port to function as an intelligent trunk line to
a remote matrix. The connection must be configured in the System
pane and cannot be configured from the Matrix Hardware setup. The
Linking Options shown under the Advanced Settings menu is for
information only.
 V 1RU Lever - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
 V 1RU Push - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
 V 1RU Rotary - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
 V 2RU Lever - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
 V 2RU Push - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
Page 92
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 V 2RU Rotary - Used to drive a V-Series panel.
 V Desktop Lever - Used to drive a V-Series lever key desktop panel.
 V Desktop Push - Used to drive a V-Series pushbutton desktop panel.
 V Desktop Rotary - Used to drive a V-Series rotary desktop panel
Used to
Note: The Eclipse HX matrix may require different code in the MVX-A16
cards. See the customer release note on the software DVD-ROM.
5.17
Summary of expansion panels
The following devices are expansion panels and cannot be selected from the
matrix hardware drop-down menu. They are only selectable from the
expansion panel menu under Panel Options. The panels/devices listed vary
depending on the type of master panel they are being configured with.
The expansion panels supported by EHX are:
 V12LDE Panel
 V12PDE Panel
 V12RDE Panel
 E-Station
 V-Station
Note: Details of which expansion panels are supported by the various panels
are given in the section on 5.22.4 Panel options.
5.17.1 Deleting a port assignment
After a port has been configured in EHX, the port key assignments and
advanced settings can be deleted.
To delete port assignments and settings:
5.18
1)
Select the Port Function field. A drop-down list appears.
2)
Select Empty.
Label
A label is used to identify a port. In general, whatever is in the label field is
how the port will be displayed to the end users on key panels, partylines,
Production Maestro and other tools.
Labels can contain up to 10 characters, using numbers, capital letters, all
punctuation marks and blank spaces. A label can be split into two parts, each
part containing a maximum of five characters. For information about the
supported character sets, see 5.4 Fonts.
Page 93
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The £ (pound) sign is not a valid character and results in the configuration map
being rejected by the Eclipse HX System.
Note: If the appropriate option is selected in Preferences > Intelligent
Linking tab, the local talk labels may be prefixed with the system
number.
5.19
Description
Use the description to provide additional information about the port function.
This may help you to configure the system. The description does not affect
system behavior.
The description field is limited to 23 characters.
5.20
Sorting ports
Each of the columns in the Cards and Ports screen has a sort capability. To
sort on a column move the mouse cursor over the name of the required
column. Click to sort the column.
Each column sorts as follows:
 Port Function – Groups together Ports functions, then toggles
between first and last on the screen.
 Label – Alphabetically sorts, using the Talk component of the label,
then the Listen component of the label. Numerical labels come first,
then lettered labels. If you click the column again, the sort toggles
between first and last ports.
 Description – Sorts on numerical fields then letter fields.
5.21
Column/row resizing
In the System Ports screen, you can resize rows and columns by moving the
mouse cursor over a row or column. When the cursor changes to a double
ended arrow, left click and hold the mouse button and drag to the required
size.
5.22
Port properties
Port Properties enables you to tailor the behavior of a selected port.
To view the port properties for a particular port:
1)
Select the required interface card.
2)
Select the relevant port. The Port Properties appear to the right
of the System pane.
You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple ports so that you can
simultaneously change a number of ports. When selecting multiple ports, only
Page 94
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
items which are common for all selected ports are displayed. Any settings
which differ on the selected ports are highlighted with a red border.
By default the Port Properties tabs is initially not displayed in expanded
form. To expand a class of advanced settings click on the > beside the
heading. The Port Properties that are available depend on the type of device
the port is configured for.
Hovering over the advanced option with the mouse will provide a tool tip on
that setting.
The Port Properties options for panels and Interfaces are described below.
5.22.1 Assignment panel (AP) options
Note: Applies to V-Series and I-Series Panels only.
The Port Properties options for an AP panel (Assignment Panel) enable
features that can be performed directly from the panel keys. They include:
 Fixed Group Assignment. Set to True or False (default False). Allows
the panel operator to select ports to be assigned to a fixed group.
 IFB Assignment. Set to True or False (default False). Allows the panel
operator to select ports as sources to be assigned to an IFB.
 Partyline Assignment. Set to True or False (default False). Allows the
panel operator to select ports as fixed members of a party line.
5.22.2 Auxiliary relay options
The Port Properties options for an Auxiliary Relay are as follows:
Has associated relay
The port device controls a relay (similar to secondary action).
For example if an external device is connected to an MVX-A16 and that
external device can control a relay the relay can be controlled through this
setting.
Applies to:
Direct connections.
5.22.3 Basic options
The following Basic options are available:
Port number
The port number the device is configured on.
Note: Not available on Concert panels.
Page 95
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Alias (remote matrix)
Specifies the remote system the trunk device is connected to. This is
configured in System and is displayed in Advanced Settings for information
only. It cannot be set using Advanced Settings.
Note: Only used on Trunk devices.
Alt Text
Provides an entry field for the alternative text label on this port.
Comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the port or
device.
Description
The Description field in the port settings table.
Dial code
Provides information on the unique dial code for this port.
Module application
Allows you to select the application type for the module:
 Partyline - this is used with a CCI-22 interface module to connect to an
Encore Partyline system. See 5.16.1 Device details.
 Two-Way Radio – this is used with a FOR-22 interface module to
connect to a third-party two-way radio system. See 5.16.1 Device
details.
 Direct – this is used with a four-wire connection
 HelixNet – this is used with the HelixNet digital partyline system.
Note: The Module Application selection is only available with the IVC-32
card when Port Function is set to Hosted Direct. Hosted Direct is an
option to enable up to two additional IP channels on an IVC-32 card.
Note: If you select Partyline, Two-Way Radio or HelixNet on a second
additional sub-channel, the Mute Relay option for the parent channel
is no longer active.
Note: There is no DTMF support for the Module Applications.
Label
The Listen Label specified in the port settings table (a combined Talk/Listen
label is shown unless the option for 10 character labels is turned off).
Page 96
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Parent port
Select a parent port for the Hosted Direct sub channel. This sub-channel is
always grouped with the parent port. If you resort the list of ports according to
Port Number, each sub-channel is listed with its parent port.
Note: The Parent Port selection is only available with the IVC-32 card when
Port Function is set to Hosted Direct. This setting indicates which
IVC32 port (on the same card) is the port number of the hosting VSeries panel.
Reserve port
Setting the port as shared reserves the port for trunked applications. Reserve
port has no function when matrices are not fiber linked.
Note: Not available for AES Mono and Panel Aux.
Split label
If Split Label is set the first five characters and the last five characters of a
label are displayed separately. If this option is not set all ten characters are
shown (on panels that support ten characters). The main label is colored red
and green to denote split ports.
Applies to:
The Description, Comments, Label and Port Number fields are available for all
port devices unless noted otherwise.
5.22.4 Panel options
The following Panel options are available:
Reply tally auto clear time
The time interval for automatic answerback in seconds. To adjust the time,
select answerback time to display the slider and set the time as required. The
time can be set from 1 to 60 seconds. Setting to off prevents the system from
clearing the reply tally automatically. The default is 10 seconds.
Display brightness
Sets the display brightness on panels that have a suitable display. To adjust
the display brightness select the brightness box to display the adjustment
slider and use the mouse to drag the slider to the required setting. The
brightness is adjustable from 0 to 10. The default setting is 3.
Note: Not available on Concert panel.
Display dim timer
Sets the time interval in minutes before the display on an inactive panel is
dimmed to extend the display's longevity. To adjust the time setting select the
timer box to display the adjustment slider and use the mouse to drag the slider
Page 97
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
to the required setting. The timer is adjustable from 1 minutes to 60 minutes.
.A setting of Always Dim forces the display to permanently show the dim
state.
Once the display is dimmed, the Screen Saver Timer starts to run. See Keep
hidden keys active
When enabled, the I-Station keeps calls on inactive shift pages alive. When
disabled, any latched calls are ended when the user navigates away from the
shift page. The default is disabled.
Note: Only available on I-Station Panels.
Screen saver timer.
Note: Only available V-Series panels.
Eavesdropping (privacy)
When this is deselected, other panels cannot eavesdrop on a panel’s
microphone input, unless that panel has an active talk key pressed to another
port in the Eclipse HX System. If this box is checked, other panels can monitor
a panel’s microphone input, even without any activated talk keys. By default a
panel’s microphone output is off until a talk key is pressed. The panel’s Mic
ON/OFF control always takes priority over eavesdropping.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: Eavesdropping must be enabled (checked) for a panel to act as an ISO
destination is set so that the panel microphone can be remotely
enabled by the ISO if it is not enabled at the destination.
Expansion panels
Some types of panels can support multiple expansion panels. If this option is
available selecting the expansion panel number attached box opens a menu
showing the type of expansion panels that can be fitted to the host panel. The
types of expansion panels listed vary according to the main panel type.
 V12LD - V12LDE may be fitted.
 V24LD - V12LDE may be fitted.
 V12PD - V12PDE may be fitted.
 V24PD - V12PDE may be fitted.
 V12RD - V12RDE may be fitted.
 V24RD - V12RDE may be fitted.
 V12LDD – V12LDE may be fitted.
 V12PDD - V12PDE may be fitted.
 V12RDD - V12RDE may be fitted.
 i-Station - E Station, V Station may be fitted.
Page 98
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Headset mic type
The Headset Mic Type allows the type of headset microphone to be configured.
To set the microphone type highlight the item to allow the drop-down menu to
be displayed. The options for headset microphones are Dynamic Balanced,
Dynamic Unbalanced (default) and Electret. This setting applies to headsets 1
and 2 on panels that support multiple headsets.
Headset PTT function
The Push To Talk (PTT) function allows the action for PTT to be selected. The
options are:
 No Function
 Activate All Talk Keys
 Activate Two-Way Radio.
The default is No Function. This function is triggered by any of the PTT inputs
on a panel.
In the case of V-Series panels this function only relates to XLR-4 and XLR-5
type headsets that have been modified for PTT. V-Series XLR-7 headsets and
headsets connected to the auxiliary audio connector use the logic 1 and 2
inputs (see 5.22.13 Logic input options).
The effect of these functions are:
 No Function - PTT has no effect.
 Activate All Talk Keys - PTT activates audio paths on all latched talk
keys. Non-latching talk keys are not activated.
 Activate Two-Way Radio - PTT activates audio paths on all latched talk
keys connected to two-way radios (normally via a FOR-22 unit).
Note: Not available on Concert panels.
Headset LS cut
When enabled this facility automatically cuts the audio to the panel
loudspeaker if a headset is detected. The default setting is enabled.
Note: Only available on V-Series panels.
Latchable Reply Key
This facility enables you to set the Reply Key as latchable. When it is latched,
the Reply Key will not timeout. If you have stacked Reply Keys, a latched Reply
Key is unlatched if you leave the Reply Key when navigating stacked keys with
the up and down volume keys. The key is also unlatched after doing a red
reset, see 13.1.1 Apply changes with reset (red reset).
Note: If the incoming call is from a panel that has Global Options > Latch
Disable checked, the Reply Key will not latch even if Latchable Reply
Key is checked. If a different panel, without this setting, calls in this
key can be latched.
Page 99
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: Only available on V-Series panels.
Listen again auto delete
The Listen again auto delete timeout sets the length of time in minutes before
a message recorded in the listen again buffer is automatically deleted. It
ranges from 1 to 100 minutes. It is possible to disable the autodelete.
Note: Only available on V-Series panels.
Mute relay
If this is enabled, the local panel GPO mute relay is fired when a Talk only key
is pressed on that panel. The default setting is false.
Note: This function is not active if you configure the V-Series panel with a
second additional sub-channel that has function Two-Way Radio,
Partyline or HelixNet. See 5.44 Adding an IVC-32 card.
Nearby panel partial
This attribute affects the way that Nearby Panels configured in Local
Advanced operate.
The Nearby Panel Partial attribute is set to True to enable audio from
nearby panels to be routed to the headset. If it is not set audio from nearby
panels is cut completely to prevent audio feedback.
Page override allowed
The panel main volume audio can be overridden by paging audio from another
panel. The default setting is disabled. For Page Override to operate this must
be set to True on any destination panel where the local main volume setting
may need to be overridden by a calling panel. This is used in conjunction with
Page Gain.
Note: Only available on Concert, V-Series panels.
Page gain
Allows the Page Override gain to be set.
Select the required level. The level range is from 0 to 10dB. The default
volume setting is 0dB.
This is used in conjunction with Page Override.
Note: Only available on Concert, V-Series and I-Series Panels.
Gooseneck mic type
The Gooseneck Mic Type allows you to select the panel microphone type.
To set the microphone type, highlight the item and select from the drop down
list.
Page 100
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Panel text orientation
Determines the orientation of label text.
Note: Only available on V-Series panels
Line release
Allows the panel to release the selected telephone line which may be held on
by the incoming caller anywhere in the system. The default is disabled.
Note: Not available on Concert.
Keep hidden keys active
When enabled, the I-Station keeps calls on inactive shift pages alive. When
disabled, any latched calls are ended when the user navigates away from the
shift page. The default is disabled.
Note: Only available on I-Station Panels.
Screen saver timer
The screen saver timer facility sets the length of time a panel is inactive elapse
before the screen saver is displayed. The screen saver is used to prevent the
display being damaged by being left for long periods with the same display.
The time may be set to any value between 1 and 60 minutes. It cannot be
disabled.
If the dim timer is set to a value other than Always Dim the screen saver timer
only starts after the screen has dimmed. For example if the dim timer is set to
1 minute and the screen saver timer is set to 1 minute the screen saver starts
after 2 minutes. If the dim timer is set to Always Dim the screen saver
inactivity timer starts immediately.
Note: Only available on V-Series Panels.
5.22.5 IP port options
Note: IP Port Options are only available for ports on IVC-32 cards that are
not Hosted Direct.
The IP port options are as follows:
UserID
ID required for the port to log in to the system via the IVC-32 card. The user
ID is set in EHX and also entered at the other end of the link. The User ID field
must be unique for each port in the linked set of configurations.
Note: The UserID is 10 characters long (including spaces) and is case
sensitive.
Page 101
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Network connection
Selects the network connection type for an IP connection. Select from LAN
(high speed), WAN (intermediate) or Internet (low speed) from a drop-down
menu. The default setting is LAN.
Audio codec
Allows the codec (G.722) to be selected for IP connections.
Password
Panel password required for the port to log in to the system via the IVC-32
card. The password is set in EHX and also entered at the other end of the link.
Note: The Password is 10 characters long (including spaces) and is case
sensitive. The password field can be left blank for convenience if
security is not a concern.
VOIP caller
Enables the port as the initiator of the VOIP setting.
Note: Only available on IP Trunks and IP Directs.
Remote IP address
The IP address for the remote device
Note: Only available on IP Directs.
UDP comm. port
The UDP communication port for the remote device.
Note: Only available on IP Directs.
Remote user ID
The unique user ID for the remote device. The maximum length for a user ID
is ten characters including spaces.
Note: The Password is 10 characters long (including spaces) and is case
sensitive.
Note: Only available on IP Directs.
Remote password
The password for the remote device. The maximum length for the password is
ten characters including spaces.
Note: The Password is 10 characters long (including spaces) and is case
sensitive.
Note: Only available on IP Directs.
Page 102
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.22.6 Menu options
Local preferences access
Allow access to the local preferences menu via the local menu option. This
allows access to audio level control, brightness settings, timeouts and
crosspoint reset. Access may be enabled for all users (True), denied to all
users (False) or controlled by the PIN number.
Select the option and click on the arrow to open the drop-down menu. Select
the required access.
Note: Only on V-Series and I-Stations.
Diagnostic menu access
Allow access to the panel diagnostic menu via the local menu option. This
allows some panel information to be displayed and access to panel reset and
telephone line release functions. Access may be enabled for all users (True),
denied to all users (False) or controlled by the PIN number.
Select the option and click on the arrow to open the drop-down menu. Select
the required access.
Note: Only on V-Series panels.
Messaging enabled
Allows V-Series panels access to the Messaging facility. This is enabled by
default.
Note: Only on V-Series Panels.
Dial Mode Access
Enables access to dial mode, where the panel has a dial pad for DTMF dialling.
This is enabled by default.
Note: Only on I-Station Panels.
System Information Menu Access
Enables access to the System information menu on the panel. This allows the
panel user to view major system settings. This is enabled by default.
Note: Only on I-Station Panels.
System configuration menu access
Allows access to the system configuration menu via the local menu option. This
allows access to partyline, fixed group, remote panel, local panel, forced listen,
input level and output level menus. Access may be enabled for all users (True),
denied to all users (False) or controlled by the PIN number.
1)
Page 103
Select the option and click on the arrow to open the drop-down
menu. Select the required access.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: Only on V-Series Panels.
Supervisor mode access
Enables the panel to supervise another panel. When enabled it creates a key
that puts the panel into supervisor mode.
Note: Only on V-Series Panels.
5.22.7 Voice operated switch (VOX) options
Four settings are available under Port Properties > Voice Operated Switch.
These settings determine how the audio gate operates.
 Audio Gating Delay determines how quickly the audio gate closes when
the operator stops speaking. Adjust this value so that the audio gate
does not close too early and cut off words at the end of sentences or
during small gaps.
 Audio Gating turns the audio gate function on or off. By default, this
setting is off. This function gates (performs a logical AND) on the
crosspoint and the VOX detection threshold. If the crosspoint is made
from the port and the input VOX level exceeds the detection threshold
then audio is passed to the port.
 Audio Presence Tally (also known as VOX tally) causes a panel’s listen
key to flash on a panel whenever audio above the set threshold level is
detected.
 Audio Detection Threshold sets the audio level at which the audio gate
opens. Typically the threshold value is set at the level of a human
voice, so that when a person speaks into the microphone, the audio
gate switches open to allow audio onto the intercom line. When the
person stops speaking, the gating delay passes and the gate closes,
regardless of the fact that background noise may be present.
Recommended levels are -3dB for panels and -20dB for interfaces.
If the VOX control option is configured, VOX activates when the gate opens.
Audio gating delay
This option determines the length of delay in seconds before the audio gate
closes after the audio level falls below the preset threshold.
Set the delay value from 0 to 4 seconds. The greater the value the longer the
delay before the audio is cut. This can be used to ensure that the audio is not
cut during short pauses
Audio gating
An audio gate allows EHX to restrict or gate background noise at a panel
microphone or interface’s input so that the background noise does not transmit
to the intercom line. When the audio gate is activated the panel or interface
Page 104
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
operates as a flexible voice operated switch, which only transmits audio when
it detects an audio signal above the threshold.
To enable Audio Gating, enable the tickbox.
A check appears on the screen to indicate the feature is on. The check
disappears to indicate the feature is off. The default is off.
Audio presence tally
The VOX threshold can be used to indicate that a port has audio on it, even if
nothing is actively listening to it. Any listen label to this port will flash when
audio presence is detected. By default, this is not selected.
Audio detection threshold
Sets the audio level at which the audio gate opens for incoming audio. The
audio gates closes if audio falls below this threshold for the specified interval.
The audio detection threshold can be set to a value between 0 and -45dB.
5.22.8 Global options
The following Global options are available:
Auto listen
This function enables a port for auto-listen. When a panel activates a talk to a
destination that is configured for auto -listen, a listen path from that destination
back to the source panel is also activated automatically for the duration of the
call. In this way, the source receives audio from the destination without the
destination having to specifically activate a talk back to the source. It is
generally used on interfaces and four-wires.
The default setting depends on the port type.
Note: For Auto Listen to work correctly on external four-wire ports the MVXA16 port must have the destination TX/RX looped together.
Auto signal tone
This function enables a panel or interface port for automatic call signalling. If a
talk path is activated to a destination that has been configured for auto -call
signalling, the call signal is sent to the destination for the duration of the talk.
Auto-call signals are most commonly used with external devices that require a
control signal to activate them.
If a port set for auto-call signalling joins a partyline, or is preset to a partyline,
an auto-call is not sent to the port if the talk is to the partyline.
The default setting is disabled.
For panels which support Auto Signal - Call Signal must be enabled.
Global ISO
This function enables a panel or interface as a global ISO (Isolate) destination.
Page 105
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Any panel activating a talk to a global ISO destination creates a private, two way talk path between that panel and the destination.
All other communications are interrupted by any call from any Panel or
Interface in the Eclipse HX System. When the source terminates the call, its
audio paths return to their previous state. When all ISO paths to the
destination are deactivated, the destinatio ns’ audio paths return to their
previous states. For ISO talks to also interrupt listens at the source, select the
ISO Interrupts All Other Listens check box in Matrix Preferences. The default
is disabled.
ISOs are always local to the matrix so the source and destination must be
devices on the same matrix. An ISO destination cannot be set to a remote
matrix.
Note: If the destination of an ISO is a panel then Eavesdropping must be
enabled in Panel Options to activate the panel microphone if it is not
already activated. If the destination is not a panel but a device such as
a four-wire port Eavesdropping does not need to be enabled for the
destination device.
Hardware detection
This option enables the matrix to detect what kind of module is connected to
the port.
If you are using Optocore or BroaMan devices, ensure that this option is
disabled.
Note: This option is only available for four-wire modules.
Latch disable
This function prevents talk keys to the port latching. If a latch-disabled port is
assigned to a talk key, the key can only talk to the port for as long as the
operator physically holds down the key. A latch-disabled port can be included
in a fixed group or party line without automatically latch disabling the entire
fixed group or party line.
The default setting is latch enabled.
Mute listen with talk
This option mutes incoming audio when the Talk key is pressed.
Partyline turnaround
Any other ports that talk or listen to the port are automatically enrolled in a
conference. This means that any other port that can listen to this port can hear
every port that talks to this port.
Prevent reply signalization
Prevents key signalization for the port appearing on the reply key of any
panels. IFB caller priority
Page 106
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
IFB caller priority
Allows you to assign an IFB priority when the port is used as an IFB caller.
Priorities range from 1 (lowest) to 5 (highest). The default is 3.
Note: When a port is added to an IFB as a source to the IFB, the routing will
be applied at priority 1 regardless of the setting in the field.
IFB
Select this box to make the port an IFB destination. To configure the IFB
source, use the IFB screen (Configuration > IFBs) or the Local Advanced
screen (Configuration >Local Advanced). For more information, see 6
Virtual Interrupt Fold Backs.
Note: In Preferences > ISO and IFB, you can configure:
 IFB interrupts other talks from calling panel
 Assign multiple sources to IFB from AP panel.
For more information, see ISO and IFB.
If you select the IFB box, the following screen appears:
Figure 5-8 IFB Options
You can:
 Choose to have an automatically generated name for the IFB
(recommended)
Page 107
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Change all references to the physical port to refer to the IFB.
IFB attenuation
When a port talks to an IFB destination, forced listens are automatically
dimmed by the IFB Attenuation setting.
Panel connected tally
This allows the system to set a tally (flashing LED) on a panel indicating that
the corresponding panel is connected to the system. The default is disabled.
This is normally used on remotely connected panels where the panel to matrix
communications may suffer from an occasional loss of service.
Note: Not available for CCI-22, AES Mono, Panel Aux and Direct (no keys).
5.22.9 Gain options
The following Gain options are available:
Aux volume off limit
Sets the minimum limit for the auxiliary audio output so that the volume
cannot be turned completely off. Default value is off, meaning the auxiliary
audio can be turned off.
Note: Only available on V-Series panels.
Headset 1 sidetone permanently on
Turns the headset 1 sidetone permanently on.
Headset 2 sidetone permanently on
Turns the headset 2 sidetone permanently on.
Input gain
Allows the input gain to be set. Use the input gain adjust slider to set the
required gain from +15 dB to -45dB (or type in the value). The default is 0dB.
Main volume off limit
Sets the minimum limit for the main audio output so that the volume cannot
be turned completely off.
The default value is -36dB.
Note: Only available on V-Series panels.
Output gain
Allows the output gain level to be set. Use the output gain adjust slider control
to set the required gain from +15 dB to -45dB (or type in the value). The
default is 0dB.
Page 108
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Sidetone gain
Sets the sidetone gain in dB for the panel. The default is 0dB.
Note: Not available for CCI-22, Concert, AES Mono, Panel Aux, Trunk, Direct
and FOR-22 interfaces.
Headset 2 mic gain
Sets the gain in dB for the panel headset 2 microphone.
Note: Not available for Concert, AES Mono, Panel Aux, Direct and FOR-22.
Headset mic gain
Sets the gain in dB for the panel headset microphone.
Note: Not available for Concert, AES Mono, Panel Aux, Direct and FOR-22.
Gooseneck mic gain
Sets the gain in dB for the gooseneck (panel) microphone in dB.
Not available for Concert, AES Mono, Panel Aux, Direct and FOR-22.
Speaker dim
This is to prevent howl-round. When a talk selector is activated on a panel, the
speaker volume is attenuated by the value set within speaker dim.
To change the setting select the box with the current setting to display the
slider and use the mouse to drag the slider to the new setting. The speaker
dim can be adjusted from - 0db to speaker off. The default is -6 dB.
Applies to:
V-Series Panels.
5.22.10
Audible alert options
The various configurable audible alerts on panels are as follows:
Call signal tone
When checked, the Call Signal Tone enables an audible tone when a call signal
is received by the panel. The call signal can be used to signal an event on
another panel. The default setting is disabled.
Change or error tones
When checked, the Change or Error Tones announce whenever the
configuration for that panel has changed or when there is an error on the
panel. When unchecked Change or Error Tones is disabled. The default setting
is disabled.
Page 109
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Monitoring tones
When checked, enables the panel tone when another panel activates a listen to
the first panel. If the box is unchecked the Monitoring tone is disabled. The
default is disabled.
Applies to:
V-Series panels, I-Series panels and Concert.
5.22.11
Tally options
The following Tally options are available:
Dimmed tallies
Enables dimmed Tally lights (the default is enabled). When enabled, keys will
always show a dimmed state of the active state.
Note: V-Series panels only.
Inhibit amber tally
When enabled, prevents the tally light for Talk and Listen keys on V-Series
panels from being lit amber. The tally light is only lit red.
Note: V-Series panels only
In use tally
This allows the system to set a tally (flashing LED) on a panel key indicating
that the port is currently in conversation with another panel or interface. The
default is disabled.
Partyline Tally Brightness
Sets the brightness level for Partyline In Use Tallies on that panel. This can be
set either dim or bright. The default value is dim.
Note: V-Series panels only
5.22.12
Fast key assign options
Some V-Series options that control access to panel menus allow a pin code
option to be selected. If no pin code has been set under Preferences >
System Access Codes a warning message is displayed offering the user the
option to set a pin code. If a no pin code is set selecting this option allow s all
users to access the menu.
Enable assignment as a listen
Enables the port to be assigned locally as a listen key by another panel. If it is
set to False it prevents a listen key being assigned to the panel.
The default is True.
Page 110
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: This functionality only takes effect when making assignments on a VSeries panel or Concert Panel.
Enable assignment as talk
Allow the port to be assigned locally via Soft Mode as talk key by another
panel. If it is set to False it prevents a Talk key being assigned to the panel.
The default is True.
Note: This functionality only takes effect when making assignments on a VSeries panel or a Concert panel.
Default assign as talk and forced listen
When enabled this forces any key assigned to this panel to be a Talk and
Forced Listen key. It is interlocked with the Enable Assignment as Listen
and Enable Assignment as Talk settings so that whenever the Default
Assign as Talk and Forced Listen setting is True both Enable Assignment
as Listen and Enable Assignment as Talk are forced to the True state. If
either or both of these settings is then changed to False the Default Assign
as Talk and Forced Listen setting is automatically changed to False.
When this setting is False the Enable Assignment as Listen and Enable
Assignment as Talk settings can be set normally.
The default setting is False.
Note: This functionality only takes effect when making assignments on a VSeries panel.
Fast key assign
Enables the panel for Fast Key Assign. This facility allows the panel operator to
locally assign panel keys to local or remote ports by direct input of the port
number into the dial pad. The panel operator can also assign keys directly from
sort groups.
The Eclipse HX scalable dialcode scheme for Fast Key Assign is as follows:
<matrix number><entity type><entity instance>
For example, Matrix 1 > Hardware ports > Port 1 would be dialled into the
dial pad as 0101001.
The entity types are:
Entity
Number
Hardware port
01
Partyline
02
Fixed Group
03
IFB
04
Table 5-2 Fast Key Assign Entity types
Page 111
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Local fast key assign shortcut
If you are using Fast Key Assign on the local system, you do not have to enter
the matrix type and entity type.
To expedite Fast Key Assign on a local system:
1)
On the V-Series panel dial pad, select # to enter Fast Key Assign
mode.
2)
Enter the number of the port you want (for example, 001).
3)
To validate the entry, select
*
on the dial pad.
Note: For more information about Fast Key Assign, see the V-Series Panel
Guide.
Note: Fast Key Assign can only be used on V-Series panels with dial pads
(numeric keypads).
Protect port from assignment
Prevents this port from being locally assigned by another panel in soft mode.
Sort groups
Opens a drop down menu so that sort group memberships can be edited and
applied.
Note: Not on Concert, AES Mono and Panel Aux.
Applies to:
All panels unless otherwise noted.
5.22.13
Logic input options
The Logic Inputs are used in relation to the Miscellaneous GPI connections on
panels that are fitted with local option cards and V-Series panels.
The logic inputs are also associated with PTT function on headset 1 and
headset 2 on V-Series panels where the headset is either an XLR-7 type
headset connected to the front panel or a headset connected to the auxiliary
audio connector. In the case of V-Series panels headset 1 PTT 1 or headset 2
PTT 1 active has the same effect as Logic 1 active. Headset 1 PTT 2 or headset
2 PTT 2 active has the same effect as Logic 2 active.
The PTT actions for XLR-4 and XLR-5 headsets connected to a V-Series panel
are determined by the Headset PTT Function setting.
The following actions are available for both Logic Input 1 and Logic Input 2:
 No Function
 Mic On/Off
 Mute Mic Output to Matrix
Page 112
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Mic Off (Momentary)
 Answerback Talk Clear
 Studio Announce
 Speaker Off
 PTT Activate all Talk Keys
 Activate Talk Switch 1
 Activate Talk Switch 2
 Listen Mode/Again
 PTT Activate Two Way Radio

Talk Keys
 Select Route (and controls)
The default setting is No Function.
Applies to:
V-Series and I-Series Panels.
Logic Inputs 3 and 4 are only available on V-Series panels. Logic inputs
3 is pre-assigned to Reply Key. Logic input 4 is not currently used.
5.22.14
Attached control options
The Port Properties options for an Attached Control are as follows:
Secondary action
The Secondary action allows a Control to be attached to a Port. Whenever a
talk route key to the Port is pressed, the Control attachments such as Relays,
Routes or Speed Dials, are activated.
Vox action
The VOX action allows a Control to be attached to a port. Whenever the audio
level at the Port reaches the Audio Detection Threshold defined in Voice
Operated Switch section of Advanced Settings the Control attachments such as
Relays, Routes or Speed Dials, are activated.
Note: Not available on Concert panels.
Applies to:
On all port devices except Trunk.
Page 113
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.22.15
DTMF options
The DTMF options are used to configure either the TEL-14 interface module or
an external telephone hybrid for incoming calls. They are also used to control
access to the system by the external caller.
The setups for outgoing calls are configured on the MVX-A16 card which
controls the outgoing DTMF on TEL-14 interface modules.
Access prompt
Controls whether the port sends DTMF access prompt tones and may be
enabled or disabled. This allows the incoming caller to receive access prompts.
The default is enabled.
Assign DTMF codes
Assigns a DTMF selector code to a specific audio path. This allows the incoming
caller to make various preselected links within the matrix by entering a specific
code.
Enable DTMF passcodes
This enables the use of passcodes that are set up using the Preferences >
System Access Codes tab. Up to eight DTMF passcodes can be set up for a
system and each passcode can be enabled for a port using a drop-down menu.
When enabled incoming callers must enter a 4 digit passcode before being
allowed access.
First code only
If this is enabled DTMF tone detection is disabled after the first valid DTMF
code has been received. Default is disabled.
Note: Only on TEL-14.
Accumulate DTMF codes
This field controls whether only one DTMF selector code can be used (disabled)
or whether multiple DTMF selector codes can be used. The default setting is
disabled.
When enabled this allows the incoming caller to make multiple routes by
dialling multiple codes.
One digit codes
If this is set enabled DTMF selector codes are limited to a single digit or the
hash (#) and asterisk (*) characters. The default setting is disabled.
Applies to:
Direct, CCI-22, FOR-22 and TEL-14 interfaces.
Page 114
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.23
General Purpose Inputs (GPIs)
The Eclipse HX matrix has eight General Purpose Inputs (GPI) on the processor
card and these Inputs are automatically added to EHX in the Matrix Hardware
screen as module 0. Further GPIs can be added to the system using GPI-6
modules by incrementing the number of GPI modules shown below the list.
Figure 5-9 GPI-6 modules are added/removed from the Matrix Hardware
5.23.1 Adding and removing GPI-6 modules
To add / remove GPI-6 modules:
1)
Open Hardware > GPIs.
2)
The counter next to Number of External GPI-6 modules displays the
current number of GPI-6 modules. To display a drop-down list of
numbers, click the counter.
3)
If you select a higher number than the current number, new GPI-6
modules are added. Six new GPIs are added per module.
If you select a lower number than the current number, GPI-6 modules and
their associated GPIs are removed.
5.23.2 Configuring GPIs
To configure either a matrix or GPI-6 input:
1)
Page 115
Identify the input number to be used from the GPIs screen.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2)
Click the row to highlight it.
3)
From the Available Controls list, select the required Talk label.
4)
To transfer the label to the Attached Controls list, do either of the
following:
5)
Click the => arrow.
6)
Double click the label.
7)
To detach the Talk label from the GPI, select the required label in
the Attached Controls list.
8)
To detach the label, do either of the following:

Click the <= arrow.

Double click the label.
When using an IMF-3 frame the GPI-6 cable should be connected first to the
matrix GPI data connector before connecting any GPI-6 cards.
5.24
General Purpose Outputs (GPOs)
The Eclipse HX Matrix has 8 Matrix General Purpose Outputs (GPOs), which are
automatically added to EHX in Cards and Ports as module 0.
RLY-6 modules are added/removed from the GPOs screen.
Note: Panel Relays are also managed from this screen, but are added and
removed automatically when panels are managed from the cards and
ports screen. Some of the panel relays of the IP V-Series are used by
the V-Series application locally when the panel hosts secondary
channels and the hosted port application is set to 2 way radio, HelixNet
or Partyline. These GPIOs can additionally be used form this screen in
which case the logic is OR'd with that of the V-Series application.
Page 116
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-10 GPOs Screen
5.24.1 Adding RLY-6 modules
To add / remove RLY-6 modules:
1)
Open Hardware > GPOs.
2)
The counter next to Number of External RLY-6 modules displays the
current number of RLY-6 modules. To display a drop-down list of
numbers, click the counter.
3)
If you select a higher number than the current number, new RLY-6
modules are added. Six new GPOs are added per module.
4)
If you select a lower number than the current number, RLY-6
modules and their associated GPOs are removed.
5.24.2 Configuring GPOs
In Hardware > GPOs, use the checkboxes to set whether the relay output is
activated with talk and or listen.
THE CONTROL MANAGER IS USED TO CREATE AND CONFIGURE CONTROLS
THAT CAN BE ATTACHED TO THE RELAYS.
Page 117
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.25
Configuring the E-FIB fiber card
The E-FIB fiber card is designed to provide trunking between Eclipse HXOmega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta matrices. The fiber cards can
also be configured to provide redundancy in communications link between
Eclipse HX matrices. Each card provides two fiber rings.
5.25.1 Adding an E-FIB card
To add an E-FIB card:
1)
2)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select either E-FIB (Fiber) or E-FIB (Redundant).
Note: Only one E-FIB (Fiber) and one E-FIB (Redundant) card can be added.
Clear-Com recommends that E-FIB cards are fitted to slots 6 and/or 7
of Eclipse HX-Median matrices, slots 14 and/or 15 of Eclipse HX-Omega
matrices and slot 4 of Eclipse HX-Delta matrices.
Figure 5-11 E-FIB Fiber Card Selection
5.25.2 Removing an E-FIB card
To remove an E-FIB card:
1)
Page 118
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to the slot number of
the E-FIB card you want to delete. Do either of the following:
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2)

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select Empty.
A warning dialog is displayed. To confirm the deletion, click Yes.
5.25.3 Configuring an E-FIB card
The E-FIB card provides a single fiber port that can be configured to have Talk
and Listen labels and a description.
Note: If E-FIB Fiber (Redundant) is selected, no ports are displayed because
the card parameters cannot be configured.
Figure 5-12 Fiber Card Configuration
The Port Properties menu allows the following parameters to be set.
Basic options
Fiber port count
The Fiber port count specifies the number of unidirectional fiber channels that
are configured for the fiber card. The port count may be set to a maximum of
192 ports in multiples of 16. As a general guide, the port count (fiber
channels) can be set to the maximum of 224 ports in networks with five or
fewer matrices as this does not use all the timeslots (but see note below).
For networks with more than five matrices the port allocations must take
account of the maximum number of simultaneous talks and listens across the
network with a maximum of 1024 timeslots being available. The matrix event
log can be used to help tailor the port counts for the matrices. Alternatively the
user may contact Clear-Com support for assistance in configuring the network.
Note: The port count should not be set to an excessive number (significantly
more that the number of panels available for connection via the fiber
card) as this may reduce system performance.
Port number
Page 119
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The port number is set to the next available port on the system. For example,
if two MXV-A16 cards are installed before the fiber card the port number is set
to 33 (16+16+1).
The port number cannot be changed in Port Properties.
Remote matrix
Remote Matrix Rx
The system number of the frame that the remote matrix receives data from in
the primary fiber loop.
Remote Matrix Tx
The system number of the frame that the remote matrix transmits data to in
the primary fiber loop.
5.26
Configuring the E-Que card
The E-QUE card is designed to allow Eclipse HX matrices to connect to
CellCom/FreeSpeak and FreeSpeak II wireless antennas/beltpacks or
connected together using E1 or T1 protocol.
Note: The E-QUE card is a high power device. For information about how
many high power devices you can install, see 5.7.1 System limits.
5.26.1 Adding an E-Que card
To add an E-QUE card:
1)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:
2)
Double click the slot.
3)
Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
4)
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select one of the following E-QUE card options:
Page 120

E-QUE (E1 Direct)

E-QUE (T1 Direct

E-QUE (E1 Trunk)

E-QUE (T1 Trunk)

E-QUE (E1 Direct/Trunk)

E-QUE (T1 Direct/Trunk)

E-QUE (Antenna)

E-QUE (Splitter)

E-QUE FS II-TA Antenna
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

E-QUE FS II-TA Splitter
Note: The E-QUE entry selected should be correct for the intended use as the
cards are configured differently by EHX. You cannot have both E-QUE
Antenna/Splitter and E-QUE FS II cards configured on the same matrix.
Figure 5-13 E-Que Card Selection
5.27
E1 direct
The E1 Direct is an E-QUE card that has been configured for 60 direct ports
using E1 protocol. Each E1 port can be used as an E1 communication line to
another E1 device. The following section provides guidance on configuring an
E1 Direct in Cards and Ports.
5.27.1 Port function
This is always set to E1 Direct.
5.27.2 Label
Label for the port used to assign the po rt to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.27.3 Description
Optional port description, up to 255 characters long.
Page 121
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.27.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in E1 Direct mode the Clock Recovery mode and Codec
should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right of the
hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Figure 5-14 E1 Direct Card Properties Clock Recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the E1 line. The clock source must be determined before
configuration. Select the correct configuration by clicking on the appropriate
radio button.
5.27.5 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as E1 Direct use two cables plugged into ports 1 (top)
and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide E1 ports. The top cable (Top
Half) provides the first 30 ports (1-30) and the bottom cable (Bottom Half)
provides the second 30 ports (31 - 60). The top and bottom cables can be
configured to use different Codecs. The Codecs available are:
 G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.
 G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec.
This is often used in European systems.
 G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec. This
is often used in North America and Japan.
Click on the appropriate radio button to select the codec for top and bottom
cables.
5.27.6 EM Signalling
You can enable EM Signalling by selecting the Enabled check box. EM
signalling is a standard for DC line signalling.
Page 122
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.28
T1 direct
The T1 Direct is an E-QUE card that has been configured for 48 direct ports
using T1 protocol. Each T1 port can be used as an E1 communication line to
another T1 device. The following section provides guidance on configuring a T1
Direct in Cards and Ports.
5.28.1 Port function
This is always set to T1 Direct.
5.28.2 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.28.3 Description
Optional port description, up to 255 characters long.
5.28.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in T1 Direct mode the Clock Recovery mode and Codec
should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right of the
hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Figure 5-15 E1 Direct Card Properties Clock Recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the T1 line. The clock source must be determined before
configuration. Select the correct configuration by clicking on the appropriate
radio button.
5.28.5 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as T1 Direct use two cables plugged into ports 1 (top)
and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide T1 ports. The top cable (Top
Half) provides the first 30 ports (1-30) and the bottom cable (Bottom Half)
provides the second 30 ports (31 - 60). The top and bottom cables can be
configured to use different Codecs. The Codecs available are:
Page 123
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.
 G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec.
This is often used in European systems.
 G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec. This
is often used in North America and Japan.
Click on the appropriate radio button to select the codec for top and bottom
cables.
5.29
E1 trunk
An E-QUE card set to E1 Trunk is used to connect Eclipse HX matrices using E1
trunking protocol. The System Ports display shows two ports numbered 1 and
31.
Figure 5-16 E1 Trunk Ports
Port 1 represents 30 virtual ports 1 - 30 which are allocated automatically for
communications. Port 31 represents a further 30 virtual ports 31 - 60 that are
automatically allocated.
5.29.1 Port function
This is always set to E1 Trunk.
5.29.2 Label
Label for the E1 direct port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.29.3 Description
Option port description up to 255 characters long.
5.29.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in E1 Trunk mode the Clock Recovery mode and Codec
should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right of the
hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Page 124
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-17 E1 Trunk Card Properties
5.29.5 Clock recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the E1 line. Normally the card should be set to ‘Line Recovery’ for
connection to a third party device or E1 network. For other devices the clock
source must be determined before configuration. Select the correct
configuration by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
If connecting two Eclipse HX matrices back to back using E1:
 An E1 or T1 crossover cable is required.
 One E-QUE card should be set to Local Generated clock and the other
to Line Recovery clock.
5.29.6 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as E1 Trunk use two cables plugged into ports 1 (top)
and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide E1 trunk ports. The top cable
(Top Half) provides the first 30 ports (1-30) and the bottom cable (Bottom
Half) provides the second 30 ports (31 - 60). The top and bottom cables can
be configured to use different Codecs.
The available Codecs comprise:

G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.

G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722
codec. This is often used in European systems.

G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722
codec. This is often used in North America and Japan.
Click the appropriate radio button to select the Codec for top and bottom
cables.
5.30
T1 trunk
An E-QUE card set to T1 Trunk is used to connect Eclipse HX matrices using T1
trunking protocol. The System Ports display shows two ports numbered 1 and
25.
Figure 5-18 T1 Trunk Ports
Port 1 represents 24 virtual ports 1 - 24 which are allocated automatically for
communications. Port 25 represents a further 24 virtual ports 25 - 48 that are
automatically allocated.
Page 125
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.30.1 Port function
This is always set to ‘T1 Trunk’.
5.30.2 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.30.3 Description
Option port description up to 255 characters long.
5.30.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in T1 Direct mode the Clock Recovery mode and Codec
should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right of the
hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Figure 5-19 T1 Trunk Card Properties
5.30.5 Clock recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the T1 line. Normally the card should be set to ‘Line Recovery’ for
connection to a third party device or a T1 network. For other devices the clock
source must be determined before configuration. Select the correct
configuration by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
If connecting two Eclipse HX matrices back to back using T1:
 An E1 or T1 crossover cable is required.
 One E-QUE card should be set to Local Generated clock and the other
to Line Recovery clock.
5.30.6 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as T1 Trunk use two cables plugged into ports 1 (top)
and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide T1 trunk ports.
The top cable (Top Half) provides the first 24 ports (1-24) and the bottom
cable (Bottom Half) provides the second 24 ports (25 - 48). The top and
bottom cables can be configured to use different Codecs. The Codecs that are
available comprise:
Page 126
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.
 G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec.
This is often used in European systems.
 G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec. This
is often used in North America and Japan.
Click the appropriate radio button to select the Codecs for top and bottom
cables.
5.31
E1 direct/trunk
The E1 Direct/Trunk is an E-QUE card that has been configured for 60 ports
using E1 protocol. The first 30 are available to be set as E1 Directs, the second
30 are used as a single E1 trunk connection (and shown only as Port 31 - as on
an E1 trunking card).
5.31.1 Port function
This is always set to Direct except for the last port which is set to Trunk.
5.31.2 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.31.3 Description
Option port description up to 255 characters long.
5.31.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in E1 Direct/Trunk mode, the Clock Recovery mode and
Codec should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right
of the hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Figure 5-20 T1 Trunk Card Properties
5.31.5 Clock recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the E1 line. Normally the card should be set to Line Recovery for
connection to a third party device or an E1 network. For other devices the
Page 127
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
clock source must be determined before configuration. Select the correct
configuration by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
If connecting two Eclipse HX matrices back to back using E1:
 An E1 or T1 crossover cable is required.
 One E-QUE card should be set to Local Generated clock and the other
to Line Recovery clock.
5.31.6 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as E1 Direct/Trunk use two cables plugged into ports 1
(top) and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide E1 trunk ports.
The top cable (Top Half) provides the first 16 ports (17-32) and the bottom
cable (Bottom Half) provides the second 15 ports (33 - 48). The top and
bottom cables can be configured to use different Codecs. The Codecs that are
available comprise:
 G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.
 G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec.
This is often used in European systems.
 G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec. This
is often used in North America and Japan.
Click the appropriate radio button to select the Codecs for top and bottom
cables.
5.32
T1 direct/trunk
The T1 Direct/Trunk is an E-QUE card that has been configured for 48 ports
using T1 protocol. The first 24 are available to be set as T1 Directs, the second
30 are used as a single T1 trunk connection (and shown only as Port 24 - as on
a T1 trunking card).
5.32.1 Port function
This is always set to Direct except for the last port which is set to Trunk.
5.32.2 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.32.3 Description
Option port description up to 255 characters long.
Page 128
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.32.4 Card properties
For an E-QUE card in E1 Direct/Trunk mode, the Clock Recovery mode and
Codec should be set by clicking on the Card Properties link in the lower right
of the hardware display. This displays the Clock Recovery and Codec setup.
Figure 5-21 T1 Trunk Card Properties
5.32.5 Clock recovery
The data clock may be generated by the E-QUE card (Local Generated) or
taken from the T1 line. Normally the card should be set to Line Recovery for
connection to a third party device or a T1 network. For other devices the clock
source must be determined before configuration. Select the correct
configuration by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
If connecting two Eclipse HX matrices back to back using T1:
 An E1 or T1 crossover cable is required.
 One E-QUE card should be set to Local Generated clock and the other
to Line Recovery clock.
5.32.6 Codec
E-QUE cards configured as T1 Direct/Trunk use two cables plugged into ports 1
(top) and 5 (bottom) for the E-QUE card to provide T1 trunk ports.
The top cable (Top Half) provides the first 16 ports (17-32) and the bottom
cable (Bottom Half) provides the second 15 ports (33 - 48). The top and
bottom cables can be configured to use different Codecs. The Codecs that are
available comprise:
 G722 - standard G722 conversion and compression.
 G722 A-Law - uses an A-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec.
This is often used in European systems.
 G722 µ-Law - uses a µ-law algorithm to optimize the G722 codec. This
is often used in North America and Japan.
Click the appropriate radio button to select the Codecs for top and bottom
cables.
Page 129
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.33
E-Que antenna/E-Que FS II-TA antenna
Selecting this card type automatically configures an E-Que card with eight
antenna ports (1 to 8 on the rear card). Each antenna provides five user ports
and one control port. The hardware table shows the first user port number for
each antenna rather than the E-Que port number. In the figure below the first
antenna is shown as port 1 (the first beltpack port) and the second antenna is
shown as port 7 (previous first port number plus six), since beltpack ports 1-5
are on the first antenna. This is repeated for successive antennas.
Figure 5-22 Antenna Ports
5.33.1 Port function
This is always set to Antenna.
5.33.2 Label
Used to differentiate between different Antennas. The label has 10 characters,
or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.33.3 Description
An optional description for the port of up to 255 characters long.
5.34
E-Que splitter/E-Que FS II-TA splitter
This option automatically adds an E-Que card with two splitter ports (1 and 5
on the rear card) configured. Each splitter can support up to five antennas and
each antenna provides five beltpack ports. The hardware table shows ten
antennas with the first beltpack port number for each antenna rather than the
E-Que port number.
Therefore the first antenna is shown as port 1 (the first beltpack port) and the
second antenna is shown as port 7 (previous first port number plus six), since
Page 130
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
beltpack ports 1-6 are on the first antenna. This is repeated for successive
antennas.
Figure 5-23 Splitter Ports
5.34.1 Port function
This is always set to Antenna.
5.34.2 Label
Used to differentiate between different Antennas. The label has 10 characters,
or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.34.3 Description
An optional description for the port of up to 255 characters long.
5.35
Removing an E-Que card
To remove an E-QUE card:
1)
5.36
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to the slot number of
the E-QUE card you want to delete. Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
2)
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select Empty.
3)
A warning dialog is displayed. To confirm the deletion, click Yes
Configuring the antenna on an E-Que card
1)
Page 131
To configure an Antenna on an E-Que card select the card in the
hardware->Cards and Ports list to display the configuration screen.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Each of the eight ports on the card is given a port number reflecting the total
number of beltpack connections that can be supported using the E-QUE card.
5.36.1 Antenna connections
Figure 5-24 E-Que Antenna Configuration
1)
Select the card port to be configured and open Basic Options
under Port Properties > Beltpack Antenna to set up the port
parameters.
5.36.2 Cable length
1)
To set the cable length between the card and the antenna select
the Cable Length option and open the drop-down list. Adjust the
cable length setting from 0 - 129 to 2860 - 2989.
The length set is displayed next to the option after carrying out a site
survey.
5.36.3 Description
Enter an optional description for the antenna such as position or function.
5.36.4 Comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the port or
antenna.
5.36.5 Label
Listen labels for antennas are only used for diagnostics purposes, such as
antenna/role correlation (a combined Talk/Listen label is shown unless the
option for 10 character labels is turned off).
5.37
E-Que card splitter connections
Page 132
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-25 E-QUE Splitter Configuration
1)
Select the card port to be configured and go to Port Properties >
Beltpack Antenna > Basic Options to set up the port
parameters.
5.37.1 Cable length
1)
To set the cable length between the card and the antenna select
the Cable Length option and open the drop-down list. User the
mouse to adjust the cable length setting from 0 - 129 to 2860 2989.
The length set is displayed next to the option after carrying out a site
survey.
5.37.2 Description
Enter an optional description for the antenna such as position or function.
5.37.3 Engineer comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the port or
antenna.
5.37.4 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
1)
To configure an E-Que card for Splitters select the card on the
hardware list to display the configuration screen.
In this case ten antennas are displayed corresponding to the two splitters that
can be connected to an E-Que card with each splitter supporting up to five
antennas.
5.38
Configuring the antenna for an E-Que FS II card
1)
Page 133
To configure an E-Que FS II card for Antenna select the card on the
hardware list to display the configuration screen.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Each of the eight ports on the card is given a port number reflecting the total
number of beltpacks that can be supported using the E-Que FS II card.
5.38.1 Antenna connections
Figure 5-26 E-Que FS II Antenna Configuration
1)
Select the card port to be configured and open Basic Options
under Port Properties > Beltpack Antenna to set up the port
parameters.
5.38.2 Cable Length Compensation
This sets the amount of compensation applied to the antenna to account for
different cable lengths in the system.
1)
To set the cable length between the card and the antenna select
the Cable Length option and open the drop-down list. Adjust the
cable length setting from 0 - 69 to 1540 - 1609.
The length set is displayed next to the option after carrying out a site
survey.
5.38.3 Description
Enter an optional description for the antenna such as position or function.
5.38.4 Comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the port or
antenna.
5.38.5 Listen label
Listen labels for antennas are only used for diagnostics purposes, such as
antenna/role correlation (a combined Talk/Listen label is shown unless the
option for 10 character labels is turned off).
Page 134
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.38.6 Talk label
Talk labels for antennas are only used for diagnostics purposes such as
antenna/role correlation (a combined Talk/Listen label is shown unless the
option for 10 character labels is turned off).
5.38.7 Antenna Group
Select an antenna group for DECT synchronization.
5.39
Configuring an E-Que FS II card for splitter
Figure 5-27 E-QUE Splitter Configuration
1)
Select the card port to be configured and go to Port Properties >
Beltpack Antenna > Basic Options to set up the port
parameters.
5.39.1 Cable length compensation
1)
To set the cable length between the card and the antenna select
the Cable Length option and open the drop-down list. Use the
mouse to adjust the cable length setting from 0 - 69 to 1514 1609.
The length set is displayed next to the option after carrying out a site
survey.
5.39.2 Description
Enter an optional description for the antenna such as position or function.
5.39.3 Comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the po rt or
antenna.
5.39.4 Label
Label for the port used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
Page 135
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
To configure an E-Que card for Splitters select the card on the
hardware list to display the configuration screen.
In this case ten antennas are displayed corresponding to the two splitters that
can be connected to an E-Que card with each splitter supporting up to five
antennas.
5.40
Antenna role map for FreeSpeak/CellCom
Diagnostics > Antenna Role Map displays the status of the antennas and
roles currently configured.
Figure 5-28 Antenna and Role Display
The mapping of roles onto antennas is indicated by the colored squares. When
a role is registered to an antenna, a black dot is placed in the antenna row at
the role position.
5.41
Antenna role map for FreeSpeak II™
Diagnostics > Antenna Role Map displays the status of the antennas and
roles currently configured, and the antenna groups.
Page 136
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-29 Antenna and Role Display
5.42
E-Que trunk basic settings
5.42.1 Port count
The port count specifies the number of virtual ports that are configured for the
card. The port count may be set to any number between 0 and the maximum
number of virtual ports on the card (30 for E1, 24 for T1). As a general guide
the port count should be set to the maximum number of simultaneous
conversations. The recommended setting is 30 for E1 and 24 for T1.
Note: The port count should not be set to an excessive number (significantly
more that the number of panels available for connection using the EQUE card) as this may reduce system performance.
5.42.2 Remote port count
The number of ports available for remote systems to use to communicate with
the matrix.
5.42.3 Remote matrix
The remote matrix that the E1 or T1 trunk is connected to.
5.43
Configuring the IVC-32 card
The IVC-32 card enables you to connect Eclipse HX matrices to Concert and IP
enabled V-Series panels over a normal LAN or WAN, using IP.
Note: You can also centrally manage IVC-32 cards using the IP Devices
option. Go to Hardware > IP Devices. See 7 IP devices.
5.44
Adding an IVC-32 card
To add an IVC-32 card:
1)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types. Select the
IVC-32 card.
Note: The IVC-32 card is a high power device. For information about how
many high power devices you can install, see 5.7.1 System limits.
Note: An IVC-32 card can be in redundant mode. If you select IVC-32
(Redundant), the card will operate as a redundant card, and you will
not be able to configure any ports on this card. See 5.46 Configuring
an IVC-32 redundant card.
Page 137
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-30 IVC-32 Card Selection
This action adds an IVC-32 card to be used for communication over IP. Cards
and Ports show thirty two ports that can be configured for various IP
compatible panels.
Figure 5-31 IP Ports
5.44.1 Port number
The port number on the IVC-32 card.
5.44.2 Port function
Selects the device attached to the port from a drop-down menu. The following
options exist:
 IP enabled V-Series panels, Concert panels and Agent IC Mobile Client
 Direct
 Hosted Direct
Page 138
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Trunk
If you add an IP-enabled V-Series panel, the following screen appears:
Figure 5-32 Multi-Channel V-Series
Select the number of additional channels you require. If you select one or two
additional channels, these channels automatically appear as Hosted Direct in
the Port Function column of the Cards and Ports screen, for example:
Figure 5-33 Two Hosted Direct sub-channels
5.44.3 Label
Label used to assign the port to a path. The label has 10 characters, or can be
split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
5.44.4 Description
An optional description for the port of up to 255 characters long.
5.44.5 General
Default ports used by the Eclipse HX system are 6001 for IP Panel
communications, 42001 for EHX communications and 1300 for the matrix
event log. Ports 42001 and 1300 are used by the UDP protocol.
Ports 42001 and 1300 are not user adjustable.
Port 6001 is user adjustable.
Eclipse HX system administrators are advised to check with network
administrators or IT that these default ports may be used without causing a
conflict with any other application on the network.
Each IVC-32 card requires a static IP address. It is recommended that these
addresses are issued by IT or the Network Administrator to avoid conflicts with
any other system on the network and are not part of the DHCP dynamically
assigned range.
Page 139
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.44.6 IP port
Sets the port number to be used by the IVC-32 card when communicating over
IP. This parameter should not normally be changed from the default value
unless all the IP panels or Concert server are also updated to use the new port
number. If this is not done the IP panels or Concert server cannot
communicate with the IVC-32 card.
Eclipse HX system administrators are advised to check with netwo rk
administrators or IT that the default port may be used without causing a
conflict with any other application on the network.
If the IP port number is changed ports 42001 and 1300 should not be used as
these ports are already used by EHX. The Eclipse HX system administrator
should check with the network administrator or IT to obtain a port number to
use.
5.44.7 IP address assignment
Manually enter the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the IVC 32 card.
1)
To set the IP parameters right click on the IVC-32 card and select
Card Properties. This displays the settable parameters.
Note: You can also double click on the IVC-32 card.
Figure 5-34 IVC-32 IP Parameters
5.44.8 IP address
Static IP address of the IVC-32 card, assigned by IT or the Network
Administrator. This is used by IP panels and Concert clients to communicate
with the matrix via the IVC-32 card.
Note: It is important to ensure that the IVC-32 card IP address does not
clash with any other IP address on the network (another device is using
the same IP address). If there is an IP address clash the IVC-32 card
may repeatedly lose the connection with IP panels or Concert clients. If
the IVC-32 card IP address clashes it may also cause the IVC-32 card
to crash.
Page 140
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
It is recommended that the IVC-32 is given a static IP address. The V-Series
panels and Concert clients IP addresses should be assigned by a DHCP server.
5.44.9 Subnet mask
Subnet mask used by the IVC-32 card to define the address range the card can
access. Typically this is assigned by IT or the Network Administrator. The
default is 255.255.0.0.
5.44.10
Default gateway
The address of the gateway (router) to be used to communicate with external
devices such as IP panels and Concert clients over a wider IP network. This
address is optional but if used must fall within the address range defined by
the subnet mask.
5.44.11
External IP address
If the Matrix is operating behind a firewall then port address forwarding can be
used to expose a LAN-connected device to the outside world. Typically this is
assigned by IT or the Network Administrator.
This IP address must be manually entered on IP panels to communicate
directly with the IVC-32 card. This address must be a unique address on the
internet. It is not affected by the subnet mask.
5.44.12
External IP address IP port
IP port used when communicating directly with the IVC-32 card using the
External IP address. The default port number is 6001 and this should not be
changed unless the default port number on all external devices is also changed
to the new port number.
5.44.13
Panel codecs
The Show ports links displays which ports on the IVC-32 cards are configured
to use the G722 codec.
The codec options are configured in IP Port Options for each port.
5.45
Configuring an IVC-32 redundant card
You can add an IVC-32 Redundant Card that provides fail-over redundancy for
one or more IVC-32 Cards in the matrix.
Note: You can only configure IVC-32 redundant cards up to the number of
IVC-32 Cards in the matrix.
To add an IVC-32 Redundant card:
1)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Page 141
Double click the slot.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types. Select the
IVC-32 (Redundant) card.
Figure 5-35 IVC-32 Card Selection
The card properties for the IVC-32 (Redundant) card allow you to specify which
IVC-32 to provide redundancy for:
Figure 5-36 IVC-32 (Redundant) Card Properties
The following combinations of IVC-32 Cards and IVC-32 Redundant Cards are
possible:
 One IVC-32 Card and one IVC-32 Redundant Card - the redundant card
provides backup for the only card in the system
 Two IVC-32 Cards and one IVC-32 Redundant Card - you can either set
the redundant card to provide redundancy backup for both IVC-32
Page 142
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Cards in event of failure, or specify that it is only backing up a
particular card.
 Two IVC-32 Cards and two IVCF-32 Redundant Cards - you must
specify which redundant card is providing redundancy for which IVC-32
card. It is not possible to have two redundant cards providing backup
for the same IVC-32 Card.
 Three IVC-32 Cards and one redundant card - you can either set the
redundant card to provide redundancy backup for both IVC-32 Cards in
event of failure, or specify that it is only backing up a particular card.
An IVC-32 Card will fail-over to the IVC-32 Redundant Card under the following
conditions:
 All configured VoIP ports are unconnected for longer than 90 seconds.
 The IVC-32 Card is detected as absent from the VME backplane.
When a failover is detected, the following steps occur:
1)
The Config card checks to see if there is a redundant card
configured to take over from the failed card. If not then the card is
placed into an error state and nothing else happens.
2)
If a redundant card is configured then the failed card is placed into
an error state.
3)
All port numbers and timeslots are turned over to the redundant
card.
4)
The failed card has its IP details cleared. The IP address is changed
to 169.254.0.<slotNum> and resets.
5)
The redundant card takes on the failed card’s pervious IP address
and resets.
6)
On start-up the redundant card is placed into the Initialising state
and finally into the Running States.
7)
The failed card stays in the Error state.
8)
The redundant card now establishes all VoIP calls that were
previously configured on the failed card.
Once the switch over process has started the redundant card starts accepting
and making VoIP connections within 40 seconds.
5.45.1 Switch-back
A switch back from a redundant card back to a failed card only occurs under
the following condition:
Page 143
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
5.46
The redundant card has failed. If the original card is still in error,
then it will switch back and forward until corrective action is taken.
Configuring the LMC-64 card
The LMC-64 card allows Eclipse HX matrices to provide audio level metering
data to Production Maestro clients over an IP network.
Note: The E-QUE card is a high power device. For information about how
many high power devices you can install, see 5.7.1 System limits.
5.46.1 Adding an LMC-64 card
To add an LMC-64 card:
1)
2)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select the LM64 card.
Figure 5-37 LMC-64 Card Selection
This action adds an LMC-64 card to be used for communication over IP
between the LMC-64 card and a PM Pro PC client. Cards and Ports show a
single port entry that can be configured for 16-64 meters.
Page 144
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-38 IP Ports
Port number
The port number on the LMC-64 card. This does not have a function as the
card does not provide external ports.
Port function
This is always fixed as Meter.
Label
Label for the LMC port used to assign it to the administrator. The label has 10
characters, or can be split into two parts, each of maximum five characters.
Description
An optional description for the port of up to 255 characters long.
The LMC-64 card must be configured before it can be used.
1)
To set the IP parameters right click on the LMC-64 card, and select
Card Properties. This displays the settable parameters.
Note: You can also double click on the LMC-64 card.
Figure 5-39 LMC-64 IP Parameters
General
Default ports used by the Eclipse HX system are 6001 for IP Panel
communications, 42001 for EHX communications and 1300 for the matrix
event log. Ports 42001 and 1300 are used by the UDP/ protocol.
Ports 42001 and 1300 are not user adjustable.
Port 6001 is user adjustable.
Page 145
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Eclipse HX system administrators are advised to check with network
administrators or IT that these default ports may be used without causing a
conflict with any other application on the network.
Each LMC-64 card requires a static IP address. It is recommended that these
addresses are issued by IT or the Network Administrator to avoid conflicts with
any other system on the network and are not part of the DHCP dynamically
assigned range.
IP port
Sets the port number to be used by the LMC-64 card when communicating
over IP. This parameter should not normally be changed from the default
value. Eclipse HX system administrators are advised to check with network
administrators or IT that the default port may be used without causing a
conflict with any other application on the network.
If the IP port number is changed ports 42001 and 1300 should not be used as
these ports are already used by EHX. The Eclipse HX system administrator
should check with the network administrator or IT to obtain a port number to
use.
IP address assignment
Manually enter the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the LMC64 card.
IP address
Static IP address of the LMC-64 card, assigned by IT or the Network
Administrator. This is used by Production Maestro clients to communicate with
the LMC-64 card.
Important
It is important to ensure that the LMC-64 card IP address does not clash with
any other IP address on the network (another device is using the same IP
address). If there is an IP address clash the Production Maestro clients may
lose audio meter data. If the LMC-64 card IP address clashes it may also cause
the LMC-64 card to crash.
Subnet mask
Subnet mask used by the LMC-64 card to define the address range the card
can access. Typically this is assigned by IT or the Network Administrator. The
default is 255.255.0.0.
Default gateway
The address of the gateway (router) to be used to communicate with
Production Maestro clients over a wider IP network. This address is optional but
if used must fall within the address range defined by the subnet mask.
Page 146
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
External IP address
If the matrix is operating behind a firewall then port address forwarding can be
used to expose a LAN-connected device to the outside world. Typically this is
assigned by IT or the Network Administrator.
This IP address must be used by external Production Maestro clients to
communicate with the LMC-64 card. This address must be a unique address on
the internet. It is not affected by the subnet mask.
External IP address IP port
IP port used when communicating directly with the LMC-64 card using the
External IP address. The default port number is 6001 and this should not be
changed unless the default port number on all external devices is also changed
to the new port number.
5.47
Configuring the E-MADI64 card
The E-MADI64 is a MADI (Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) card, providing
up to 64 duplex channels of AES3 digital audio over a coaxial cable or fiber pair
between compatible devices.
Note: If you use an RME fiber transceiver, you must have at least 6dB of
attenuators.
5.47.1 Adding an e-MADI64 CARD (automatic discovery)
The E-MADI64 card is automatically discovered when:
 The Discover Hardware option is selected, after the Matrix is placed
on the System Layout from the discovery pane.
 The Create New Configuration > Discover Hardware right click
option is selected in the relevant Matrix on the System Layout screen.
5.47.2 Adding an E-MADI64 card (manual addition)
To add an E-MADI64 card:
1)
2)
In Hardware > Cards and Ports, navigate to an available slot
number (marked Empty). Do either of the following:

Double click the slot.

Right click the slot and select Set Card Type.
A drop-down menu is displayed, listing the available card types.
Select the E-MADI64 card.
The configurable ports (16, 32, 56, or 64) for the E-MADI64 card are
displayed.
Page 147
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Card and port settings
E-MADI64 port number
The port number on the E-MADI64 card. Standard EHX settings (including VOX
and In-use tally) are applicable to all E-MADI64 channels.
E-MADI64 port function
Assign a function to the port from a drop-down menu.
E-MADI64 label
The Talk label assigned to the port used to identify the port when configuring
talk paths.
E-MADI64 description
An optional description for the port of up to 255 characters long.
E-MADI64 channel labeling
The 4-character channel ID for each MADI input channel is taken from the
provided embedded data bits. The channel ID for each MADI output channel
can be enabled in EHX.
You can do any of the following:
 Use the 4-character, 3rd party ID, provided from the input channel.
 Use the Production Maestro Pro Alias.
 Disable the ID and use the EHX port name for display on EHX Panels.
This means that supported user panels can automatically show:
 The MADI channel ID.
 The Alias as supplied from Production Maestro Pro.
 The Talk / Listen label as defined in EHX.
E-MADI64 card properties
Card Properties permits sample rate selection when synching to video signals.
The E-MADI64 card must be configured before it can be used when not using
the Word Clock Source Sync.
Card Properties always defaults to the E-MADI64 standard for the number of
channels.
1)
To set the IP parameters right click on the E-MADI64 card, and
select Card Properties. This displays the settable parameters.
Note: You can also double click on the E-MADI64 card.
The following dialog is displayed:
Page 148
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-40 MADI Channel Sample Rate
E-MADI channel
mode
Sample rate
Configurable ports
32
96K
32
56
44.1K or 48K
56
64
44.1K or 48K
64, 32 or 16
Table 5-3 E-MADI Channel modes
5.47.3 Upgrading the E-MADI64 card firmware
You can upgrade the following E-MADI64 code with EHX:

H8 application code (*.fwc format file).

DSP code (*.fwc format file).

FPGA code (*.fwc format file).
The boot code file (*.mot) is upgraded using the Renesas Flash Develo pment
Toolkit 3.4 Basic (FDT), not EHX. The FPGA code can also be upgraded using
Xilinx iMPACT programming software.
Note: For detailed upgrade procedures and information, including upgrades
that you cannot perform in EHX, see the Eclipse HX Upgrade Guide.
To upgrade E-MADI64 H8, DSP or FPGA code (for all the E-MADI64 cards)
using EHX:
1)
Ensure that you have the following equipment:
Equipment
Description / Notes
PC with an Ethernet or serial port
-
EHX software
EHX must be installed and configured
Ethernet or serial connection
For the matrix to PC connection
H8 application, DSP and FPGA code files
The appropriate application code, DSP
code and FPGA code files (*.fwc format)
are available from the Eclipse HX DVDs:
Software DVD > Eclipse HX-OmegaMedian-Delta > E-MADI Application
Software DVD > Eclipse HX-OmegaMedian-Delta > E-MADI DSP
Hardware DVD > Eclipse HX-OmegaMedian-Delta > E-MADI FPGA.
Page 149
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Table 5-4 Upgrading e-MADI64 code
2)
Start EHX on the PC.
3)
Connect the matrix to the PC using either an Ethernet or serial
port.
4)
In EHX, open the configuration. Select System > Layout.
5)
Right click the matrix and then select Firmware> Update
Firmware.
6)
The Update Firmware wizard dialog is displayed. Click Next.
In the Select Hardware Type screen, ensure that the Card radio
button is selected:
Figure 5-41 Select Hardware Type dialog
7)
Click Next and then browse to the E-MADI64 code file (application,
DSP or FPGA code files (*.fwc)).
The folder contains the *.fwc file and a Read Me file (*.txt) with
version information. Select the*.fwc file and click OK / Open.
Note: See Step 1 for the location of the *.fwc files on the Eclipse HX DVDs.
8)
Click Next and confirm that the details displayed are correct.
9)
Click Next and confirm that the download commences.
10) When the download has completed, click Finish to close the update
firmware wizard.
11) Ensure that the E-MADI64 cards reset once the download is
complete.
Code
Approximate reset time
H8 application
1 minute
DSP
3 minutes
FPGA
18 minutes
Page 150
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Table 5-5 E-MADI64 card reset times
When the download has completed, click Finish to close the update firmware
wizard.
5.48
Fixed groups
A fixed group is a list of port labels including panels, interfaces and IFBs that
are represented by a single, fixed group label. The fixed group label can be
assigned to selector keys on one or more panels, which when activated,
simultaneously accesses all members of that fixed group.
Note:
For information about Call Management Groups, see 5.48.6 Call
Management Group options.
Note: Because partylines and Fixed Groups are now viewed as a global item
across all systems (they work inter-system), partyline and Fixed Group
alias names are no longer displayed in remote systems.
Note: All partylines and Fixed Groups should be given a unique name.
Figure 5-42 Eclipse HX Setup Menu
5.48.1 Fixed groups setup and configuration
To create a Fixed Group and assign members to that group the following steps
should be followed:
1)
Page 151
Open Configuration > Fixed Groups.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-43 Fixed Groups List
2)
Select the New button at the bottom left of the Groups window
(top left window of the screen).
3)
Replace the auto-filled Group Talk label with a meaningful label.
4)
Replace the auto-filled Group Listen label with meaningful label.
5)
Replace the auto-filled Group description with a more meaningful
description.
6)
To add members select the select the required members from the
Available window (bottom left of the screen) and click on the > in
the section between the lower windows to transfer the members to
the Attached window in the bottom right of the screen.
Alternatively double-clicking on the required item transfers it to the
Attached window. Also right clicking on a member of the
Available group displays a menu allowing it to be attached.
7)
To remove members from the group select the members to be
removed in the Attached window and click on the < symbol in the
central section to return them to the Available window.
Alternatively double-clicking on the required member moves it back
to the Available group. Also right clicking on a member of the
Attached group displays a menu allowing it to be detached.
Fixed Groups can be made up of local and remote members (see 11
Networking).
Note: If you select a fixed group and select Find Usages in the Properties
Pane, a list of ports that are assigned is given.
Page 152
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.48.2 Fixed group attached controls
Attachments can be attached to Fixed Groups that allow a Route, Relay or
Speed Dial to be activated via a secondary action.
1)
Open Configuration > Fixed Groups.
2)
Create a Fixed Group or select a Fixed Group that was been
previously created.
3)
Expand Attached Control in the Properties window.
4)
Select Secondary Action in the Attached Control list.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required control.
Figure 5-44 Fixed Group Attach Control Screen
5.48.3 Fixed group basic options
Basic Options displays the fixed information about a group and can be used to
edit the group description, Talk and Listen Aliases and Talk and Listen labels.
To enable/disable Basic Options
1)
Open the Fixed Groups screen by selecting the Fixed Groups link
on the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Fixed Group or select a Fixed Group that was been
previously created
Page 153
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Expand Basic Options in the Properties window.
To edit an item in the Basic Options list select the item in the left hand
column and edit the text in the right hand column.
5.48.4 Fixed group global settings
To enable/disable Global Settings
1)
Open the Fixed Groups screen by selecting the Fixed Groups link
on the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Fixed Group or select a Fixed Group that was been
previously created
3)
Expand Global Options in the Properties window.
4)
Select Latch Disable or Page Override in the Global Settings
list.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required status.
5.48.5 Global group numbers
Fixed groups are globally numbered, giving them a unique, global identity
throughout the Eclipse HX system.
If a Fixed Group is assigned the number 001, then there can be only one Fixed
Group with the number 001, however many matrices are intelligently linked.
1)
Fixed Groups are numbered based on local creation order.
5.48.6 Call Management Group options
Call Management Group options allow you to add extra functionality to a fixed
group configuration. These features can be used when:

You need to treat a group as a pool of responders; where any group
member can take a call.
The Call Management Group Enable option (found in
Matrix>Configuration>Fixed Groups>Properties) will enable this
functionality. This means that any member from a defined group can call
another group, alerting all members of that group. See Figure 5-45 Call
Management Group. When using this group configuration, any member of the
group being called can pick up the incoming call and this creates a point-topoint audio connection. See Figure 5-47 Call Management Group call pick-up.
Page 154
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Group 2
Group 1
Note: Each member of Group 1 can call Group 2.
Call management group: group call group
Figure 5-45 Call Management Group
Group 2
Group 1
Note: Each member of
Group 2 can call Group 1.
Call management group: group call group
Figure 5-46 Call Management Group
Page 155
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Group 2
Group 1
Panel 6
Group Call Group
call pick-up
Panel 6 picks up the
incoming call from Group 1
and the call is reduced to a
single two-way connection.
Figure 5-47 Call Management Group call pick-up
This feature can be used when members of separate groups or teams need to
talk to each other, for example members of master transmission control room
(a broadcasting scenario) need to contact members of a studio.
There are a number of set-up options available:




A speaker port can be configured to broadcast incoming calls to a group.
See Figure 5-48 Speaker port to group call.
An external line can be a participant caller.
An individual can be configured to call a group.
Once a point-to-point connection has been made, the connection can be
set to persist for a specified time (0-60 secs) after the call has been
released by users. This means that the call can be re-activated without
having to be re-broadcast to the whole group.
When no speaker port is specified, and multiple members are calling
multiple members, both groups MUST be local to the same matrix.
Setting a speaker port in Matrix>Configuration>Fixed
Groups>Properties will enable an external line to be used.
Page 156
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Group 1
1. Loudspeaker broadcasts to
group
2. Panel user picks up the call and a point-to-point
connection is made.
3. Another call may be routed to the loudspeaker to be
picked up by another panel user.
Figure 5-48 Speaker port to group call
Configuring a call management group
To configure a call management group:
2)
Create a fixed group that contains all the panels to be included in
the call management group (see 5.48.1 Fixed groups setup and
configuration).
3)
Expand Call Management Group Options in the Properties
window of the fixed group.
4)
Ensure the Call Management Group option is enabled. Click the
dropdown arrow to the right of this option to set it to True.
Page 157
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Call Management
Group Options
Call Management Group Enabled
This enables Call Management Group functionality (see Figure 5-45
Call Management Group).
5)
Set the Call Management Group Timeout as required (0-60
secs).
Configuring a loudspeaker port for a call management group:
Follow steps 1 – 4 above.
6)
Page 158
Click the dropdown arrow to the right of Group Management
Group Port to see available ports. Select port.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Select loudspeaker port
This enables Speaker Port to Group Call (see Figure 5-48 Speaker
port to group call). To disable this option, ensure that this option field
is blank (click the blank placeholder at the top of the list).
Note: You will need to enable this option if you wish to use an external line with the
call management functionality.
5.48.7 Fixed group fast assign options
The Fast Key Assign Options list display items which relate to the fast assign
mode available on certain panel types. Fast key assign options can only be
applied to a Fixed group that is already attached to a Sort Group.
To enable/disable Fast Key Assign Options
1)
Open the Fixed Groups screen by selecting the Fixed Groups link
on the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Fixed Group or select a Fixed Group that was been
previously created.
3)
Make sure the Fixed Group is attached to a Sort Group then;
4)
Expand Fast Key Assign Options in the Properties window.
5)
Select the required options:
 Default Assign as Talk and Forced Listen. When true the default
for a key assigned to this label is Talk and Forced Listen.
 Enable Assignment as Listen. This must be enabled to allow a VSeries panel operator to assign a listen key to this label. If it is not
enabled a V-Series panel operator cannot assign a listen key to the
label.
 Enable Assignment as Talk. This must be enabled to allow a VSeries panel operator to assign a talk key to this label. If it is not
Page 159
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
enabled a V-Series panel operator cannot assign a talk key to the
label.
 Protect Port from Assignment. When this option is enabled the
port cannot be locally assigned as a talk/listen key by another panel.
6)
Select the drop down arrow and set the required status (True or
False).
The status box is checked or unchecked to indicate True or False.
5.49
Fixed group tallies
To enable/disable Tallies
1)
Open the Fixed Groups screen by selecting the Fixed Groups link
on the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Fixed Group or select a Fixed Group that was been
previously create.
3)
Expand Tally Options in the Properties window.
4)
Select In Use Tally in the Tally Options list.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required status.
This allows the system to set a tally (flashing LED) on all the panel keys that
are assigned to the Fixed Group whenever a talk is active on the Fixed Group.
In the case of multiple matrices in a linked set the ‘In Use’ tally is broadcast to
all other systems in the linked set. In this way the feature is seamless over
the matrices in a linked set.
The default is disabled.
Sort function on fixed groups members
EHX provides a sort capability that allows the EHX user a quick and easy way
of grouping common items such as FOR-22s together. The sort function has
been implemented in both the ‘Attached’ window and ‘Available’ window.
Figure 5-49 Group Members List
Page 160
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
To operate the sort function, select the Fixed Groups link from the
Eclipse HX Menu and select the required Fixed Group.
2)
Use the All tab on the Attached window to display all the members
of the groups, or the Interfaces tab to display only the interfaces
in the group or the Panels tab to list the panels in the group.
The # tab sorts the group members by ascending or descending port number.
5.50
Sort groups
Sort Groups are only available if a V-Series Panel is configured. Sort Groups
are groups of other items such as controls, fixed groups, IFBs, interfaces,
panels and partylines that can be treated as a single item and accessed in local
menu mode to assign a member of the sort group to a key. Selecting Sort
Groups in the EHX Setup menu displays the sort group editor.
Figure 5-50 Sort Group Editor
1)
To create a new sort group click on the New button and the new
sort group is added to the main window (top left window).
2)
To add members to the sort group select the required item in the
lower left window (the Available window) and click on the >
symbol in the center partition to transfer them to the lower right
window (the Attached window).
3)
To remove items from the sort group select the item in the
Attached window and click on the < symbol in the center partition
to move the item back to the Available window.
The # button on the Available and Attached panes sorts the members
by port number in ascending or descending order, preceded by nonport items such as controls.
Page 161
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The Label button sorts the members by name alphabetically and the
Description button sorts the members alphabetically by description.
The tabs above the Available and Attached panes filter the members by
type.
4)
To set the properties of the sort group open the Basic Settings
menu in the Properties window (top right).
5.50.1 Basic options
Description
Enter an optional description for the sort group such as function.
Engineer comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the sort
group.
Listen label
The listen label that is available for panel configuration.
Talk label
The talk label specified for use in the panel configuration table.
5.51
Key groups
Key Groups provide a way of assigning a label to keys on multiple panels in a
system or within a linked set. Once the key group members have been set up
using EHX, the target of the key group can be changed with a single
assignment in Production Maestro Pro.
Up to 100 key groups can be set up on a system. Each key group can only be
assigned to a single target such as a partyline (Conference in Production
Maestro) or four-wire port (Four-wire Viewer in Production Maestro Pro) or a
panel port.
1)
Page 162
To set up Key Groups select Key Groups in the EHX Setup menu
to open the key groups editor.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-51 Key Groups Editor
2)
Click on the New button to create a new key group and select the
group to configure it using the Properties pane.
3)
Open the Basic Settings menu to set up the key group properties.
5.51.1 Basic options
Activation
The activation setting determines how the assigned keys the key group behave
when the key group is activated.
1)
To set the activation select Activation on the Basic Settings and
open the drop-down menu.
The activation options are: Talk and Listen, Talk, Listen, Talk and
Forced Listen or Dual Talk and Listen.
Page 163

Talk and Listen sets all the key group keys to talk with listen
when the key group is active.

Talk sets all the key group keys to talk when the key group
is active.

Listen sets all the key group keys to listen when the key
group is active.

Talk and Forced Listen sets all the key group keys to talk key
with permanently made listen when the key group is active.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

Dual Talk and Listen sets all the key group keys to Dual talk
and listen when the key group is active.
Description
Contains the description for the selected key group.
Engineer comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any comments about the key group or the
key group target.
Listen label
The listen label for the key group that is displayed on the keys assigned to the
key group.
Talk label
The talk label for the key group that is displayed on the keys assigned to the
key group.
5.51.2 Key group members
The key group editor displays a list of all the panels currently assigned with the
key group in the lower Attached pane.
1)
The key members cannot be changed in this pane, but by rightclicking on an item a Go to option is displayed. Click Go to to open
the Panel Programming tab and display the panel.
Figure 5-52 Key Group Member on Panel
2)
Panel keys are assigned to a key group from the Panel
Programming tab. Select the required panel and key then rightclick to display the properties menu.
Figure 5-53 Adding a Key to a Key Group
Page 164
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Select Key Groups to display a list of all the available key groups
and select the destination key group. Left click on the required key
group to add the key to the key group. The assignment is indicated
by the addition of a white box round the key and a checkbox
against the key group.
Figure 5-54 Key Added to a Key Group
4)
To remove a key from a key group select the key in panel
programming and right-click on it to open the options menu. Select
the Key Groups option to display a list of key groups and click on
the checkbox for the key group the key is to be removed from.
Keys may already be assigned to destinations before being added to a key
group. In this case the key functions remain active until the key group is
assigned to a conference or four-wire port by Production Maestro Pro, at which
point the key functions are overridden by the key group destination. If the key
group is deassigned by Production Maestro Pro the keys revert to their
previous states.
A red reset does not delete the destination assignment of a key group, while a
black reset will delete the destination assignment of a key group.
A key group can only be introduced to the Eclipse HX working configuration
using a configuration download (keygroups cannot currently be applied to a
system in online mode).
The EHX software only includes a configured key group in the map download
for a particular system if the keygroup is in use on that system. This means
that in a linked set configuration, any system that utilizes a newly created
keygroup must be downloaded to.
5.52
Partylines
An EHX partyline is a virtual partyline. When assigned to selector keys on
various panels in the system, that label enables anyone in the system who
activates a talk or listen (or both) to that partyline label to talk/listen to
anyone else who has joined the partyline at the same time. EHX permits the
assignment of panels to a partyline. However this is normally completed in the
Panel Programming screen by assigning the partyline label onto the panel.
Note: Because partylines and Fixed Groups are now viewed as a global item
across all systems (they work inter-system), Partyline and Fixed Group
alias names are no longer displayed in remote systems. All Partylines
and Fixed Groups should be given a unique name.
Page 165
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-55 Configuration Menu
To create a partyline and assign permanent members to that party:
1)
From the Configuration menu select the Partylines link. This opens
the Partylines configuration screen.
Figure 5-56 Partyline Setup Screen
2)
Page 166
Select the New button at the bottom left of the Partylines window.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Change the partyline label and description fields with more
meaningful identifiers.
4)
To add permanent fixed members, select the required member in
the Available pane.
5)
Click on the > button to transfer the member to the Attached
pane.
6)
Right-click on a member in the ‘Attached’ pane to open a
configuration menu and select whether the attached member is
Talk, Listen or Talk and Listen.
The partyline label can be programmed onto a panel key.
The # button on the Available and Attached panes sorts the members by port
number in ascending or descending order, preceded by non-port items such as
controls.
The Label button sorts the members by name alphabetically and the
Description button sorts the members alphabetically by description.
The tabs above the Available and Attached panes filter the members by type.
Once a partyline is created, a system must be downloaded to utilize that
partyline. It is not sufficient to only download to the matrix that hosts the
partyline (for example, use Production Maestro Pro to assign members from
the entire linked set to the partyline.
The recommended use of this feature is that all partylines are configured and
then a download to all matrices is carried out. The Production Maestro Pro
software can then be used to manipulate these partylines in an online fashion.
5.52.1 Partyline attached controls
Controls can be attached to partylines that allow a Route, Relay or Speed Dial
to be activated via a secondary action.
1)
Open the partyline screen by selecting the Partylines link on the
Configuration menu
2)
Create a partyline or select a partyline that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Attached Control in the Properties window.
4)
Select Secondary Action in the Attached Control list.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required control.
Page 167
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-57 Partyline Attach Control Screen
5.52.2 Partyline basic options
Basic Options displays the fixed information about a partyline and can be used
to edit the partyline description, Talk and Listen Aliases, Talk and Listen labels,
and Shared Partyline.
To enable/disable Basic Options
1)
Open the Partyline screen by selecting the Partylines link on the
Configuration menu
2)
Create a partyline or select a partyline that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Basic Options in the Properties window.
The Basic Options are:
 Description - description of the partyline to indicate function etc.
 Engineer Comments - engineering information about the partyline.
 Listen Alt Text – the alternative text for the listen label.
 Listen Label - the Listen label for the partyline.
 Talk Alt Text – the alternative text for the talk label.
 Talk Label - the Talk label for the partyline.
5.52.3 Partyline global options
To enable/disable Global Options
Page 168
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
Open the partyline screen by selecting the Partylines link on the
Configuration menu
2)
Create a partyline or select a partyline that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Global Options in the Properties window.
The Global Options are:
 Auto Listen
 Dial Code
 Global Partyline Number
 Latch Disable
 Prevent Reply Signalization
5.52.4 Partyline fast key assign options
To enable/disable Soft Mode Options
1)
Open the partyline screen by selecting the partylines link on the
Configuration menu
2)
Create a partyline or select a partyline that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Fast Key Assign Options in the Properties window.
4)
Select the required options:
5)
Page 169

Default Assign as Talk and Forced Listen. When true the
default for a key assigned to this label is Talk and Forced
Listen.

Enable Assignment as Listen. This must be enabled to allow
a V-Series panel operator to assign a listen key to this label.
If it is not enabled a V-Series panel operator cannot assign a
listen key to the label.

Enable Assignment as Talk. This must be enabled to allow a
V-Series panel operator to assign a talk key to this label. If it
is not enabled a V-Series panel operator cannot assign a talk
key to the label.

Protect Port from Assignment. When this option is enabled
the port cannot be locally assigned as a talk/listen key by
another panel.
Select the drop down arrow and select the required status.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.52.5 Partyline tallies
To enable/disable Tallies
1)
Open the Partylines screen by selecting the Partylines link on the
Configuration menu
2)
Create a partyline or select a partyline that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Tally Options in the Properties window.
4)
Select In Use Tally in Tally Options.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required status.
This allows the system to set a tally (flashing LED) on all the panel keys that
are assigned to the partyline whenever a talk is active on the partyline.
In the case of multiple matrices in a linked set the In Use tally is broadcast to
all other systems in the linked set. In this way the feature is seamless over the
matrices in a linked set.
The default is disabled.
5.52.6 Partyline global numbers
Partylines are globally numbered, giving them a unique, global identity
throughout the Eclipse HX system.
If a partyline is assigned the number 001, then there can be only one partyline
with the number 001 in the system, however many matrices are intelligently
linked.
Partylines are numbered based on local creation order.
5.53
Routes
A route is an audio path between two points in the matrix that can be activated
by another intercom panel’s selector key. The Routes link provides the
following functions:
 Define the route origin and route target for each route
 Determine whether each route is activated with a talk key, a listen key,
or both
 Enable a reverse listen (a reversal of the route’s directio n when it is
activated by a Talk).
A route is defined by selecting a route origin, a route target, and providing a
description. The origin can be any port in the local system. An origin cannot be
a nonport label, including a partyline or fixed group. The target can be any
audio label in the system including an IFB, partyline or a Group or remote
Page 170
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
ports, except a control label. When a route is activated, it sets a talk from the
origin to the target.
It is possible to activate the route by activating a talk and/or a listen to the
route’s label.
If the Action is set to Talk the route acts as a unidirectional audio path
whenever a talk or listen to the route is activated. If the route action is set to
Reverse Listen the route acts as a bi-directional audio path provided Activate
with Listen is also set.
Figure 5-58 Routes Configuration Screen
After the route has been set up using this screen, it is possible to assign it to a
label from the Control Manager screen. Within the Panel Programming screen
and the Stacked Keys area, with the Control Label programmed onto a panel
then double clicking this Label, the attachments to the Label are displayed.
The following explains each column:
5.53.1 Description
Enter the description of the route into this field. This field is an information
field only and is not used by the Eclipse HX System.
5.53.2 Route origin
This the label of the calling Panel/Interface.
5.53.3 Route action
The Action field specifies how the route behaves when it is activated. When the
mouse pointer is placed in the action field an arrow is displayed. Right click the
arrow to display the drop-down menu of possible route actions.
Page 171
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Talk
When this route action is selected the route acts as a talk only route from the
source to the destination. Signalization appears on the destination.
Talk & reverse listen
When this route action is set audio is routed from the source to the destination
and signalization appears on the destination. Audio is also routed from the
destination to the source.
Reverse listen
When this route action is set the route allows the source to listen to audio from
the destination. No signalization appears on the source.
Inhibit talk
When the route is activated all audio from the source to the destination is
blocked.
If an IFB is configured as the route target. The following actions are available:
Calls (IFB)
Audio for the route origin is sent to the route target as an IFB caller.
Inhibited from calling (IFB)
Audio from the route origin is prevented from calling the route target IFB.
Routed as destination of (IFB)
The route origin will become a destination of the IFB and hear audio from the
route target IFB.
Routed as source to (IFB)
Audio from the route origin will be sent to the route target IFB as an IFB
source.
Routed as return to (IFB)
Audio from the route origin will be sent to the route target IFB as an IFB
return.
Listen to IFB return (IFB)
Audio from the route target IFB returns will be sent to the route origin.
Monitor audio at IFB destinations
The route target will hear the same audio heard at the route target IFB
destination.
Page 172
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.53.4 Route target
The Route target is the port, IFB or partyline target of the route.
5.53.5 Activate with talk
When this box is checked, the route activates whenever anyone sets a talk key
to the route’s label.
5.53.6 Activate with listen
When this box is checked, the route activates whenever anyone sets a listen
key to the route’s control label.
Note: Activating the route by a listen has exactly the same effect as
activating it by a talk, unless the Reverse Listen box has been checked
making a bi-directional audio path between the source and destination.
5.53.7 Creating a route
1)
Select the Routes link from the Configuration menu. The Routes
screen opens. The top area of the screen is used to configure
Routes and the bottom area contains all Labels that are available to
select and utilize.
2)
Select New, complete the description field then select either
Activate with Listen or Activate with Talk.
It is also possible to have both Activate with Listen and Activate with
Talk selected.
3)
Assign a source and a destination to the Route.
5.53.8 Assigning a source and destination to a route
To assign a source and destination to a route:
1)
Page 173
Open Routes.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-59 Assigning sources and destinations to a route
2)
Do either of the following:

Create a new route.

Select an existing route and click Description to edit.
3)
Drag a source from the palette onto the Route Origin field.
4)
Drag a target from the palette onto the Route Target field.
Alternatively, you can assign sources and destinations from the labels palette
at the base of the screen.
5)
Click the Route Action field. A drop-down menu of available
actions is displayed (see above). Select an action.
5.53.9 Delete a route
To delete a route:
5.54
1)
Open Routes. Select the route you want to delete.
2)
Press Delete.
Speed dials
5.54.1 Speed dial (DTMF sequences)
The MVX-A16 matrix card can generate DTMF Tones using the DTMF Daughter
board fitted into the slots on the MVX-A16 card. DTMF Tones are the beeps
made by a Touch Tone Telephone.
Page 174
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The Speed Dial screen defines the name, activation type DTMF Sequence and
the source of the sequence which is currently a Telephone interface. There is a
23 digit limit on a DTMF Sequence.
The currently allowable dial sequences are as follows: The numbers through 0
– 9 the pound (#) and asterisk (*) characters. A DTMF Sequence is defined as
a sequence of these numbers.
A Speed Dial must be attached to a control label with the Speed Dials label
attached to this control, and then the control label is programmed onto the
panel next to the label of the telephone. To Activate the Speed Dial activate
the label to the telephone interface, and then activate the Speed Dial label by
latching the selector of the label.
5.54.2 Speed dial setup
To setup a speed dial:
1)
Select Speed Dials from the Configuration menu. The Speed Dial
screen appears.
Figure 5-60 Speed Dial Setup
2)
To add a new speed dial, click New at the bottom left of the speed
dial window. A new speed dial entry is created with the default
description highlighted.
3)
Complete the Description, Activate with Listen, Activate with
Talk, DTMF Auto Dial number and the Speed Dial Source
fields.
A comma (,) may be placed in the DTMF sequence to add a pause of 500ms
between digits or before the DTMF sequence if required.
Page 175
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
Create a control using the Controls link on the Configuration menu.
Then attach the speed dial to the control by selecting the control so
that it is highlighted. Then select the required speed dial from the
Available members pane and click on the right arrow to transfer it
to the Attached members pane. The speed dial is now attached to
the control.
5)
To detach a speed dial from a control simply select the control and
then select the speed dial to be detached in the Attached
members pane. Click the left arrow to move it back to the
Available pane.
6)
Program the label of the Telephone Interface and the Control to
activate the Speed Dial from the panel Programming screen.
7)
Download to the Matrix by an Apply Label Changes download.
8)
To activate the Speed Dial, select the Label of the Telephone
Interface, then select the label of the Speed Dial’s control.
5.54.3 Delete a speed dial
To delete a Speed Dial:
5.55
1)
Select the Speed Dials link from the Configuration menu. This
opens the Speed Dials configuration screen. Locate the Speed Dial
you want to delete.
2)
Click the gray button next to the description field to highlight the
row.
3)
Press Delete.
Controls
Relay options, routes and speed dials can only be accessed by being first
placed inside a control. A control can then be placed on a panel key for
activation.
The Controls link on the Configuration menu provides a screen location where
the use of controls are used for association with attachments to allow a label to
activate a route, relay or speed dial for the currently required control.
Page 176
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-61 Configuration Menu
1)
To access the Control Manager select the Controls link from the
Configuration menu
.
Figure 5-62 Control Manager Screen
Page 177
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The Control Manager screen is split into 4 windows, which allows the following
activities:
5.55.1 Creating and deleting controls
The Controls window provides a list of all available controls. Also Controls are
created and deleted from within this area. To create a new control, select the
New button. This adds a control to the list.
Controls are automatically identified with a Talk and Listen label (the default
labelling is ctrl1 and onwards).
1)
To delete a Control, highlight the Control from the Control Viewer
window then select Delete.
5.55.2 Properties
The Properties window allows the user to edit the Control’s Basic Settings,
Global Settings and Soft Mode Options.
Controls basic options
Basic Options displays the fixed information about a Control and can be used to
edit the Control description, Talk and Listen Aliases and Talk and Listen labels.
To enable/disable Basic Options:
1)
Open the Control Manager screen by selecting the Controls link on
the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Control or select a Control that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Basic Options in the Properties window.
4)
Update the settings as required.
Global options
To enable/disable Global Options
1)
Open the Control Manager screen by selecting the Controls link on
the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Control or select a Control that was been previously
created
3)
Expand the Global Options in the Properties window.
4)
Select Latch Disable in the Global Settings list.
5)
Select the drop down arrow and select the required status.
Page 178
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Soft mode options
The Soft Mode Options list display items which relate to the Soft Mode
available on certain panel types. Currently this is restricted to Sort Groups.
To enable/disable Soft Mode Options
1)
Open the Control Manager screen by selecting the Controls link on
the Configuration menu
2)
Create a Control or select a Control that was been previously
created
3)
Expand Soft Mode Options in the Properties window.
5.55.3 Available
The Available window provides a complete list of all the available relays, routes
and speed dials that can be attached to a Control.
1)
To attach a relay, route or speed dial to a Control, select or create
a Control from the Control Viewer and then either double click the
required item in the Available window or select the item and click
on the > symbol between the windows. This transfers the item into
the Attached window. The Control label can then be placed onto a
panel key or attached as a secondary action to a panel, Interface,
Fixed Group or partyline depending on user requirements.
5.55.4 Attached
The Attached window provides a list of relays, routes and speed dials that have
been attached to a Control. You can also remove items from Controls.
1)
To remove an attached item from a control, select the Control from
the Control Viewer window.
2)
From the Attached Actions window double click the item that is no
longer required or select the item and click on the < symbol
between the Available and Attached windows. This returns the item
to the Available window.
3)
Select the Matrix Preferences link to display the options for a
number of system wide functions.
5.55.5 Relay naming
The Available and Attached windows have tabs for the various types of
functions, allowing them to be filtered for ease of selection. Two of the tabs are
Panel AUX relays and Panel mute relays.
These functions correspond to these relay outputs in the I-Station
documentation. In the case of V-Series panels the output relays and labelled as
Page 179
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1 and 2. The correspondence between the labels in EHX and the panel
hardware is:
 Panel mute relay - relay output 1.
 Panel AUX relay - relay output 2.
5.55.6 TEL-14 configuration options
1)
From the Hardware menu select the Cards and Ports to display
the Eclipse HX hardware setup.
2)
Locate and select the Telephone Interface. The Advanced Settings
for the telephone are displayed.
3)
Open the DTMF Settings menu in Advanced Settings to set up the
DTMF facilities.
4)
Set the Access Prompt to true, and then select the Enable
Passcodes field from the Advanced Settings and open the drop
down menu listing the passcodes configured under Matrix
Preferences.
5)
Select the Passcode by placing a tick in the check box beside the
required password.
6)
Apply the changes to the matrix by completing an Apply Changes
to System download.
The selected Passcode is then specific to that TEL-14 interface.
Inward DTMF access
DTMF Access allows combinations of DTMF tones that are pre-assigned with
specific meanings to have access to the Eclipse HX system. The Assign DTMF
Access field within the Advanced Setting screen of a telephone screen allows
setting all parameters related to the DTMF-tone decoding. Each MVX-A16
Crosspoint Card provides sixteen ports, on each MVX card there are 4 slots
where DTMF Daughter boards are required to be fitted before DTMF-tone
encoding and decoding is possible. DTMF decoding is the ability to interpret
DTMF tones. DTMF encoding is the ability to create DTMF tones.
Selector codes are the two-digit numerical codes that outside callers use to
access the system. The codes initiate the specification of audio paths when
system is accessed via DTMF inward access. If the [One Digit Codes] field is
set to true, only the ten single-digit codes [0] through [9] function as selector
codes.
If the Multiple Codes (Accumulate) option has been selected in Advanced
Settings the inward DTMF stream may contain multiple selector codes, fo r
example to activate more than one panel or control. If this is the case it is
Page 180
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
advisable to separate the selector codes by placing a space in the source string
to ensure that selector codes after the first are correctly identified.
Note: The characters used to specify a space or pause between codes may
vary with the equipment calling into the Eclipse HX system. Consult the
manufacturer’s instructions for details.
Control codes are codes that perform specific functions, including:
00 - Clear Last Entry—This code clears the paths that were activated by the
last selector code entry. If [00] is entered twice, the paths that were activated
by the last two selector code entries clear, and so on.
91 - Send Call Signal—This code sends a call from the port to the matrix as if a
call signal was sent by an external device connected to the port.
92 - Disable DTMF Decoding—This code turns off DTMF decoding. This may be
desirable because certain program sources may contain DTMF tones not
intended to be interpreted as selector codes, and that can inadvertently
reroute the audio path. For further information First code only
99 or 099 - Clear All—Either of these codes clear all currently active talk and
listen paths.
Prompt tones are tone sequences that the MVX-A16 sends to the user. The
MVX-A16 issues the following four distinct prompt tone sequences:
Access Code Request—Indicates that the system is ready for an access code to
be entered. If the system does not recognize the entered access codes, it
repeats the access code request prompt. The number of attempts to enter the
access code is limitless. The prompt consists of a low tone followed quickly by
a higher tone. The sequence is quickly repeated three times.
Access Granted—Indicates that the system has acknowledged the access code
and that access to the Eclipse HX matrix has been granted. The prompt
consists of four tones, each increasing in pitch and immediately followed by a
ready prompt.
Ready—Signals that the system is ready for a selector code entry. It also
indicates that it has acknowledged the last selector code entered. The prompt
consists of a single high-pitched tone.
Error—Indicates that an invalid code has been entered. Error prompts result
from:
1)
Selecting a code that is less than 10 or greater than 59
2)
Selecting a code without talk or listen labels assigned to it
3)
Assigning a control code before a port has been activated.
Multiple codes
If the Multiple Codes is set to false only one selector code can be active at a
time. Entering a second selector code automatically deactivates any audio
paths that were activated by the previous selector code. If this field is set to
Page 181
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
true, any number of selector codes can be active at the same time. To
deactivate a selector code, either enter the selector code number preceded by
a zero or enter a clear last or clear all control code.
One digit codes
If One Digit Codes is set to true the selector codes are limited to one digit—0
to 9—plus the quick keys—pound (#) and asterisk (*). These codes are easier
to remember and dial. However, they also have the following limitations:
 Only ten codes are available
 Control codes are not recognized
 The pound and asterisk keys can only be assigned a single digit code
 The system no longer recognizes the 0<selector code> form, which
deactivates any established individual path. This means if multiple
codes, has been enabled a previously established path cannot be
deactivated.
First code only
If the First Code Only is set to true the DTMF tone detection is disabled after
the first valid code has been received. DTMF decoding can also be disabled by
entering the disable DTMF decoding control code (92), described in the Control
Codes section.
Certain circumstances may encourage the disabling of DTMF-tone detection.
During normal operation, DTMF tones in the port’s audio input are decoded at
all times. However, certain audio program sources— such as telephone
company commercials—may contain DTMF tones that are not intended to be
interpreted as selector codes, and can inadvertently reroute the audio path.
Certain voices or musical instruments can also fool the DTMF tone detection
circuitry into detecting false DTMF tones.
By disabling DTMF-tone detection after the program feed has been set up, the
paths are not accidentally rerouted. To re-enable tone decoding, hang up and
call back again.
Quick codes
These menus define the Touch-Tone keypad’s asterisk (*) and pound (#) keys
as quick keys through the use of quick codes. If a two-digit pair (corresponding
to one of the valid selector codes or control codes) is selected from the menus
for the asterisk or the pound, the DTMF port translates the asterisks or pound’s
DTMF tone into that two-digit code. For example, if the asterisk key is
supposed to clear all paths, select [00] from the [*] menu. If the [One Digit
Codes] box is checked, the quick keys cannot be assigned control codes.
Page 182
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.55.7 Configuring DTMF access codes
Multiple code setup
Multiple codes enable an operator to stack multiple routes so that having called
one destination a sequential call can be made to a further destination without
ending the first call.
Assign DTMF codes
Figure 5-63 DTMF Activations
1)
From the telephones Advanced Setting screen select Assign DTMF
Codes to open the DTMF Assignments screen.
2)
Select the desired destination label from the palette of available
destinations, at the bottom of the screen.
3)
Find the desired code in the DTMF Codes column.
4)
The columns to the right of the DTMF Codes column allow assigning
as many as three talk labels and one listen label for each key. Click
in the column for the desired type of label for the desired code:
Talk 1, Talk 2, Talk 3, or Listen. The selected label appears in the
desired cell. If this cell has already been assigned a label, the new
label displaces the old one.
5)
Download the new configuration to the matrix with an Apply Label
Changes download.
Page 183
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: Although above describes a single route multiple ro utes can be
attached to a control.
One digit code setup
To assign the one-digit selector codes (numbered 0 through 9), set the [One
Digit Codes] field in the Advanced Settings screen for a telephone interface to
true.
1)
From the telephones Advanced Setting screen select Assign DTMF
Codes to open the DTMF Assignment screen.
Figure 5-64 Single Digit DTMF Assignments
2)
Select the desired destination label from the palette of available
destinations, at the bottom of the screen.
3)
Find the desired code in the DTMF Codes column.
4)
The columns to the right of the DTMF Codes column allow assigning
as many as three talk labels and one listen label for each key. Click
in the column for the desired type of label for the desired code:
Talk 1, Talk 2, Talk 3, or Listen. The selected label appears in the
desired cell. If this cell has already been assigned a label, the new
label displaces the old one.
5)
Download the new configuration to the matrix with an Apply Label
Changes download.
Note: When a user dials, the DTMF tones go out on the last selected talk to
an interface (in ECS v5.2.4, the DTMF tones go out on the last TEL-14
port). An interface is either a TEL-14, CCI-22, FOR-22 or a Direct.
Page 184
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.56
Logic Maestro
The Logic Maestro link on the Configuration menu opens the Logic Maestro
window. Logic Maestro allows the user to create complex controls using an
interactive graphic editor.
Figure 5-65 Initial Logic Maestro Screen
Logic Maestro operations are described in the Logic Maestro manual.
5.56.1 Preferences
The Preferences link on the Configuration menu opens the Preferences dialog
allowing the matrix system setups to be configured. This dialog is also
accessible from the System Layout screen and is described in chapter 3 under
Preferences.
5.57
FreeSpeak Beltpacks
Note: This section describes how to add and configure beltpacks for use with
the FreeSpeak wireless partyline system. For information about
FreeSpeak II beltpacks, see 5.58 FreeSpeak II™ (FS II) beltpacks.
Selecting Beltpacks from the EHX setup menu displays the beltpack
configuration editor which allows beltpacks to be added and configured. Before
a beltpack works, it must be registered to the system. The Beltpacks screen is
only available if an antenna or splitter card has been configured in the matrix.
To do this:
1)
In Preferences set the correct DECT system ID and Frequency.
2)
Configure the COM port to use for the beltpacks.
Page 185
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Open the Beltpacks screen, and enter a beltpack.
4)
Connect the required beltpack on the COM port.
5)
Press the Register connected Beltpack to this system button.
6)
Click the Register Beltpacks button to register a beltpack. A list
of instructions to register a beltpack is displayed.
7)
When the beltpack has been powered up and connected click on
the Register button. A confirmation screen is displayed when the
beltpack has been registered. If the beltpack cannot be registered
an error message is displayed.
Note: The Associated Role field can be edited by positioning the cursor in the
box and editing the text in the normal way. A description of the
beltpack can be added in the Description column.
5.57.1 Beltpack properties
To set the properties for the beltpack open the required options in the
Properties window (top right).
Basic options
Associated role
Select a role from the list of available beltpack roles set up using the Beltpack
Roles facility.
Description
Enter an optional description for the beltpack such as user or department.
Engineer comments
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the
beltpack.
Listen label
The Listen label that is available for panel configuration (a combined
Talk/Listen label is shown unless the option for 10 character labels is turned
off).
Power up state
This defines whether the beltpack role is set to a preferred role or a fixed role
when it is powered up.
Serial number
The beltpack serial number. This field is non-editable.
Talk label
Page 186
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The Talk label specified for use in the panel configuration table (a combined
Talk/Listen label is shown unless the option for 10 character labels is turned
off).
5.57.2 FreeSpeak beltpack roles
Beltpack roles define the beltpack in the same way as a label defines a key on
a panel so that assigning a role to a beltpack has the effect of creating a label
for it that can be referenced by other devices in the system such as a panel.
The Beltpack Roles screen is only available if an antenna or splitter card has
been configured in the matrix.
1)
To create and edit beltpack roles select the Beltpack Roles entry
in the Setup menu to display the beltpack roles editor.
Figure 5-66 Beltpack Role Editor
2)
To create a new beltpack role select a port and click on the Type
drop-down menu and select the entry Beltpack Role. This adds a
new role entry on the selected port. The Talk and Listen labels can
be edited by placing the cursor in the box and clicking to select the
entry and editing the text in the normal way.
3)
To edit the description position the cursor in the description box
and select the text to edit it.
Highlighting the role allows the role properties to be entered using the
Properties window.
Basic options
Description
Enter an optional description for the beltpack role such as user or department.
Engineer comments
Page 187
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
A scratchpad for engineers to record any relevant information about the
beltpack role.
Listen label
The Listen label that is available for panel configuration. A combined
Talk/Listen label is displayed unless this option is set.
Talk label
The Talk label specified for use in the panel configuration table. A combined
Talk/Listen label is displayed unless this option is set.
Global options
Latch disable
The setting determines if the beltpack PTT is latching or non-latching in the
same way as a key on a panel may be latching or non-latching.
Menu options
Beltpack menu options
The setting determines the level of access the beltpack user has to the
beltpack menus to alter settings. The four settings are:
 Advanced - full access to all menu options and settings.
 Normal - beltpack microphone type and headphone limiter setting are
locked, all other options and settings are available.
 Basic - all beltpack options and settings are locked except contrast,
master volume, key lock, tap latch, page lock and information screens.
 None - all menus and settings are locked and cannot be viewed.
Fast key assign options
(1)
Default assign as talk and forced listen.
When true the default for a key assigned to this label is Talk and Forced Listen.
(2)
Enable assignment as a listen
Allow the port to be assigned locally using Fast Key Assign as a listen key by
another panel.
(3)
Enable assignment as talk
Allow the port to be assigned locally using Fast Key Assign as talk key by
another panel.
(4)
Protect port from assignment
Prevents this port from being locally assigned by another panel in soft mode.
Page 188
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Beltpack programming
Beltpack programming (assigning labels to keys, setting beltpack operating
parameters and so on) is now carried out in Panel Programming treating the
beltpack as a panel where labels can be dragged and dropped onto keys in the
same way as panels.
To program a beltpack select Panel programming from the Configuration
menu and select the required beltpack from the drop-down list of panels at the
top of the window. The beltpack mimic is displayed.
Figure 5-67 Beltpack Programming Screen
Labels can be selected from the list and dragged and dropped onto beltpack
keys.
Six pages of keys are available on the beltpacks. The key pages are selected
from the drop-down Page list. The pages are Main (the default page), Shift1,
Shift2, Shift3, Shift4 and Shift5.
When the pointer is placed over a key the status of the key is displayed
showing the beltpack role, key number and the key type.
Right clicking a key opens a key configuration menu allowing the key type,
local assignment, interlock group and latch disable to be set up.
Page 189
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the pushbutton.
1)
To set the key activation type right click over the required key to
display the options menu and then select the Activation item to
display the activation options.
Figure 5-68 Beltpack Key Assignment Menu
The activation options are: Talk, Listen, Talk and Listen, Talk and Forced Listen
or Dual Talk and Listen.
 Talk sets a talk from the beltpack to a destination with no automatic
listen to the destination.
 Listen sets a key to listen to the source without talking to the
destination at the same time. Use as a monitor key (press the volume
level up/down buttons under the display to increase listen level).
Page 190
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Talk and Listen sets a talk key with listen (press the volume level
up/down buttons under the display to increase or mute the listen
level).
 Talk and Forced Listen sets a talk key with permanently made listen
(press the volume level up/down buttons under the display to increase
or mute the listen level).
 Dual talk and Listen sets a Dual talk and listen key. This makes the
pushbutton activate a Talk and Listen on a press and hold or latch a
Listen with a short press and release (less than 200ms) on the same
pushbutton.
Local assignment
1)
Click on the Local Assignment entry to display the available options
for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment and to disallow local key assignment. If the local
assignment is allowed for the key then the beltpack key can be
assigned by updating the beltpack with key assignments uploaded
from the matrix via the Upload control on the toolbar.
Interlock group
The EHX user can assign several keys on a beltpack into a selector group and
restrict the group so that only one key of the group can be activated at any
one time. This function only refers to talk paths.
Note: For example if a beltpack had three keys programmed to talk to a
cameras 1 to 3 then by setting these into an interlocked group only one
camera key can be selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all beltpack keys.
To add a key to an interlocked group
1)
From Panel Programming, select the beltpack.
2)
Right click on the required key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Page 191
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-69 Beltpack Interlock Group Assignment
Local advanced latch disable
This allows latching of keys to be disabled locally on the beltpack. May be set
to On or Off.
Go to key destination
Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the Matrix Hardware editor
screen with the destination the key refers to highlighted.
Delete key
Click the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned label (shown
highlighted). Note that only the highlighted label is deleted. The green listen
label for that key is not deleted.
Page 192
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.58
FreeSpeak II™ (FS II) beltpacks
5.58.1 Registering beltpacks
Before a beltpack works (other than in standalone mode), it must be registered
to the system. There are two ways to do this:
 By using a USB connection between the beltpack and the computer
hosting the EHX software
 By using Over The Air (OTA) registration.
Registering beltpacks using a USB cable
1)
Turn the beltpack on.
2)
Connect the beltpack to a USB port on the computer.
3)
From the Hardware menu, select Beltpacks.
4)
Click Register Beltpack. The following screen appears containing
a list of instructions.
5)
Click Register.
5.58.2 Registering beltpacks over the air
Over the Air (OTA) must be enabled before you can register a beltpack over
the air.
You can do this either from the EHX software or from a beltpack that is already
registered and has basic menu access or higher with the required admin code.
Page 193
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
For information about enabling OTA registration from a beltpack, see the
FreeSpeak II User Manual, 8.13 Enabling OTA registration from a
beltpack.
To enable OTA from the EHX software:
1)
From the Hardware menu, select Beltpacks.
Note: Beltpacks can be registered before they have a role. However, until
they have a role assigned to them they cannot be logged in to the
system. So it is a good idea to have roles for beltpacks assigned before
registration. You may wish to register more beltpacks than you have
roles for, to allow for spare beltpacks. See 5.59.4 below for more
information on assigning beltpack roles.
2)
Click Enable Registration Mode.
This opens registration or pairing mode for two minutes.
Page 194
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Click here to enable over the air
registration
Figure 5-70 Enable over the air registration requested.
Page 195
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
Once OTA registration is enabled it will be necessary to follow the OTA
registration sequence from the beltpack to be registered.
Menu button (2
second press and
hold)
On/Off button (3
second press and
hold)
Rotary control, audio
levels Channel B (also
menu navigation in
menu mode)
Rotary control, audio
levels Channel A (also
menu navigation in
menu mode)
Cancels menu selection
when in menu mode
Beltpack information screen.
Also displays menu options
when in menu mode.
Menu select when in
menu mode
Figure 5-71 Beltpack menu controls
4)
On the beltpack to be registered, hold the menu key for two seconds
to enter MENU options. Scroll to SYSTEM CONNECT using the rotary
controllers and select it using key D. In menu mode the D key on the
beltpack operates as SELECT and the C key exits the menu level and
cancels the selection.
Note: On a new system there will be no previous connections at this point.
However, if the beltpack has been connected previously, a confirmation
screen will appear. Select Yes to connect to a new system or No to
remain connected to the current system.
5)
Page 196
Available systems will be visible on the beltpack menu screen.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
C – beltpack
V – system visible. If blank
the beltpack cannot see the
system
P – Pairing or registration
enabled. If blank, reenable registration
connected to
system. If R the
beltpack has been
previously
registered and is
known. May be
blank,
unconnected and
unregistered
Figure 5-72 Beltpack systems information screen
To connect the beltpack to the system, the system must be
 Visible (V) and
 In registration (pairing) mode (P) on the beltpack screen.
If the system is not in registration mode (P is not visible), registration
should be re-enabled on the basestation. (Step 2).
Note: If a beltpack is connected to a system, ‘C’ will be visible in this screen. If a
beltpack is not currently connected but has been in the past, ‘R’ will be
visible. This shows that the beltpack has been previously registered with
the system which will recognize it.
6)
Scroll to the system you want and press D (menu select) on the
beltpack.
7)
You will be presented with a PIN code screen. Enter the four digit
pairing code for the system using both rotary controllers and the menu
Page 197
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
select key (D). The default code is 0000. Use the right hand controller
to scroll through numbers 1-9 and the left hand controller to move
through the square number boxes.
Note: To change the OTA registration pin code go to: Configuration >
Preferences > Wireless Beltpacks.
Over the air registration
PIN code
Figure 5-73 OTA registration PIN code
8)
After entering the correct pairing code on the beltpack screen, select
an available role from the list displayed.
9)
The beltpack is now registered and ready for operation.
Page 198
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
10) If required, the next beltpack can now be registered (Step 2).
5.58.3 Fetching registered beltpacks
Beltpacks registered over the air are not present in the configuration map until
they are fetched.
There are two situations where beltpacks to not need to be added to the
configuration map:
1)
When the beltpack is for temporary use.
2)
When the beltpack is already in the configuration map (previously
registered and fetched).
Note: If OTA mode is initiated by EHX, not a beltpack, EHX will automatically fetch the
list of beltpacks registered to the matrix that are not in the locally stored map.
The user is presented with the option to add these to the map stored in EHX, for
later download.
To add the beltpack to the configuration map (fetch beltpack):
3)
From the Hardware menu, select Beltpacks.
4)
Click Fetch Registered Beltpacks From Matrix.
Page 199
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Fetch beltpacks to
add them to
configuration
Figure 5-74 Fetch registered beltpacks
The EHX system will remind you to fetch registered beltpacks if this has not
already been done.
5.58.4 Beltpack roles and properties
Beltpack roles define the beltpack in the same way as a label defines a key on a
panel so that assigning a role to a beltpack has the effect of creating a label for it
that can be referenced by other devices in the system such as a panel. The
Page 200
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Beltpack Roles screen is only available if an FS II antenna or splitter card has
been configured in the matrix.
1)
To create and edit beltpack roles, select the Beltpack Roles entry in
the Configuration menu to display the beltpack roles editor.
Figure 5-75 Beltpack Role Editor
2)
To create a new beltpack role, click New. This adds a new role entry.
3)
To edit the label and description, position the cursor in the description
box and select the text to edit it.
Page 201
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
To delete a role, select the role and click Delete.
5)
To edit beltpack properties, select the beltpack role, and then select
the required set of properties in the right hand side of the display.
You can edit the following beltpack properties:

Basic Options

Panel Options

Menu Options

Fast Key Assign Options

Gain Options

Global Options

Alarm Options

Headset and Microphone Options

Logic Input Options
5.58.5 Basic options
Port Number
Use this option to specify a unique identifier for the port (role) on the matrix.
Alias (Remote Matrix)
Use this option to allow labels to appear differently on remote systems compared
to the local system. The maximum number of characters including spaces is 10.
Note: You can only edit this if the Alias Label setting is set to Freely editable.
Go to Configuration > Preferences > Intelligent Linking and then
select Freely editable.
Alt Text
Use this option to specify alternative text for the label. For example, you can set
the label and alias to contain the role name and the user name respectively. Click
Show Alt Text to display the alternative text.
Page 202
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Comments
Use this option to enter additional information about the beltpack role.
Description
Use this option to describe the port and what it is used for.
Dial Code
Use this option to enter a dial code that is used for panel fast key assign. See
5.22.12 Fast key assign options.
Label
Use this option to identify the role. The maximum number of characters including
spaces is 10.
5.58.6 Panel options
Reply Tally Auto Clear Time
Use this option to set the period during which the Reply key will continue to flash
after a call ends. You can disable this feature, or select a period between from 1
to 60 seconds.
Brightness Level
Use this option to set the brightness level of the beltpack display. You can select
the following:
 1 to 5 – the display is brighter up to the highest level (5).
Display Dim Timeout
Use this option to determine when the beltpack display dims if no buttons are
pressed or no calls are received. You can select the following:
 Off – the display never dims
 5 to 120 seconds
Page 203
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Display Off Timer
Use this option to determine when the beltpack display switches off if no buttons
are pressed or no calls are received. You can select the following:
 Off – the display switches off
 5 to 120 seconds after the Dim Timeout
Listen Again Auto Delete
Use this option to determine when a Listen Again message is automatically
deleted. Listen Again is a feature that allows you to replay an incoming message
by tapping the beltpack Menu key. You can select the following:
 Off – auto delete is disabled
 30 to 240 minutes
Listen Again Record Time
Use this option to determine the length of Listen Again messages. Listen Again is
a feature that allows you to replay an incoming message by tapping the beltpack
Menu key. You can select the following:
 Off – Listen Again is disabled
 1 to 15 seconds
If the message exceeds the record time, the message wraps round to the start of
the buffer and overwrites any previously recorded material.
5.58.7 Menu options
Beltpack Menu Options
Use this option to determine which menu options a beltpack user can access. You
can select the following:
 Advanced- all menu options are available.
 Normal – all menu options are available except:
o Main > Volume Operation
o Main > Display Mode
o Main > Settings > Headset Options > Headset Limiter
Page 204
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Basic – all menu options are available except:
o Main > Volume Level Control
o Main > Line In Volume Level
o Main > Admin Options
o Main > System Connect
o Main > Information
 None – no menu options are available except:
o Main > Admin Options (admin code required)
Partyline Display Mode
Use this option to determine whether the beltpack display is in display partyline
mode or display intercom mode.
Both display modes show information including beltpack role, signal strength,
battery status and A and B channel volume levels. The intercom mode also shows
key labels.
Master Volume Operation
Use this option to determine the behavior of the beltpack rotary controls. If you
select this option, both rotary controls adjust the master volume of the beltpack.
Otherwise, each rotary control (A and B) adjusts the volume of the crosspoint
assigned on A or B.
5.58.8 Fast key assign options
Enable Assignment as Listen
Use this option to allow the port to be locally assigned to a listen key on a remote
panel.
Enable Assignment as Talk
Use this option to allow the port to be locally assigned to a talk key on a remote
panel.
Page 205
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Default Assignment as Talk and Forced Listen
Use this option to ensure that if the port is assigned to a remote panel, it will
default to Talk and Forced Listen.
Protect Port from Assignment
Use this option to ensure that a panel user cannot change the default attributes of
a key, for example assigning a listen attribute to a talk key.
Note: This option is only available if Enable Assignment as Talk is enabled,
and Enable Assignment as Listen is disabled.
5.58.9 Gain options
Input Gain
Use this option to set the volume level of the input to the port. You can select
values from 0dB to -45dB.
Output Gain
Use this option to set the volume level of the output from the port. You can select
values from 0dB to -45dB.
Line-In Level
Use this option to set the volume level on the program feed. You can select values
from -15dB to 6dB.
Beltback Master Gain
Use this option to adjust the beltpack master gain. You can select values from 69.9dB to 0dB.
5.58.10
Global options
Latch Disable
Use this option to disable key latching on all calls to the port. Key will remain
active only while they are pressed.
Page 206
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.58.11
Alarm options
Battery Alarm Mode
Use this option to determine how the beltpack behaves w hen the low battery
alarm triggers. You can set the following alarm conditions.
 Vibrate and audio warning
 Vibrate only
 Audio only
 Off – alarm disabled
Low Battery Threshold
Use this option to determine the battery level that triggers the low battery alarm.
You can select values from 0% to 100%.
Call Alert Mode
Use this option to determine how the beltpack behaves when it receives a call.
You can set the following alarm conditions.
 Audio warning
 Vibrate
 Audio warning and vibrate
 Off – alarm disabled
Out of Range Alarm
Use this option to determine how the beltpack behaves when it moves out of
antenna range. You can set the following alarm conditions.
 Fade & Audio
 Fade Only
 Audio Only
 Off – alarm disabled
Page 207
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5.58.12
Headset and microphone options
Headset Limiter
Use this option to prevent the headset audio becoming too loud. You can limit the
audio level from -32dB to 16dB.
Sidetone Level
Use this option to determine how much audio from the headphone micropho ne
feeds into the headphone. You can select a sidetone level from -69.9dB to 0dB.
Mic Echo Cancellation
Use this option to improve the quality of the microphone voice audio.
5.58.13
FreeSpeak II™ beltpack programming
You can use the Panels configuration screen to configure beltpack roles to
determine how they behave. For example, you can assign labels to keys and set
beltpack operating parameters. The beltpack is treated as if it were a panel,
allowing you to drag and drop labels onto keys. To program a beltpack:
1)
Page 208
Select Configuration > Panels. The Beltpack Programming screen
appears.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 5-76 Beltpack Programming Screen
2)
From the drop-down list at the top-left of the screen, select the
required beltpack.
3)
Drag and drop labels from the bottom of the screen onto the required
beltpack keys.
When the cursor hovers over a key, the status of the key is displayed showing the
key number and the key type.
4)
Right click a key to open a key configuration menu allowing you to
configure the key type, local assignment, interlock group and latch
disable.
Activation
Use this option to determine how the key behaves when activated with the
pushbutton
Page 209
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
Right click the required key to display the options menu, and then
select Activation.
2)
Select from the following options:

Talk - sets a talk from the beltpack to a destination with no
automatic listen to the destination

Listen - sets a key to listen to the source without talking to the
destination at the same time. Use the rotary control to increase
listen level.

Talk and Listen - sets a talk key with listen Use the rotary
control to increase listen level.

Talk and Forced Listen - sets a talk key with permanently made
listen Use the rotary control to increase listen level.

Dual Talk and Listen - sets a dual talk and listen key. This
makes the pushbutton activate a talk and listen on a press and
hold or latch a Listen with a short press and release on the
same pushbutton.
Local assignment
Use this option to enable or disable local key assignment.
1)
Right click the required key to display the options menu, and then
select Local Assignment.
2)
Select between:

Allow Local Assignment

Disallow Local Assignment
Interlock group
Use this option to assign several keys on a beltpack into a selector group and
restrict the group so that only one key of the group can be activated at any one
time. This function only refers to talk paths.
Page 210
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
For example, if a beltpack has three keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 3
then by setting these into an interlocked gro up only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
You can assign any or all beltpack keys to nine available interlocked groups.
To add a key to an interlocked group
1)
Right click the required key to display the options menu, and then
select Interlock Group. A list of Interlock Group options appears.
2)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be in
any interlock group. The key interlock groups appear in the key
information popup shown when the cursor hovers over a key.
You can also add the key to other interlock groups.
Local advanced latch disable
Use this option to set key latching:
1)
Right click the required key to display the options menu, and then
select Local Advanced Latch Disable.
2)
Select On or Off.
Go to key destination
Use this option to display the Matrix Hardware Editor screen with the
destination the key refers to highlighted. Right click the required key to display
the options menu, and then select Go to Key Destination.
Delete key
Use this option to remove a key label. Right click the required key to display the
options menu, and then select Delete.
5.58.14
Upgrading beltpack and antenna firmware
You can upgrade the FreeSpeak II beltpack firmware by:
 Using a USB connection
 Using an Over The Air upgrade.
Page 211
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
You can upgrade the antenna firmware by:
 Using a USB connection
 Using E1.
Upgrading by USB connection
1)
Connect the beltpack or antenna to a USB port on the computer
running the EHX software.
2)
Select Tools > Apply Wireless Firmware Via USB.
3)
Browse to the location of the upgrade file, and then select Update
Firmware.
The upgrade file is downloaded to the beltpack or antenna.
Note: You can connect more than one beltpack or antenna to the computer if
you have multiple USB ports. The units will be upgraded sequentially.
Upgrading beltpack firmware by Over The Air Upgrade
1)
Right-click on the Frame in the Layout window, and then select
Firmware > Update Firmware. The Update Firmware Wizard
appears.
2)
Select Next. The following screen appears:
Figure 5-77 The Update Firmware screen
Page 212
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
4)
Select the Wireless radio button. There are two further options:

Automatic – select this option to automatically upgrade the
beltpack when it is switched on.

Prompted – select this option to allow the beltpack user to
confirm the upgrade.
Select Next, and then browse to the upgrade file (.fww) and select
Open. The upgrade file is loaded to the antenna. The upgrade file is
downloaded to all the connected beltpacks, and the beltpacks
automatically restart.
The antennas store the beltpack upgrade files until they are power cycled or there
is a black reset.
You can track the status of the download in the EHX Event Log, and for beltpack
upgrades the upgrade status is also shown on the beltpack display.
Upgrading antenna firmware over E1
1)
Right-click on the Frame in the Layout window, and then select
Firmware > Update Firmware. The Update Firmware Wizard
appears.
2)
Select Next. The following screen appears:
Figure 5-78 The Update Firmware screen
3)
Page 213
Select the Wireless radio button.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
Select Next, and then browse to the upgrade file (.fww) and select
Open. The upgrade file is loaded to the antenna, and the antenna
restarts.
You can track the status of the download in the EHX Event Log.
Page 214
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
6
Virtual Interrupt Fold Backs
Eclipse HX 8.5 offers a new, much-enhanced architecture for Interrupt Fold Backs
(IFBs). IFBs are now created and configured as virtual software entities
This section explains how to:
 Display IFBs
 Interpret the IFB information available within PM Pro
 Dynamically control and configure IFBs
These virtual entities have a number of advantages over more traditionally
configured interfaces. They:
 Are easier to configure without the need for complicated cabling
 Support multiple sources, destinations and returns.
 Support multiple callers. The callers to the IFB destination, typically the
talent such as a news anchor, are given a priority level from 1 – 5 (level 5
has highest priority).
 Allow members of a key group to trigger the IFBs.
 Allow monitoring of program feeds anywhere in the system without the
need for patch panels. This enables troubleshooting of audio feeds.
Note: A program feed is typically a mix of audio. Listeners at different locations hear
different program feeds as required.
You create IFBs in the EHX Configuration Software.
An IFB allows a caller to cut or dim the audio from a configured source to a
configured destination. This is typically used in broadcasts where an anchor
(destination) listening to a program feed (source) can be interrupted by a director
(caller). The anchor will receive audio from the director while the program feed is
either dimmed or muted. If the caller priority is set to 1, the audio is mixed with
the program feed.
An IFB contains the following components:
 Source – the audio that is heard by the IFB destinations while the IFB is
not activated (not being called).
Page 215
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Destination – where the audio is routed.
 Dim level – the extent to which the source audio is reduced.
 Caller – an audio source that triggers the IFB. The IFB destination now
hears the Caller audio, and the Source audio in dimmed or muted
according to the Dim level setting. Callers are prioritized from 1 (lowest)
to 5 (highest) to determine who has precedence in the feed. The default
priority is 3.
 Return/Listen:
o A return listen enables the caller to hear the anchor/talent.
o A destination listen can be used to monitor program feeds and/or any
active callers. The destination listen allows a caller, for example a
sound engineer, to monitor the audio sent to the anchor.
Typical IFB use in a broadcasting scenario is illustrated in Figure 6-1 and Figure
6-2.
Audio Mix
Director
Program feed IFB (not triggered)
Talent
(receives program feed)
Figure 6-1 Broadcast scenario with no IFB trigger.
Page 216
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Audio Mix
Director
Program
feed
IFB
triggered
Caller
Talent
(hears director s
voice, with muted or
dimmed program
feed)
Figure 6-2 Broadcast scenario with IFB trigger
Audio mix
The program feed usually consists of a mix minus combination of audio. This
means different listeners in the broadcast location are fed different audio mixes as
required. Figure 6-3 shows a broadcasting application with audio mixing, where:
 Mix minus 1 is Anchor 1 + Anchor 2 minus Remote
 Mix minus 2 is Anchor 2 + Remote minus Anchor 1
 Mix minus 3 is Anchor 1 + Remote minus Anchor 2
.
Page 217
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
AUDIO MIX
Director
Legend:
Routing
Mix minus 1
Mix minus 2
Mix minus 3
Broadcast audio
IFB
IFB
Matrix
Mic
Anchor 1
Mic
Anchor 2
Remote location
Broadcast studio
Audio Mix
Figure 6-3 Audio mix in broadcasting application
Page 218
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
6.1
Viewing and creating virtual IFBs
To view or create IFBs, from the Configuration menu, select IFB.
Figure 6-4 The IFB screen
Any IFBs already configured in the system are displayed in a grid with the
following information:
Label – a name for the IFB. To change the label, click the Label field and type
a new label.
Description – a summary of the IFB function. To change the description, click
the Description field and type a new description.
Attenuation – the level by which the source audio is dimmed. This ranges
from No Cut to Full Cut in 3 dB increments. To change the attenuation, click
the drop-down arrow and select a new value.
Source – the IFB source.
Destination – the IFB destination.
Return – the IFB return.
You can change sources, destinations and returns by using the mouse to drag
an entity from the pallet below the IFB grid onto the required source,
destination or return field.
Page 219
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 6-5 IFB pallet
To remove an item from the source, destination or return field, right-click the
field and select Remove Item.
Note: If you add a port to the destination field, it is automatically added to
the return field.
You can have a maximum of six sources, destination and return for each IFB.
Note: Sources, destinations and returns can be on a remote matrix. If a panel
has remote returns or destinations, their input and output levels can
only be adjusted from the return/destination local matrix frame. They
cannot be adjusted on the panel.
Note: Remote sources and returns will be permanently routed to the IFB host
frame. Therefore, to reduce intelligent linking resources, the IFB should
be created on the same matrix frame as the destinations and or returns
if possible.
To add multiple sources, destinations or return:
6.2
1)
Select the arrow to the left of the IFB label.
2)
Drag the extra source, destination or return onto the ADD +
button.
Configuring IFB properties
To configure IFB properties:
Page 220
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
In the IFB screen, select the required IFB.
Note: You can use the Ctrl key to select more than one IFB.
The Properties screen appears on the right hand side of the screen.
6.2.1
Global properties
You can configure the following global properties:
IFB Number – This uniquely identifies the IFB.
Auto Listen – Any port that talks to the IFB destination port automatically
hears the audio from the destination port.
Latch Disable – Disables key latching so that keys are only active while they
are held down or pressed. The default is for disabled key latching.
IFB Attenuation – Sets the dim level of the IFB from no cut to full cut in
steps of 3dB.
6.2.2
Basic options
You can configure the following basic options:
Alias (Remote Matrix) – Defines an alias for an entity on a remote matrix.
The alias can have up to 10 characters including spaces.
Note: This feature is only available if Freely Editable is selected in
Configuration > Preferences > Alias Labels.
Alt Text – Defines the text that appears when the ALT TEXT key is pressed.
Comments – Use this field to enter a comment about the port and its use.
Description – Use this field to enter a description of the field.
Dial Code – Defines the dial code used in fast key assign operations.
Label -Defines the identity label. This can have up to 10 characters including
spaces.
Note: If Split Label is enabled, both Talk and Listen labels can have up to
five characters including spaces.
Split Label – Enables the input and output of the port to be separate talk and
listen entities.
6.2.3
Fast key assign options
You can configure the following fast key assign options:
Enable Assignment as Listen – The port can be locally assigned to a listen
key on another panel.
Enable Assignment as Talk – The port can be locally assigned to a talk key
on another panel.
Default Assign as Talk and Forced Listen – If the port is locally assigned to
a key on another panel, the default is talk and forced listen.
Page 221
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Protect Port from Assignment – Prevents a panel user from changing the
default attributes of the key, for example changing a listen key to a talk key.
Note: This is only available if Enable Assignment as Talk and Enable
Assignment as Listen have different values.
6.2.4
Tally options
In Use Tally – The panel tally light flashes when another panel or entity talks
to the IFB port.
Note: You can configure tally options in Configuration > Preferences >
Panel & Key Operation.
6.2.5
Attached control options
Secondary Action – When the IFB key on a panel is activated, the IFB is
triggered along with a second event.
Page 222
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7
IP devices
7.1
Introduction to IP devices
IP Devices allows you to centrally manage IP panels, IVC-32 cards and Concert
users.
1)
To start IP Devices, go to Hardware > IP Devices.
You can also select IP Devices from the top left of the Layout screen.
The initial IP Devices display shows three panes for managing the configuration
of IP panels, Concert users and IVC-32 IP interface cards.
When IP Devices is opened it automatically searches for IVC-32 cards in
configured matrices and IP enabled V-series panels on the same network as
the configured matrices.
Note: EHX operators should not open more than one instance of IP Devices to
assign or monitor IP panels on the same matrix at the same time.
Figure 7-1 IP Devices screen
The IP Panels and Concert Users panes have a menu button in the top left
corner for opening menus for diagnostics and the discover button in the top
right corner to start EHX searching for the specified items.
Page 223
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-2 IP Devices Pane Buttons
2)
Click on the menu button to open the menus associated with the
type of IP device associated with the pane.
3)
Click on the discover button at the top left corner of the IP Panels
panel to search for all the IP panels on the network.
The IP Cards pane has a similar layout but does not have a discover button.
Instead the left-hand button on the header bar opens or closes the list of IVC32 cards detected in the current matrix.
Figure 7-3 IP Cards Pane
Use the left and right buttons on each IVC-32 card display to open displays for
the individual cards.
Page 224
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7.2
IP panels
1)
Click on the IP Panels discover button to search all the systems on
the network for IP enabled V-Series panels and display all the
panels detected as a list.
Figure 7-4 IP Panel List
The panels listed are color coded according to status. The color codes are:
 Blue - panel has been discovered but does not have a login IP address,
User ID or password configured.
 Green - panel has been discovered and is logged in to the current
configuration.
 Amber - panel has been discovered that is configured in this
configuration but is not logged in.
 Gray - panel has been discovered with an IP address that is not for the
matrix in this configuration. The panel may be configured for another
matrix and may be logged in to that matrix.
 Red - panel has been discovered that is not in one of the other states.
The panel may be configured for this matrix but is not in the current
configuration.
 Mauve - panel has been discovered but the panel status is
undetermined. Panels may be displayed in this color briefly during
discovery until the panel status is established and the color then
changes to reflect the panel status.
2)
Page 225
Click the left button of a panel entry to display an Identify Panel
button.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-5 Identify Panel Button
3)
Click on the identify button to request that the panel enters its
IDENTIFYME mode with the panel LEDs flashing red across the
panel. The Identify Panel text is displayed in bold and a red bar
moves across the button to show that the mode is active.
Figure 7-6 Identify Function Active
4)
Click the button again to end the identify mode.
5)
Click the right button to display a list of all the available
information about the panel.
Figure 7-7 IP Enabled Panel Info
The panel information displayed shows the following:
 Panel - panel type.
 MAC - panel MAC address.
Page 226
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Connection - the protocol used in the panel connection.
 Connected - the length of time the panel has been connected without a
reset.
 Powered - the length of time since the panel was last powered up.
The IP settings displayed are the same as those set on the panel using the
panel IP setup menus (see V-series manual).
 Login IP - the IP address of the IVC-32 card that the panel tries to log
in to.
 Login Port - the port the panel uses to log in to the IVC-32 card.
 DHCP Enabled - whether the panel should obtain an address from a
DHCP server or use a preset address.
 Connection - the type of connection: WAN, LAN or Internet.
 IP Address - the IP address of the panel.
 Netmask - the subnet mask for the network the panel is on.
 Gateway - the IP address of the gateway to be used when connecting
to the matrix.
 DNS - the IP address of the Domain Name Server to be used by the
panel to obtain an IP address automatically if DHCP is enabled.
6)
Click Edit to enable the IP settings to be changed from IP Devices.
Figure 7-8 Editing IP Panel Settings
Page 227
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7)
When the edits are completed click on the tick button to accept the
changes or the cross button to cancel the changes.
If a parameter is set to an invalid state, such as part of an IP address being set
to a number greater than 255 the error is flagged by a red border around the
item when attempting to save it. The invalid entry is not sent to the panel and
the entry is reset to the original value if edit mode is cancelled.
Figure 7-9 Panel Setting Error in Edit Mode
Note: Care should be taken when making some changes as they may prevent
the panel from logging in to the IVC-32 card, for example by changing
the login IP or login port.
8)
Click on the left arrow button at the top of the IP Panels pane to
display the panel filter facilities allowing panels to be filtered by
state and/or by name.
Figure 7-10 IP Panel Filter Options
9)
To filter panels by status open the status menu (show as All
Panels) and select the panel status filter.
Figure 7-11 Status Filter Menu
Page 228
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
10) Select the required status filter to list all the panels in that state.
Figure 7-12 Panel Status Filtering
11) To filter panels by name enter the panel IP address, MAC address
or panel ID into the Name Search box and click on the Discover
button to refresh the display.
7.3
Assigning a panel to an IVC-32 port
1)
To assign panels to ports on an IVC-32 card, drag the panel icon
from the IP Panels pane to the assignment zone on the IVC-32
card. The following screen appears:
Select the number of additional channels you require. If you select one
or two additional channels, these channels automatically appear as
Hosted Direct in the Port Function column of the Cards and Ports
screen.
Panels can also be moved from one IVC-32 port to another. The results
of the action depend on the status of the panel.
Page 229
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7.4

Moving (assigning) a panel to a port on the IVC-32 card only
adjusts the current user ID in the panel if no user ID in the
panel currently exists. In this case a unique user ID is used
as the user ID of the connection. The password on the
connection is left blank. This initial state of the panel
represented by the blue color and indicates that the panel is
known to be out of use and ready for assignment.

If a current user ID setting already exists on a panel it is not
adjusted during an assignment. If the panel is used in
another currently inactive Eclipse configuration this
association would now have been broken.

When a panel is not used by the current configuration but
has a user ID (even though this may be a stale
configuration) and the matrix IP address is in the current
configuration, the panel is shown as red. Take care before
using this panel, for example, check its current usage before
assigning it

If a panel's matrix IP address is not in the current
configuration and a user ID is set the panel is shown as grey
to indicate it is configured for use on another system. In this
state only a user logged in as administrator (in EHX) may
assign it to an IVC-32 in the currently active configuration.

To un-assign a panel that has been assigned to a port on an
IVC-32 card, simply drag the panel off the port and drop it in
the blank area to the right of the IVC-32 cards.
IP cards
The IP Cards pane displays a list of all the IVC-32 cards detected in the current
matrix with the number of the matrix slot the card is in.
Figure 7-13 IVC-32 Cards List
1)
Page 230
To display diagnostics and the current card configuration, click the
left menu button on any card. You can edit the card configuration.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-14 IVC-32 Cards Diagnostics and Settings
2)
7.5
Click on the Get Diagnostic Info button to retrieve the current
buffer overflow statistics. If a significant number of buffer overflows
are reported this may indicate network problems.
IVC-32 IP settings
The IP Settings section displays the IP setup of the IVC-card.
1)
Page 231
To make changes, click on the Edit button. The fields change from
grey text to input boxes. The external IP address and IP port are
only enabled if the External IP Address box is checked.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-15 Editing IVC-32 Card Settings
7.5.1
IP port
The port the panel uses to log in to the IVC-32 card. This is the internal IP port
if the panel is on the same LAN, or the external IP port if not.
This parameter should not normally be changed from the default value unless
all the IP panels or Concert server are also updated to use the new port
number. If this is not done the IP panels or Concert server cannot
communicate with the IVC-32 card. Eclipse system administrators are advised
to check with network administrators or IT that the default port may be used
without causing a conflict with any other application on the network.
If the IP port number is changed ports 42001 and 1300 should not be used as
these ports are already used by EHX. The Eclipse HX system administrator
should check with the network administrator or IT to obtain a port number to
use.
IP address
The IP address of the IVC-32 card that the panel tries to log in to. This is the
internal IP address if the panel is on the same LAN, or the external IP address
if not.
Page 232
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Subnet mask
Subnet mask used by the IVC-32 card to define the address range the card can
access. Commonly set to 255.255.0.0 or 255.255.255.0.
Default gateway
The address of the gateway to be used to communicate with external devices
such as IP panels and Concert clients over the IP network.
External IP address
Enable this checkbox to edit the external IP address and port number below
the checkbox.
IP address
The external IP address that can be used to communicate directly with the
IVC-32 card itself rather than the matrix via the IVC-32 card. This address is
not used by IP panels etc.
IP port
The external IP port used when communicating directly with the IVC -32 card
using the external IP address.
1)
When the edits are complete click on the tick button to save the
changes. Alternatively click on the cross button to discard the
changes. As soon as the changes are confirmed EHX sends them to
the IVC-32 card.
Restart blocked connections
The Restart Blocked Connections button at the bottom of the Diagnostics
screen is used to restart a call initiated using IP directs and trunks. For more
information, see 11.2.3 IP directs and trunks.
7.6
IVC-32 card panel list
1)
Page 233
To display a list of the panels connected to the IP ports on the IVC 32 card, click on the right button.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-16 List of Ports on an IVC-32 Card
2)
To display diagnostics for a panel, click on the down arrow button
on the right side of the entry for the required panel.
This opens a diagnostics display of cumulative error data for the panel
and the IVC-32 port it is connected to. Where data is presented for
both panel and port this can be used to diagnose whether any network
problems are at the matrix or panel end of the link.
3)
Page 234
Click Get Diagnostic Info to retrieve the current panel diagnostic
data and display it.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-17 Panel Diagnostics Display
Jitter is a measure of the quality of the network connection. It represents the
variation in the time period with which audio packets are received. For
example, if an audio packet is expected every 10 milliseconds, but one audio
packet is received 13 milliseconds after another, this represents a jitter of 3
milliseconds.
If the jitter gets too high the panel starts to experience audio dropouts.
WAN mode panels can deal with larger jitter than LAN mode panels, and
Internet higher than WAN mode, as they use larger jitter buffers to smooth out
the uneven arrival of audio packets. However the downside of this is that the
larger the jitter buffer, the longer the audio delay.
 Average Jitter - the average packet interval in microseconds.
 Max Jitter - the highest packet interval measured in milliseconds.
o LAN mode panels can cope with jitter up to 80 milliseconds
without audio dropout.
o WAN mode panels can cope with jitter up to 120 milliseconds
without audio dropout.
Page 235
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
o Internet mode panels can cope with jitter up to 200 milliseconds
without audio dropout.
 Forward Error Correction - this allows the IVC-32 to recover from
corruption in audio packets caused by a poor network link, at the cost
of slightly increased network traffic and slightly higher audio delay.
Forward Error Correction is set to a HIGH level in internet mode, LOW
level in WAN mode and is disabled in LAN mode.
 Silence Suppression - this reduces the network traffic generated by a
panel by stopping the transmission of packets when there is no audio
input (that is, the microphone is turned off). It can cause a slight
increase in audio delay. Silence suppression is enabled in WAN and
Internet mode, but disabled in LAN mode.
 Rx Packets - this displays a count of the IP packets that a panel has
received, and can be used to check the network connection. When
Silence Suppression is enabled the numbers may only increase when
the panel microphone is enabled.
 Tx Packets - this display a count of the IP packets that a panel has
sent, and can be used to check the network connection. When Silence
Suppression is enabled the numbers may only increase when the panel
microphone is enabled.
 Rx Drops - The number of audio packets that have been lost. This can
be due to network quality.
7.7
Concert users
The Concert Users pane obtains details of the Concert users on the specified
Concert server. The user list can be obtained for all partitions on the server or
for only one partition.
Figure 7-18 Initial Concert User Display
1)
Page 236
Click on the left hand button to enter or edit the IP address for the
Concert server to be searched for users.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-19 Current Concert Server IP Address
2)
Click on the Edit button to enable the Concert server IP address for
editing in order to input the correct address.
Figure 7-20 Editing the Concert Server Address
3)
Enter the required address and optionally the port to be used.
Normally the default port of 8003 should be accepted.
4)
Click on the tick button to accept the edit or the cross button to
cancel the edit.
Note: The port would not normally be changed unless there was a specific
reason for this and the Concert server setup was also changed. If the
port number is changed to an incorrect value IP Manager cannot
connect to the server for the user information.
7.7.1
Concert server dialog
1)
Page 237
Click on the discover button (top right) to obtain the server
information. If All Partitions is selected then all the Concert users
known to the server are listed. Clicking on the down arrow next to
All Partition displays a list of the partitions and allows a specific
partition to be selected.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-21 Concert Users on a Partition
The Concert users are color coded according to the user status. The
possible user codes are described below.

Blue - Concert user discovered, no configured login IP
address or Eclipse ID or Password.

Amber - Concert user discovered, configured in EHX to this
configuration, but not logged in. This does not indicate
whether or not it is configured in the matrix. The
configuration of a port using the IP manager screen involves
both the drag and drop in the UI and a map download to the
matrix.

Green - Concert user discovered, user is logged in to this
configuration.

Gray - Concert user is discovered, login IP address set to
the IP address of another matrix.

Red - Concert user discovered, user is not in any of the
previous categories, may be used by other configuration on
same matrix IP address or not in use but setup on the
current matrix.
Clicking on the arrow button on the right side of a user entry displays
the user details and diagnostics.
Page 238
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 7-22 Concert User Information
The Concert user information fields provide the following details:
 ID - internal Concert identifier.
 Username - Concert user name.
 Eclipse Username - the name that is used to log in to the Eclipse /
Eclipse HX system over IP. This is used in conjunction with the Concert
panel. The Eclipse HX user name must be set up on the Eclipse HX
system.
 Keyname - the name by which the Concert user is assigned to keys on
Eclipse HX panels.
 Eclipse Enabled - whether the Concert user is allowed to log in to an
Eclipse / Eclipse HX system.
 Matrix IP Address - the IP address of the matrix that the Concert user
is logged in to when communicating with an Eclipse / Eclipse HX
system.
Page 239
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Concert user diagnostics
The diagnostic display for Concert users indicates user activity.
 Software Version - the version of the Concert client in use. This field
can only be displayed if the Concert user is logged in to the Concert
server.
 Online seconds - length of time in seconds that the user has been
online to the Concert server.
 Tx Pkts - number of Ethernet packets transmitted to the user Concert
client.
 Tx Octets - number of 8-bit bytes transmitted.
 Rx Pkts - number of Ethernet packets received from the user Concert
client.
 Rx Pkts Lost - number of Ethernet packets from the user client lost.
 Rx Pkts Recovered - number of lost receive packets recovered.
 Rx Pkts Out Of Order - number of Ethernet packets received from the
user client in the wrong order.
The packet count diagnostics are to help diagnose network problems
experienced by Concert clients such as excessive packet loss leading to lower
audio quality.
7.7.2
Assigning a concert user to an IVC-32 port
1)
To associate a Concert user with an IVC-32 port, drag and drop a
Concert user entry onto a port on an IVC-32 card. If the port is
already in use the current entry is removed and replace by the
Concert user. Concert clients can also be moved between ports on
an IVC-32 card by dragging and dropping.
The IVC32 port's talk label, listen label and description fields are
updated with the information received from the EMS (Concert) server.
The connection ID is set as follows:
Page 240

If the Concert User already has a connection ID this is
assigned to that port, otherwise a new unique connection ID
is created and used by both concert user and port. One
special case is when the eclipse ID is already in use, a new
unique ID is created for both concert user and port.

By default a connection password is NOT set. A password is
only used if the port has a password explicitly set on it in
Matrix Hardware for added security. The password can be set
in IP Panel Settings under Advanced Settings.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

Page 241
These changes are sent to the EMS server in real time during
the drag and drop operation so no separate action is
required to update the Concert server.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8
Panel programming
From the Panel Programming screen (in the Configuration menu), you can
assign talk and listen labels to panel keys, assign labels to expansion panel
keys, configure assignment panels, stack keys and set key specific functions.
Figure 8-1 Panel Programming Screen
8.1
The panel programming screen
The Panel Programming Screen is split into four areas.
The top area provides scroll arrows and a drop down list of all intercom panels.
The top area also provides access to key Label Options and Local Assignments.
The middle area provides a mimic of the intercom panels and is the area where
labels are programmed onto the panel selectors. Also this area provides access
to configure Expansion Panels to host Panels.
Note: Expansion panels can only be added or removed in Cards and Ports.
The bottom right area provides an area where stacked keys can be configured
or specific key actions can be set. This area can be expanded or collapsed.
The bottom left area provides Palette consisting of a list of all the matrices
currently in the project. Each matrix can be expanded to list all the entities
that it contains, such as panels, interfaces and partylines.
8.2
V-series panel programming
The following section covers the programming of the V-Series lever key,
pushbutton, and rotary panel types and their associated expansion panels.
Page 242
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.2.1
V-series lever key panels
1)
Select Panels from the Configuration menu to display the panel
options toolbar and select the panel from the drop-down list or the
> icons to step through the list of panels.
Figure 8-2 V-Series Lever Key Panel
2)
To assign keys, click on the required item in the list of available
labels, and then drag the items to the required key and drop them
over the display corresponding to the key. Click on the mouse to
confirm the assignment.
Figure 8-3 Assigning a Label on a Lever Key Panel
Each blue display window is divided into an upper and lower section
with the upper section being the listen label and the lower section
being the talk label. This corresponds to the lever key action to activate
the talk or listen routes (up to listen, down to talk).
Page 243
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
If the mouse pointer is positioned over a key display/label the details of
the label are displayed.
Figure 8-4 V-Series Lever Key Assignment
3)
To display the action menu for a key, position the pointer over the
label and right-click the mouse.
Figure 8-5 Key Properties Menu
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the lever. To set the key activation type:
1)
Page 244
Right click over the required key to display the options menu and
then select the Activation item to display the activation options.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-6 Pushbutton Key Activation
Lever key panels (1RU and 2RU) can support up to eight lever key expansion
panels.
Destination (IFB) listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
Local assignment
1)
Click the Local Assignment entry to display the available options
for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key. This allows you to limit
the keys a panel operator can overwrite when locally assigning
keys by Fast Key Assign (V-Series only) or by Local Key
Assignment (on panels supporting this facility).
Interlock group
You can assign several keys on a panel into an interlock group and restrict the
group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one time. This
function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
Page 245
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
To add a key to an interlocked group:
1)
From Panel Programming, select the desired panel.
2)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Figure 8-7 Interlock Group Assignment
Lever key panels (1RU and 2RU) can support up to eight lever key expansion
panels (not pushbutton or rotary expansion panels). To add an expansion
panel use the Advanced Settings options under Cards and Ports. To display
the expansion panel mimic open the right hand drop-down list (normally
displaying Main Panel) to show the list of all the expansion panels configured
and select the required expansion panel.
Figure 8-8 V-Series Lever Key Expansion Panel
Page 246
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Labels are assigned to keys in the same way as main panels and the option
menu is available.
Key Groups
If key groups have been assigned in Configuration > Key Groups, you can
assign a key to one of the configured key groups.
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off. Select and click
on the required option. This performs the same function as Latch Disable in
the Local Advanced facility. It allows or disallows a panel to latch a key to
another device.
Level Adjustment Applies T0
You can select whether the level adjustment applies to:
 Crosspoint
 Input
 Output
Go to key destination
1)
Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the editor screen
for the type of destination the key refers to. For example if the
destination is a panel then the panel is displayed on the Panels
screen. For a partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with
the partyline highlighted.
Delete key
1)
Click the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned
label (shown highlighted).
Only the highlighted label is deleted. The green listen label for that key is not
deleted.
8.2.2
V-series pushbutton panels
1)
Page 247
Select Panels from the Configuration menu to display the panel
options toolbar and select the panel from the drop-down list or use
the > icons to step through the list of panels.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-9 V-Series Pushbutton Panel
2)
To assign keys drag items from the list of available sources and
destinations to the required key and drop them over the display
corresponding to the key.
Entities in the label palette appear differently for push button panels they are split into left and right sections for talk and listen respectively.
3)
Click on the talk section for a talk key. Click on the listen section
for a listen key
Unlike the lever key panels, only one label can be assigned to a key
rather than two, but key activation can be assigned unlike lever key
panels.
4)
Position the mouse pointer over a key display/label to display the
details of the label.
Figure 8-10 V-Series Pushbutton Assignment
5)
To display the action menu for a key, position the pointer over the
label and right-click the mouse.
Figure 8-11 Pushbutton Properties Menu
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the pushbutton. To set the key activation
type:
6)
Page 248
Right click over the required key to display the options menu and
then select the Activation item to display the activation options.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-12 Pushbutton Key Activation
Pushbutton panels (1RU and 2RU) can support up to eight pushbutton
expansion panels (not lever key or rotary expansion panels).
7)
To add an expansion panel use the panel options under Advanced
Settings. To display the expansion panel mimic open the right
hand drop-down list (normally displaying Main Panel) to show the
list of all the expansion panels configured and select the required
expansion panel.
Figure 8-13 V-Series Pushbutton Expansion Panel
Labels are assigned to keys in the same way as main panels and the option
menu is available.
Destination listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
Local assignment
1)
Page 249
Click the Local Assignment entry to display the available options
for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key. This permits the system
administrator to limit the keys a panel operator can overwrite when
locally assigning keys by Fast Key Assign (V-Series only) or by
Local Key Assignment (on panels supporting this facility).
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Interlock group
You can assign several keys on a panel into a selector group and restrict the
group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one time. This
function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
To add a key to an interlocked group:
1)
From Panel Programming, select the desired panel.
2)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Page 250
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-14 Interlock Group Assignment
Key Groups
If key groups have been assigned in Configuration > Key Groups, you can
assign a key to one of the configured key groups.
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off.
1)
Select and click on the required option. This performs the same
function as Latch Disable in the Local Advanced facility. It allows
or disallows a panel to latch a key to another device.
Level adjustment applies to
You can select whether the level adjustment applies to:
 Crosspoint
 Input
 Output
Go to key destination
2)
Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the editor screen
for the type of destination the key refers to. For example, if the
destination is a panel, then the panel is displayed on the Panels
screen. For a partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with
the partyline highlighted.
Delete key
3)
8.2.3
Click the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned
label (shown highlighted). Note that only the highlighted label is
deleted. The green listen label for that key is not deleted.
V-series rotary panels
1)
Page 251
Select Panels from the Configuration menu to display the panel
options toolbar and select the panel from the drop-down list or use
the > icons to step through the list of panels.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-15 V-Series Rotary Key Panel
2)
To assign keys, click on the required item in the list of available
talk and listen labels, and then drag the items to the required key
and drop them over the display corresponding to the key. Right
click on the mouse to confirm the assignment.
On rotary panels Listen and Talk are actioned by separate controls
(rotary knob for Listen, talk button for Talk) so different paths can be
assigned for Talk and Listen on the same key.
It is also possible to assign other keys to the Reply key on V-Series panels.
Figure 8-16 Assigning a Label on a Rotary Control Panel
Each blue display window is divided into and upper and lower section with the
upper section being the listen label and the lower section being the talk label.
This corresponds to the rotary push action to activate the listen route and the
talk button below the display to activate the talk route.
3)
Page 252
Position the mouse pointer over a key display/label to display the
details of the label.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-17 V-Series Rotary Key Assignment
4)
To display the action menu for a key, position the pointer over the
label and right-click the mouse.
Figure 8-18 Rotary Key Properties Menu
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the rotary key. To set the key activation
type:
1)
Page 253
Right click over the required key to display the options menu and
then select the Activation item to display the activation options.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-19 Pushbutton Key Activation
Rotary key panels (1RU and 2RU) can support up to eight rotary key
expansion panels.
Destination listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
Local assignment
1)
Click on the Local Assignment entry to display the available
options for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key.
This allows you to limit the keys a panel operator can overwrite when locally
assigning keys by Fast Key Assign (V-Series only) or by Local Key Assignment
(on panels supporting this facility).
Interlock group
The EHX user can assign several keys on a panel into an interlock group and
restrict the group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one
time. This function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
To add a key to an interlocked group:
1)
From Panel select the desired panel.
2)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
Page 254
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Figure 8-20 Interlock Group Assignment
Rotary key panels (1RU and 2RU) can support up to eight rotary key expansion
panels (not pushbutton or lever key expansion panels).
7)
To add an expansion panel use the Advanced Settings options
under Cards and Ports.
8)
To display the expansion panel mimic open the right hand dropdown list (normally displaying Main Panel) to show the list of all
the expansion panels configured and select the required expansion
panel.
Figure 8-21 V-Series Rotary Key Expansion Panel
Labels are assigned to keys in the same way as main panels and the option
menu is available.
Key Groups
If key groups have been assigned in Configuration > Key Groups, you can
assign a key to one of the configured key groups.
Page 255
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off.
1)
Select and click on the required option. This performs the same
function as Latch Disable in the Local Advanced facility. It allows
or disallows a panel to latch a key to another device.
Level adjustment applies to
You can select whether the level adjustment applies to:
 Crosspoint
 Input
 Output
Go to key destination
1)
Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the editor screen
for the type of destination the key refers to. For example if the
destination is a panel then the panel is displayed on the Panels
screen. For a partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with
the partyline highlighted.
Delete key
1)
8.2.4
Click the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned
label (shown highlighted). Note that only the highlighted label is
deleted. The green listen label for that key is not deleted.
V-series panel options
This functionality is limited to the current configuration and label sets cannot
be transferred between configurations. The options for panel Save, Load,
Copy, Paste and Clear are provided on the panel configuration toolbar above
the panel mimic.
Figure 8-22 Panel Load Options
Page 256
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Page:Main
Click on Page:Main to display a list of pages for the panel as a drop-down list.
Click on the required page to update the mimic to the page.
Page Names
Click on Page Names to enter a name for each shift page.
Zoom
 Select Zoom to keys to display an enlarged view of the panel keys.
 Select Zoom to fit to display the whole panel on the screen.
Save
1)
Click on the Save button on the Panel Programming toolbar to
display the label file save dialogue.
Figure 8-23 Label File Save Dialogue
2)
Enter the name of the file which will default to the .ccl extension.
The keys from all pages are saved (including shift pages where
supported) but the keys from any expansion panels that may be
fitted are not saved in the file. Expansion panel labels must be
saved separately.
1)
Click on the Load button on the Panel Programming toolbar to
display the dialogue screen to select and open a panel label (.ccl)
file.
Load
Page 257
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-24 Label File Load Dialogue
2)
Select the required file and click on the Open button to load the
labels from the file. When a label load is performed all the labels on
a panel (including shift pages) and cleared before the new labels
are applied.
If the type of panel being loaded is no t the same as the type of panel the label
file was saved from this may result in labels being lost when the panel is
loaded.
Clear
Click on the Clear button on the Panel Programming toolbar to clear all the
labels from the current panel including shift pages but excluding any attached
expansion panels.
Copy
1)
Click on the Copy button on the Panel Programming toolbar to
copy the labels of the current panel page only into the scratch pad.
It does not copy labels from expansion panels.
Paste
1)
Click on the Paste button on the Panel Programming toolbar to
paste the labels copied to the scratch pad onto the currently
selected panel. All the labels currently on the page are lost. This
allows single pages of labels to be pasted on to the panel.
If the type of panel being pasted to is not the same as the type of panel the
labels were copied from this may result in labels being lost when the labels are
pasted onto the new panel.
Page 258
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Clear Page
Click on Clear Page to remove the keys on the currently selected page.
Audio mixer
1)
Click on the Audio Mixer button to display the audio mixer panel
that allows the levels of individual crosspoints to be adjusted
interactively. This facility can only be used with V-Series panels.
See 8 Panel programming for details of the Audio Mixer.
Identify panel
1)
Select the Identify Panel button on the panel programming
toolbar to cause the panel currently being edited to flash the panel
buttons or LEDs red and display IDENTIFYME in the bottom left
display. To use this facility, monitoring must be enabled using the
Monitor button on the EHX toolbar.
This facility is only available for V-Series panels. The Identify Panel button is
greyed out for other panel types.
8.3
Concert panel programming
A Concert panel is a virtual panel (or soft panel) that runs on a PC and
provides the same functionality as a normal hardware panel such as a V-Series
panel. Concert panels can connect to an Eclipse matrix via a Concert server.
Concert panel keys act as pushbuttons rather than lever keys and are operated
using a mouse or other pointing device. Concert panels do not support any
expansion panels.
The following section covers the programming of Concert panels.
1)
Select Panels from the Configuration menu to display the panel
options toolbar and select the panel from the drop-down list or the
> icons to step through the list of panels.
Figure 8-25 Concert Panel
2)
Page 259
To assign keys, drag items from the list of available sources and
destinations to the required key and drop them over the display
corresponding to the required key.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
As with V-Series pushbutton panels only one label can be assigned to a
key and key activation can be assigned.
3)
Position the mouse pointer over a key display/label to display the
details of the label.
Figure 8-26 Concert Panel Assignment
4)
Position the mouse pointer over the label and right-click the mouse
to display the action menu for a key.
Figure 8-27 Concert Panel Properties Menu
8.3.1
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the button. To set the key activation type:
1)
Page 260
Right click over the required key to display the options menu and
then select the Activation item to display the activation options.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-28 Concert Panel Key Activation
8.3.2
Destination listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
8.3.3
Local assignment
1)
Click the Local Assignment entry to display the available options
for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key.
This permits the system administrator to limit the keys a panel
operator can overwrite when locally assigning keys by Fast Key Assign
(V-Series only) or by Local Key Assignment (on panels supporting this
facility).
8.3.4
Interlock group
The EHX user can assign several keys on a panel into a selector group and
restrict the group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one
time. This function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
Page 261
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
To add a key to an interlocked group
1)
From Panel Programming, select the desired panel.
2)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Figure 8-29 Concert Interlock Group Assignment
8.3.5
Key Groups
If key groups have been assigned in Configuration > Key Groups, you can
assign a key to one of the configured key groups.
8.3.6
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off.
Page 262
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
Select and click on the required option. This performs the same
function as Latch Disable in the Local Advanced facility. It allows
or disallows a panel to latch a key to another device.
8.3.7
Level adjustment applies to
8.3.8
Go to key destination
1)
8.3.9
Delete key
1)
8.4
Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the editor screen
for the type of destination the key refers to. For example if the
destination is a panel then the panel is displayed on the Panels
screen. For a partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with
the partyline highlighted.
Click on the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned
label (shown highlighted). Note that only the highlighted label is
deleted. The green listen label for that key is not deleted.
Concert panel options
This functionality is limited to the current configuration and label sets cannot
be transferred between configurations. The options for panel Save, Load,
Copy, Paste and Clear are provided on the panel configuration toolbar above
the panel mimic.
Figure 8-30 Concert Panel Load Options
8.4.1
Page:Main
Click on Page:Main to display a list of pages for the panel as a drop-down list.
Click on the required page to update the mimic to the page.
Page 263
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.4.2
Page Names
Click on Page Names to enter a name for each shift page.
8.4.3
Zoom
 Select Zoom to keys to display an enlarged view of the panel keys.
Select Zoom to fit to display the whole panel on the screen.
8.4.4
Save
1)
Click Save on the Panel Programming toolbar to display the label
file save dialog.
Figure 8-31 Label File Save Dialog
2)
8.4.5
Enter the name of the file which will default to the .ccl extension.
The keys from all pages are saved (including shift pages where
supported).
Load
1)
Page 264
Click Load on the Panel Programming toolbar to display the dialog
for selecting and opening a panel label (.ccl) file.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-32 Label File Load Dialog
2)
Select the required file and click the Open button to load the labels
from the file. When a label load is performed all the labels on a
panel (including shift pages) and cleared before the new labels are
applied.
If the type of panel being loaded is not the same as the type of panel
the label file was saved from this may result in labels being lost when
the panel is loaded.
8.4.6
Clear
Click on the Clear button on the Panel Programming toolbar to clear all the
labels from the current panel including shift pages but excluding any attached
expansion panels.
8.4.7
Copy
1)
8.4.8
Select Copy on the Panel Programming toolbar to copy the labels
of the current panel page only into the scratch pad.
Paste
1)
Select Paste on the Panel Programming toolbar to paste the labels
copied to the scratch pad onto the currently selected panel. All the
labels currently on the page are lost. This allows single pages of
labels to be pasted on to the panel.
If the type of panel being pasted to is not the same as the type of
panel the labels were copied from this may result in labels being lost
when the labels are pasted onto the new panel.
Page 265
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.4.9
Clear Page
Click on Clear Page to remove the keys on the currently selected
page.
8.4.10 Identify panel
1)
Page 266
Select the Identify Panel button on the panel programming
toolbar to cause the panel currently being edited to flash the panel
buttons or LEDs red and display IDENTIFYME in the bottom left
display. This facility is only available for V-Series panels. The
Identify Panel button is greyed out for other panel types.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.5
I-Series programming
This section deals with programming I-Series main panels and expansions
panels which are programmed in exactly the same way. The V-Series panels
which may also be attached to I-Series panels as expansion panels are nonprogrammable.
8.5.1
Assigning labels
Figure 8-33 Label Assign Screen
To assign a label to a given selector
1)
Locate the mimic of the panel to programme by either using the
scroll arrows or the drop down list box from the middle area of the
screen.
2)
Keys are assigned in the normal way by clicking on the required
item in the list of available labels, and then dragging the item to
the required key and dropping them over the display corresponding
to the key and clicking on the mouse to confirm the assignment.
3)
Drag the mouse cursor up the screen into the mimic area and
position it over the required key.
4)
Repeat for all required Label programming.
Page 267
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.5.2
5)
To program a Talk and Listen key, press and hold the keyboard Ctrl
key and then select the Talk label and place that onto the panel.
6)
To program a Talk and Forced Listen key press and hold the
keyboard Alt key and then select the Talk label and place the label
onto the panel.
Re-assignment of labels
Figure 8-34 Reassign Labels Screen
To re-assign a label
1)
Select the required port and locate the label that is required to be
re-assigned.
2)
To select the new Label, place the mouse cursor over the label.
3)
Left click and hold down the mouse button.
4)
Whilst holding down the mouse button drag slightly down the
mouse until the label is free from the display.
5)
Position the Label over the new position and release the mouse
button to drop the label into the new position.
Page 268
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.5.3
I-Series label functions
Activation
The activation option allows the key type to be configured to determine how
the key behaves when activated via the pushbutton. To set the key activation
type:
1)
Right click over the required key to display the options menu and
then select the Activation item to display the activation options.
Figure 8-35 Key Assignment Menu
The activation options are: Talk, Listen, Talk and Listen, Talk and Forced Listen
or Dual Talk and Listen.
 Talk sets a talk from the I-Series panel to a destination with no
automatic listen to the destination.
 Listen sets a key to listen to the source without talking to the
destination at the same time. Use as a monitor key. Press the volume
level up/down buttons under the display to increase listen level.
 Talk and Listen sets a talk key with listen. Press the volume level
up/down buttons under the display to increase or mute the listen level.
 Talk and Forced Listen sets a talk key with permanently made listen.
Press the volume level up/down buttons under the display to increase
or mute the listen level.
 Dual talk and Listen sets a Dual talk and listen key. This makes the
pushbutton activate a Talk and Listen on a press and hold or latch a
Listen with a short press and release (less than 200ms) on the same
pushbutton.
Destination listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
Page 269
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Local assignment
1)
Select Local Assignment to display the available options for local
key assignment. The options are to allow local key assignment to
overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key assignment to
overwrite the selected key. This permits the system administrator
to limit the keys a panel operator can overwrite when locally
assigning keys by Fast Key Assign (V-Series only) or by Local Key
Assignment (on panels supporting this facility).
Interlock group
The EHX user can assign several keys on a panel into a selector group and
restrict the group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one
time. This function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
To add a key to an interlocked group
1)
From Panel Programming, select the desired panel.
2)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
3)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
4)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
5)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
6)
The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Page 270
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-36 I-Series Interlock Group Assignment
Key Groups
If key groups have been assigned in Configuration > Key Groups, you can
assign a key to one of the configured key groups.
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off.
1)
Select and click on the required option. This performs the same
function as Latch Disable in the Local Advanced facility. It allows
or disallows a panel to latch a key to another device.
Level adjustment applies to
You can determine whether the volume control adjusts the crosspoint, input or
output.
Go to key destination
1)
Select Go To Key Destination to display the editor screen for the
type of destination the key refers to. For example if the destination
is a panel then the panel is displayed on the Panels screen. For a
partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with the partyline
highlighted.
Delete key
1)
Page 271
Select Delete Key in the menu to delete the assigned label (shown
highlighted).
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.5.4
I-series advanced functions
The I-Series operates in one of four modes:
 COM mode is the default mode. In this mode the I-Series panel
operates as a simple panel. Talk labels are assigned to destinations,
and listen labels are assigned to sources.
 IFB mode allows the I-Series to assign a program audio source or
sources to an IFB Global destination. For example on-the-air audio can
be assigned to the talent or announcer in a television studio
application. It is called IFB mode because the program audio source
that is routed to the IFB destination can be interrupted by an incoming
intercom call to the IFB destination.
 PL mode allows the panel operator to add and delete members of a
partyline directly from the panel.
 FG mode allows the panel operator to add and remove members of a
fixed group directly from the panel.
For more details of how to use the I-Series advanced functions, see the ISeries Panels User Guide.
8.5.5
Using EHX to set up I-Series fixed group membership
options
A fixed group occurs when one source needs to call many destinations at one
time. The panel operator can add and remove members of a fixed group in real
time with the I-Series provided that the feature has been enabled in EHX.
To enable the feature in EHX
1)
Open the required map configuration in EHX.
2)
From Cards and Ports screen, select the required panel.
3)
Select Port Properties > AP Panel Options > Fixed Group
Assignment. Click the drop-down box to turn the feature on or off.

When the check box reads true the feature is on.

When the check box reads false the feature is off.
4)
From Panel Programming, select the panel to which the I-Series is
connected, and immediately below it, select the I-Series panel.
5)
Assign the fixed group source as a talk key o n the I-Series panel on
screen.
6)
Assign potential fixed group members as listen keys on the I-Series
panel on the screen.
Page 272
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
7)
From the Eclipse HX Downloads menu, click Apply and Reset.
EHX uploads the information to the I-Series panel.
8.5.6
Using EHX to Set up I-Series IFB options
After a program audio source has been attached to a matrix port, the EHX
operator can assign the audio source to an IFB destination with the I-Series
Assignment Panel in panel programming.
To assign an audio source to an IFB destinatio n
1)
In Cards and Ports select the I-Series panel.
Highlight the entire row when selecting the panel.
8.5.7
2)
Go to Port Properties > AP Panel Options > IFB assignment.
Select True (the box is checked).
3)
From Panel Programming, select the I-Series panel.
4)
Assign the IFB destination as a talk label.
5)
Assign the IFB source or sources as a listen label.
6)
Click Apply Label Changes from the Eclipse HX Download menu to
send information to the matrix.
Using EHX to set up I-Series partyline membership
options
The panel operator can add and remove members of a partyline in real time
with the I-Series provided this feature has been enabled in EHX.
To enable the feature in EHX:
1)
Open the required map configuration in EHX.
2)
From the Cards and Ports screen, select the desired panel.
The Advanced Settings screen opens.
3)
4)
Page 273
From Port Properties, select Partyline Assignment from I-Series AP
Panel Options. Click the drop-down box to turn the feature on or
off.

When the check box reads true the feature is on.

When the check box reads false the feature is off.
From Panel Programming select the I-Series panel.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
Assign the partyline as a talk key on the on screen I-Series panel.
6)
Assign potential partyline members as listen keys on the on screen
I-Series panel.
7)
From the Eclipse Downloads menu, click Apply and Reset.
EHX uploads the information to the I-Series panel.
8.6
I-Series panel options
This functionality is limited to the current configuration and label sets cannot
be transferred between configurations. The options for panel Save, Load, Copy,
Paste, Upload and Clear are provided on the panel configuration toolbar above
the panel mimic.
8.6.1
Page
1)
8.6.2
Select Page to display a list of pages for the panel as a drop-down
list. Click the required page to update the mimic to the page.
Save
1)
Select Save on the Panel Programming toolbar to display the label
file save dialog.
2)
Enter the name of the file which will default to the .ccl extension.
The keys from all pages are saved (including shift pages where
supported) but the keys from any expansion panels that may be
fitted are not saved in the file.
Expansion panel labels must be saved separately.
8.6.3
Load
1)
Select Load on the Panel Programming toolbar to display the dialog
for selecting and opening a panel label (.ccl) file.
2)
Select the required file and click Open to load the labels from the
file. When a label load is performed all the labels on a panel
(including shift pages) and cleared before the new labels are
applied.
If the type of panel being loaded is not the same as the type of panel
the label file was saved from this may result in labels being lost when
the panel is loaded.
Page 274
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.6.4
Copy
1)
8.6.5
Select Copy on the Panel Programming toolbar to copy the labels
of the current panel page only into the scratch pad. You cannot
copy labels from expansion panels.
Paste
1)
Select Paste on the Panel Programming toolbar to paste the labels
copied to the scratch pad onto the currently selected panel. All the
labels currently on the page are lost. This allows single pages of
labels to be pasted on to the panel.
If the type of panel being pasted to is not the same as the type of
panel the labels were copied from this may result in labels being lost
when the labels are pasted onto the new panel.
8.6.6
Clear
1)
8.6.7
Identify panel
1)
8.7
Select Clear on the Panel Programming toolbar to clear all the
labels from the current panel including shift pages but excluding
any attached expansion panels.
Selecting Identify Panel on the panel programming toolbar to
cause the panel currently being edited to flash the panel buttons or
LEDs red and display IDENTIFYME in the bottom left display. This
facility is only available for V-Series panels. The Identify Panel
button is greyed out for other panel types.
Fast key assign restrictions (I-series)
The I-Series Advanced Settings area, located on the rightmost side of Cards
and Ports offers three Soft Menu Restrictions:
 Dial Phone Mode Access
 Information Mode Access
 Key Assign Mode Access
By default the panel operator has access to these options from an I-Series, but
if the check box for any of these options is cleared, the panel operator cannot
access the menus from the I-Series front panel.
Page 275
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.8
Setting up assignment panel partyline
membership options
The panel operator can add and remove members of a partyline in real time
from an assignment panel provided this feature has been enabled for the panel
in EHX.
To enable this feature in EHX
1)
Open the required map configuration in EHX.
2)
From the Cards and Ports screen, select the desired panel.
3)
From Port Properties, select Partyline Assignment from AP Panel
Options. Click the drop-down box to turn the feature on or off.

When the check box reads true the feature is on.

When the check box reads false the feature is off.
4)
From Panels in the Configuration menu select the required panel
or the panel to which the AP22 is connected.
5)
Assign the partyline as a talk key on the on panel.
6)
Assign potential partyline members as listen keys on the on screen
panel.
7)
From the Eclipse HX Downloads menu, click Apply and Reset.
EHX uploads the information to the panel.
8.9
Setting up assignment panel fixed group
membership options
A fixed group occurs when one source needs to call many destinations at one
time. Members of a fixed group may be added or removed by the panel
operator in real time with the assignment panel provided this feature is
enabled for the panel in EHX. To enable the feature in EHX
1)
Open the required map configuration in EHX.
2)
From the Cards and ports screen, select the required panel.
3)
From Port Properties, select Fixed Group Assignment from AP Panel
Options. Click the drop-down box to turn the feature on or off.
Page 276

When the check box reads true the feature is on.

When the check box reads false the feature is off.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
From Panels in the Configuration menu select the required panel
or the panel to which the AP22 is connected. If the AP22 is to be
configured select the AP22 panel in the list of expansion panels to
the right of the main panel list.
5)
Assign the fixed group source as a talk key on the assignment
panel on screen.
6)
Assign potential fixed group members as listen keys on the
assignment panel on the screen.
7)
From the Eclipse HX Downloads menu, click Apply and Reset.
EHX uploads the information to the assignment panel.
8.9.1
Keep hidden keys active (I-series panels)
1)
In Advanced Settings for I-Series panels, select the Keep Hidden
Keys Active option. When this option is selected, audio paths from
an I-Series panel’s main page are maintained even when the panel
operator switches to the shift (swap) page.
2)
Clear the check box to turn off this option. If this option is disabled
the audio paths from the main page are cut when the panel
operator switches to the swap page.
This option is not selected by default.
8.10
General panel setups
8.10.1 Stacked keys
Stacked Keys functionality is the ability to add more than one Talk label to a
single selector of an intercom panel.
Figure 8-37 Stacked Keys Screen
8.10.2 Creating a stacked key
To create a stacked key:
Page 277
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
Open the Panel Programming screen.
2)
Select the panel where the stacked key is to be created
3)
Either programme a Talk label to the panel or identify a Talk label
that has already been programmed onto the panel.
4)
On the mimic of the panel, place the mouse cursor over the
required Talk label.
5)
Double click the Talk label.
6)
The Talk Label appears in the Stacked Key area (the bottom right
window).
7)
Drag the mouse cursor over to the Talk Labels window
8)
Click the required label
9)
In the Stacked Key window, select the Add Label button.
10) Repeat steps 7 to 9 for the required amount of Labels.
Figure 8-38 Stacked Key Label Order
The order of the labels on the stacked key runs from the last (bottom) key in
the list to the first (topmost) key in the list.
8.10.3 Removing labels from a stacked key
Figure 8-39 Remove Label from Stacked Key
Page 278
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
1)
Double click the Stacked Key on the mimic of the panel using the
left mouse button. The Stacked Key window displays all labels on
the stack.
2)
Click the label to be removed.
3)
Click the Remove Label context box to remove the label.
8.10.4 Palette options
You can customize the appearance of the Palette.
1)
Select Configure Palette. The Palette Options appear on the
upper left side of the screen. The following options are available:
2)
Sort By Port Number - sorts entities by port number.
3)
Sort By Label - sorts entities by label
4)
Group By Matrix - groups entities by matrix first, then by entity
type.
5)
Group By Type - groups entities by type first, then by matrix.
6)
Show Descriptions - shows the entity description.
7)
Show Port Numbers - shows the entity port number.
8)
Select or deselect each option, as required.
9)
Select Apply. You return to the Palette.
8.10.5 Key assignment
You can specify how entities are assigned to panel keys.
1)
Select Configure Palette. The Assign Keys options appear on the
lower left of the screen. The following options are available:
2)
On Double Click - double click an entity to assign it to the first
free key on the panel. To determine the assignment mode, see
8.10.6 Default assignment mode.
3)
On Right Click Menu - right click an entity to display a menu. The
menu displays the appropriate assignment types for the panel.
4)
On Keyboard Enter - When searching entities, press Enter to
assign the first search result to the first free key on the panel. To
Page 279
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
determine the assignment mode, see 8.10.6 Default assignment
mode. Select or deselect each option, as required.
5)
Select Apply. You return to the Palette.
8.10.6 Default assignment mode
This option determines the key type for entities that are assigned to panel keys
using:
 Select Unique Search Result
 Assign Keys on Double Click
 Assign Keys on Keyboard Enter
1)
Select Configure Palette.
2)
In the lower left of the screen, select the Default Assignment Mode
list.
3)
Select from the following options:
4)

Talk - sets a talk from the panel to a destination with no
automatic listen to the destination.

Listen - sets a key to listen to the source without talking to
the destination at the same time.

Talk and Listen - sets a talk key with listen.

Dual Talk and Listen - sets a dual talk and listen key (only on
pushbutton panel types). This make the pushbutton activate
a TALK on a press and hold and LISTEN with a short press on
the same pushbutton.

Forced Listen - sets a key with permanently made listen.

Talk and Forced Listen - sets a talk key with permanently
made listen.
Select Apply. You return to the Palette.
8.10.7 Select unique search result
This option automatically selects a search item, if that item is the only search
result.
1)
Select Configure Palette.
2)
Select or deselect the Select Unique Search Result option as
required. To determine the assignment mode, see 8.10.6 Default
assignment mode.
Page 280
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.10.8 Entity searching
It is possible to search the list of entities using the Search box at the top left of
the Palette. Use an asterisk (*) to denote a wild character.
8.10.9 Entity filtering
It is possible to select which entities appear in Panel Programming Screen. To
do so:
1)
Select Configure Palette from the top of the Palette.
Figure 8-40 Entity filtering
2)
From the middle of the screen, deselect any entity types or
matrices that you do not wish to appear in the palette.
Select the red checkmark in the top right of the screen to clear the entity
filters.
3)
8.10.10
Select Apply to return to the Palette.
Quick filtering
It is also possible to access the entity filters by using the Quick Filters option.
To do so:
1)
Select Entity Types from the top of the palette. The filters appear
as a row at the top of the Palette.
2)
Click on any filter to select it.
You can select more than one entity filter by pressing the Control key and then
selecting the entities.
3)
Page 281
Select Matrices from the top of the palette. The matrices appear
as a row at the top of the palette.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
Click on any matrix to select it.
You can select more than one matrix by pressing the Control key and then
selecting the matrices.
8.11
Agent IC Mobile Client
The following section covers the programming of the Mobile Client panel.
8.11.1 Mobile Client panels
1)
Select Panels from the Configuration menu to display the panel
options toolbar and select the Mobile Client from the drop-down list
or the > icons to step through the list of panels.
Figure 8-41 Mobile Client Panel
Note: The number of keys displayed on the Mobile Client screen depends on
the target device that the Mobile Client is installed on.
2)
To assign keys, click on the required item in the list of available
labels, and then drag the items to the required key and drop them
over the display corresponding to the key. Click on the mouse to
confirm the assignment.
3)
To display the action menu for a key, position the pointer over the
label and right-click the mouse.
Page 282
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-42 Key Properties Menu
Destination listen
Note: This option is only available for IFB keys.
This option enables the listen key to feed all the audio that is routed to the IFB
to the panel user. If there are multiple IFB destinations, the audio routed to
the listener is the sum of all the audio heard at the destination ports.
Local assignment
4)
Click the Local Assignment entry to display the available options
for local key assignment. The options are to allow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key or to disallow local key
assignment to overwrite the selected key. This allows you to limit
the keys a panel operator can overwrite when locally assigning
keys by Fast Key Assign (V-Series only) or by Local Key
Assignment (on panels supporting this facility).
Interlock group
You can assign several keys on a panel into an interlock group and restrict the
group so that only one key of the group can be activate at any one time. This
function only refers to talk paths.
For example if a panel had five keys programmed to talk to cameras 1 to 5
then by setting these into an interlocked group only one camera key can be
selected at a time.
There are nine available interlocked groups to which the EHX user can assign
any or all panel keys.
The interlock groups are specific to the panel they are programmed for and do
not affect interlock groups that may be set up on any other panel in the
system.
To add a key to an interlocked group:
Page 283
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
From Panel Programming, select the desired panel.
6)
Right click on the desired key to display the key options list.
7)
Select the Interlock Group entry to display the interlock group
options list.
8)
Select the required interlock group or None if the key is not to be
in any interlock group.
9)
The key may be added to other interlock groups as required.
10) The key interlock groups are displayed in the key information
popup.
Figure 8-43 Interlock Group Assignment
Local advanced latch disable
When the mouse pointer is over this entry a second menu is displayed giving
the options to set Local Advanced Latch Disable to On or Off. Select and click
on the required option. This performs the same function as Latch Disable in
the Local Advanced facility. It allows or disallows a panel to latch a key to
another device.
Go to key destination
11) Click the Go To Key Destination entry to display the editor screen
for the type of destination the key refers to. For example if the
destination is a panel then the panel is displayed on the Panels
screen. For a partyline key the Partylines editor is displayed with
the partyline highlighted.
Page 284
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Delete key
12) Click the Delete Key entry in the menu to delete the assigned
label (shown highlighted).
Only the highlighted label is deleted. The green listen label for that key is not
deleted.
8.12
Local advanced
The Local Advanced screen sets functions that determine how every panel and
interface in the system interacts with each other at the device level. For
example IFB levels can be set for every individual device or Forced Listen can
be enabled or disabled between any two specific system devices. To open the
Local Advanced Screen:
1)
Select the Local Advanced entry in the Configuration menu.
The configured devices are displayed to form a grid with each square
displaying the attributes set for interactions between the devices as a colored
dot or empty if the attributes are not set. Tabs on the toolbar allow the specific
attributes to be selected. Positioning the mouse pointer over a square displays
a tooltip indicating the current status.
A key to the meaning of the colored dots that indicate status is shown in the
top left hand corner of the Local Advanced screen. The Sources are listed down
the left hand side and the Destinations are listed across the top.
Figure 8-44 Local Advanced Functions
Page 285
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The type of source/destination is denoted by the color of the entry. These are:
 Grey - IFB
 Pink - Panel
 Yellow - Partyline
 Purple - Interface (Direct, FOR-22, Telephone, TEL-14, CCI-22)
 Blue - Fixed Group
 Green - Control
Note: IFBs are displayed on the Forced Listen tab.
The tabs allow the grid to be displayed for the various properties of the
connections (such as Forced Listen, Latch Disable and so on).
2)
Select one of the tabs to display a grid with sources and
destinations which may have this property and the status of any
connection between them. For example, selecting the Blocked
Listen tab only displays panels and interfaces to which this
property can apply. Where the property is enabled a colored dot is
displayed in the square: red for local property assignment, black
for global property assignment.
You can filter the items along the top by name using the text filter boxes on
the right hand side of the EHX Control Bar. There is a separate Source and
Destination filter box.
Text Filter Box
Filter
On
Filter
Off
Figure 8-45 Source Filter
3)
Page 286
Enter the text to filter by and click on the filter icon to the right of
the filter box left filter icon). Only the destinations with names
containing the filter text are displayed on the top row. The sources
are not filtered. To turn off filtering click on the rightmost of the
two filter icons.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-46 Multiple Select Display
4)
By holding down the Control key whilst selecting the tabs, you can
select multiple tabs. In this case any squares representing
connections are colored red if any of the select properties are set.
Only local settings are displayed when multiple tabs are selected. Global
settings are not shown.
When the mouse pointer is positioned over one of the squares of the
grid a tooltip gives details of the connection.
By not touching the mouse the tooltip remains on the screen.
Page 287
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-47 Local Advanced Information Display
1)
Place the pointer over the square that intersects the required
source and destination.
The tooltip displays the current properties.
2)
Click the square. The square turns blue and the source and
destination label backgrounds changes to white.
3)
To set or clear the current property (for example, Latch Disable)
right-click the mouse to display the On/Off options.
4)
Use the pointer to select the required state and right-click or leftclick on it to select it.
A red dot is displayed in the square if the function has been enabled in
local mode.
Note: By holding down the Control key when assigning connection properties
it is possible to move from square to square and make multiple
selections with a single mouse click. If the Shift key is held down a
block of connections can be assigned by clicking on limits of the
required block selecting all the points between the limits. This allows
large numbers of connections to be set very quickly.
Page 288
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 8-48 Local Advanced with a Property Selected
The following is a description of each option. Every option does not appear for
every combination of source and destination.
The possible options are described below.
8.12.1 Forced listen
A forced listen is a permanently enabled audio path between a source and a
destination that can only be interrupted by ISO calls. It does not have any
association with a selector key.
On the forced listen tab, if the destination is an IFB the source is assigned as
an IFB source to the IFB rather than creating a forced listen. A pink dot
signifies this, and corresponding dots are shown for any IFB destinations that
are assigned to the IFB.
Note: This is not an online function, an Apply Changes is required to push
these changes to the Matrix.
If panel eavesdropping is disabled for a panel, the forced listen is not effective
until the panel has at least one talk path set. Panel eavesdropping is enabled
from the Advanced Settings screen of Cards and Ports for the source port.
Forced listen audio is routed from the label on the left to the label on the top.
8.12.2 Blocked listen
If a listen is blocked between two ports then an audio path from the source to
that destination cannot be set under any circumstances. This is primarily used
Page 289
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
as a safety feature. For example, to prevent one studio’s program feed from
being accidentally routed to a destination in another studio.
8.12.3 Local latch disable
This function prevents talks to any label from latching. If a latch-disabled label
is assigned to a selector key, the key can only access the label for as long as
the operator physically holds down the key. A latch-disabled port’s label can be
included in a fixed group or partyline without automatically latch disabling the
entire fixed group or partyline.
8.12.4 Local ISO
This function enables a panel or interface as a local ISO destination of the
source panel or interface. When the source activates a talk to any of its local
ISO destinations, that talk is a private, two -way path. All other talk paths from
the source are interrupted. All existing talk and listen paths between the
source and the destination are interrupted, except for other ISO talk paths.
When the source terminates the talk, the destination’s audio paths resume;
when all ISO paths to the destination are deactivated, the destination’s audio
paths return to their previous states. If more than one panel activates an ISO
path to the destination, both sources can talk and listen to the destination. For
ISO talks to also interrupt listens at the source, check the ISO Interrupts All
Other Listens box in the Matrix Preferences ISO and IFB tab.
Note: If the destination of an ISO is a panel then Eavesdropping must be
enabled in Global Settings (Advanced Settings section) in order to
activate the panel microphone if it is not already activated. If the
destination is not a panel but a device such as a four-wire port
Eavesdropping does not need to be enabled for the destination device.
8.12.5 Route monitor
Enable monitoring of an audio route. This creates a key that is available for
assignment from Panel Programming. When the key is pressed, audio from
the required crosspoint is routed to the panel with the key.
This allows panel C to monitor audio between ports A and B when Route
Monitoring between A and B is enabled.
8.12.6 Mute relay
This function enables a specific interface label to activate the source panel’s
mute relay when the talk key for that interface is activated. The mute relay is a
general purpose relay whose contacts are connected to the Miscellaneous DB23 connector on the panel’s rear panel. It is commonly used to mute a control
room monitor speaker, but it can also be put to other uses, such as turning on
a light or unlocking a door.
Note: The Mute Relay function is not available if you configure the V-Series
panel with a second additional sub-channel that has function Two-Way
Radio, Partyline or HelixNet. See 5.44 Adding an IVC-32 card.
Page 290
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
8.12.7 Preset talk
This option enables setting preset talk paths from this port to any other
destination in either the local or a remote system.
Preset talks are similar to routes, except they can be configured to activate
only when a call signal is received at this port from an external device, such as
a radio or telephone or external partyline (CCI-22) or IFB.
8.12.8 Preset listen
This options enables setting preset listen paths from this port to any other
destination in either the local or a remote system. Preset listens are similar to
routes, except they can be configured to activate only when a call signal is
received at this port from an external device, such as a radio, telephone or
IFB.
8.12.9 Preset call
Preset Call is used to send a call signal to a group or a port on either the local
system or a remote system.
A panel receives the call as an incoming call tally but without the audio. If
Audible Alerts is set for the panel, then the panel receives three beeps at either
its loud speaker or headset speaker.
If the source interface is a TEL-14 telephone module, and Auto Answer is set to
off, then the call signal is repeated every time a ring signal is received.
If the destination is a CCI-22 or FOR-22 module, the output is driven high
during the call signal.
8.12.10
Call signal to a TEL-14
To enable an audible warning when a call is made from an external telephone
to the TEL-14 module, set Local Advanced > Preset Call.
Call signal tones must also be enabled at the destination panel in the Cards
and Ports screen.
While the phone is ringing, a call signal is sent to the panel. Call signal tones
are sent to the panel every time a pulse is received from the TEL-14. The label
for the TEL-14 port is placed in the Answerback stack of the panel, and an
incoming call tally is displayed on both the Reply key and any configured key
to that port.
8.12.11
Nearby panels
This function is used to prevent audio feedback (howlround) between panels
located physically nearby each other. When enabled, audio from the source
panel is prevented from reaching the destination panel, and signalization is
also suppressed. The advanced setting Nearby Panel Partial in Cards and
Ports can be used to route audio from nearby panels to the headset rather
than suppressing it.
Page 291
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Page 292
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
9
Audio Mixer
9.1
Introduction to Audio Mixer
The Audio Mixer facility is accessed from panel programming and is only
available for V-Series panels. The Audio Mixer allows the audio input, output
and crosspoint levels for the panel to be set by the use of the panel controls
(main and auxiliary volume controls) or via the panel software. The audio
mixer also allows audio input levels to be modified by means of threshold
levels and compressors and for frequency based noise reduction filters to be
applied. Crosspoints which are attached to IFB controls can also have the IFB
dim levels set by the audio mixer.
The layout of the audio mixer is determined by the panel interface selected.
For some types of interface such as the D25 connector more options are
available than with the basic RJ45 interface.
When the pointer is moved over the panel, tooltips are displayed whenever it is
over an active item such as a button on the toolbar, a filter setting or a
crosspoint. The tooltip displays the current setting of any audio processing
element.
9.2
Audio Mixer panel
The audio mixer panel is divided into three functional areas, Input, Crosspoint
and Output. Each area has separate controls that function independently of
controls in other areas. For example the controls in the input area act on the
input audio stream before it passes to the crosspoints.
The audio mixer areas are shown in Figure 9-1 Audio Mixer Panel below.
Page 293
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 9-1 Audio Mixer Panel
The audio mixer toolbar provides facilities to apply, save or configure the audio
mixer.
9.2.1
Save to EHX configuration and exit
1)
Click on this button to save the audio mixer setup to the current
EHX configuration. When in Online mode clicking on this button
also saves the audio mixer settings into the current EHX
configuration. After the setup has been saved the audio mixer
automatically exits back to panel programming.
Online Mode
2)
Click on this button to allow audio mixer settings to be sent to the
panel immediately without the need to save to the configuration
and download a new map.
When the Online button is pressed it flashes amber/green and the mixer pane
background changes to amber while EHX contacts the matrix and uploads the
current audio settings for the selected panel. If the button and audio mixer
pane background remain amber (see Figure 9-2 Online Mode Waiting for Reply
below) this indicates that EHX was unable to obtain the current panel audio
settings from the matrix (the panel may not be connected to the matrix).
It may take a few seconds for EHX to obtain the panel details from the matrix.
Page 294
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 9-2 Online Mode Waiting for Reply
When the settings have been loaded the button and audio mixer pane
background turns green to indicate that the settings may be adjusted (see
Figure 9-3 Online Mode Connected and Ready ).
Figure 9-3 Online Mode Connected and Ready
Whenever a setting is changed in Online mode it is sent to the matrix to be
applied to the panel and a confirmation is returned. While EHX is waiting for
confirmation that the change has been applied the online button changes to
amber and then to green when confirmation is received.
9.2.2
Restore to default values
1)
Page 295
Click on this button to reset all the mixer settings for the current
layout to their default values. The user is asked to confirm the
request. Click on Yes to replace the current settings with the
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
default settings or No to cancel the action. This option can also be
used when in online mode.
9.2.3
Save to file
1)
9.2.4
Load from file
1)
9.2.5
Click on this button to save the audio mixer settings to a file. The
file save dialogue requests a file name. If no filename extension is
given it defaults to .amc. This feature is available when in online
mode.
Click on this button to load audio mixer settings from a file
previously created by the file save function. If this function is used
in online mode the settings in the file is sent straight to the panel.
Layout settings
1)
Click on this button to display a drop-down menu of layout options.
These options configure the audio mixer for V-Series panels that
have their audio connected in different ways such as the Matrix
port, the 25-way D-type auxiliary audio and the AES3 interface.
The layout cannot be changed while in online mode.
Layout basic settings
This configures the audio mixer for the panel when using the RJ-45 analogue
matrix connection.
Layout basic settings using D25
This configures the audio mixer for use with the analogue RJ-45 and auxiliary
audio connectors.
Layout binaural coax/AES
This configures the audio mixer for use with the AES3 digital option card. The
AES3 option card has both RJ-45 and coax connectors and auto-detects which
is in use. This option applies regardless of which connection on the AES3 card
is used.
Layout binaural coax/AES using D25
This configures the audio mixer for use with the AES3 digital option card and
the auxiliary audio connector. The AES3 option card has both RJ-45 and coax
connectors and auto-detects which is in use. This option applies regardless of
which connection on the AES3 card is used.
Page 296
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
IP Basic
This configures the audio mixer for use with the Ethernet connector.
IP One Sub-Channel
This configures the audio mixer for use with one additional IP channel.
IP Two Sub-Channels
This configures the audio mixer for use with two additional IP channels.
IP with Binaural
This configures the audio mixer for use with binaural.
9.2.6
Input area
This area contains a list of all the available audio sources and five columns for
processes that can be applied to the audio before it is sent to the crosspoint
audio mixers. Any processing applied at this point affects the audio supplied to
all the downstream mixing.
Audio inputs
The first column in the input area lists all the inputs that may be available in
the configuration. All of the possible inputs are listed below but some inputs
may not be available depending on which input/output interface options have
been selected.
HS1 Mic GN
This input takes audio from the headset1 microphone or gooseneck
microphone.
HS2 Mic
This input takes audio from the headset2 microphone.
Matrix1
This input takes mono audio from the analogue matrix connection if the Basic
Layout is being used or one channel of stereo audio from the AES3 digital
option card if this is fitted.
Matrix2
This input takes a second channel of stereo audio from the AES3 digital option
card. This input is only available if the AES3 digital option is fitted.
Ext0
This is the port labelled as Matrix (Analogue) and can be used as a local
analogue port when in IP mode
Ext1
This input uses the External Input 1 on the auxiliary audio connector.
Page 297
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Ext2
This input uses the External Input 2 on the auxiliary audio connector.
Listen again
This input uses audio from the listen again facility.
Filter
The filter column shows a graphic representing the type of audio filtering that
is being applied to the audio inputs. The graphic represents the frequency
profile of the input filters.
Output area
The top row of the output area lists all the outputs that may be available in the
configuration. All of the possible outputs are listed below but some outputs
may not be available in specific configurations.
Main LS
This outputs audio to the main panel loudspeaker.
Aux o/p
This outputs audio to the auxiliary loudspeaker via the auxiliary audio
connector.
Matrix1
This output sends either mono audio to the matrix via the analogue matrix
connection or one channel of stereo audio to the matrix via the AES3 digital
connection.
Matrix2
This output sends one channel of stereo audio to the matrix via the AES3
digital matrix connection. It is also present if there are additional IP channels
configured on an IP-enabled V-Series panel.
Matrix3
This is present if there are an additional 2 IP channels configured on an IPenabled V-Series panel.
HS1L
This output sends audio to the main panel headset left ear.
HS1R
This output sends audio to the main panel headset right ear.
HS2L
This output sends audio to the second headset left ear via the auxiliary audio
connector.
HS2R
Page 298
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
This output sends audio to the second headset right ear via the auxiliary audio
connector.
Ext1
This sends audio output to the first external output via the auxiliary audio
connector.
Ext2
This sends audio output to the second external output via the auxiliary audio
connector.
Hot Mic
This sends audio output to the hot mic output via the auxiliary audio
connector.
Voicerec
This output sends audio to the Listen Again voice recording facility.
Filter settings
The filters are applied to input audio streams to remove extraneous noise from
the audio before it is sent to the mixer. There are two types of filter; the Low
Pass filter and the High Pass filter.
The Low Pass filter passes low frequencies and is used to remove high
frequency noise such as wind noise while the High Pass filter passes high
frequencies and is used to remove low frequency noise such as machinery.
Each filter has four possible settings: off, filter 1, filter 2 and filter 3.
 Off - no noise filtering is done.
 Filter 1 - uses the first noise filtering algorithm.
 Filter 2 - uses the second noise filtering algorithm.
 Filter 3 - uses the third noise filtering algorithm
The frequency filters have the following effects:
High Pass 1 - reduces audio volume below 120Hz.
High Pass 2 - reduces audio volume below 250Hz
High Pass 3 - reduces audio volume below 500Hz
Low Pass 1 - reduces audio volume above 8KHz
Low Pass 2 - reduces audio volume above12KHz
Low Pass 3 - reduces audio volume above 15KHz
The filter configuration is shown using a graphic of the frequency against level.
Page 299
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 9-4 Audio Mixer Filter Settings
If the mouse pointer is placed over the filter graphic a tooltip is displayed
giving additional information on the filter settings.
Limiter/threshold/compressor
These settings are all linked together and provide a facility for controlling the
overall level of the input audio. The settings allow the audio level to be limited
to a maximum and audio above a threshold level to be modified as it
approaches the maximum permissible level.
Figure 9-5 Audio Level Compression
Limiter
This sets the maximum audio level on the input that is passed to further stages
of the audio mixer. The limiter settings are:

Page 300
Off
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 -6dB
 -8db
Threshold
The threshold setting determines the level at which audio compression starts.
When the audio input level passes the threshold it begins to be compressed so
that the output level from the compressor approaches the audio limit more
slowly as the audio input level rises. The threshold settings are:

Off
 -10dB
 -20dB
Compressor
The audio compressor reduces the audio level by compressing it whenever the
audio level exceeds the threshold. This has the effect of allowing the audio
level to rise but reducing it by a fixed ratio. The compressor settings are:
 Off
 Compression 5:1
 Compression 3:1
For example, if the compressor is set to 5:1 with a threshold of -10dB this has
the effect that for every 5dB increase in the input level above the threshold of
-10dB the compressor outputs only 1dB of increase. Thus if the input audio is
20dB above the threshold the output from the compressor only show s an
increase of 4dB. If the limiter was set to +6dB then a 20dB increase would
normally exceed the limiter (-10dB + 20dB = 10dB) so the audio level would
be cut off at +6dB. With the compressor the audio level would not reach the
limit so the audio would still rise to mimic the input (-10dB + 4dB = -6dB).
Figure 9-6 Audio Compression
Page 301
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Input trim
The input trim sets the amount by which the output from the filter and
compressor is modified before it is fed to the audio crosspoints. It is displayed
as a color coded dial indicating the trim action. To set the trim right click over
the dial to display the list of preset trim levels.
Figure 9-7 Input Trim
If the dial is colored blue then no trim (0dB) is being applied. If the dial is
green then a negative trim is being applied to reduce the audio level. If the dial
is red then a positive trim is being applied to increase the audio level.
Page 302
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
9.2.7
Crosspoints
The crosspoint area of the audio mixer displays all the crosspoints available for
the current configuration and the status of the crosspoint.
Each crosspoint allows individual setting of the input and output audio between
the audio source in the input section and the Asia destination in the output
section. Each crosspoint is displayed as a dial with color coding to show the
status of the crosspoint. The color codes are:
 Grey - crosspoint is muted so no audio passes through the crosspoint.
 Blue - audio level gain is set to 0dB or controlled by a volume knob.
 Green - audio level is reduced in the crosspoint (gain level is negative
for example, -3dB).
 Red - audio level is increased in the crosspo int (gain level is positive for
example, +3dB).
 Blank - no crosspoint.
The center of the dial is also color coded when appropriate to indicate whether
the audio level is being controlled by software only or by the panel volume
controls. The settings are:
No colored center - audio levels are set in software only.
White center - audio level is set by main volume control knob.
Mauve center - audio level is set by auxiliary volume control knob.
Figure 9-8 Audio Mixer Crosspoint
Right clicking on a crosspoint dial displays a list of options for setting the
crosspoint.
Page 303
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 9-9 Crosspoint Settings
If an additional yellow ring is displayed on the crosspoint dial this indicates that
the crosspoint is also used by an IFB. If the IFB is activated the audio output
from the crosspoint mixer is reduced (dimmed) by the specified amount.
Figure 9-10 Crosspoint with IFB
The colored segment in the outer dial indicates the dim setting for the IFB (the
amount by which the source audio is dimmed when the IFB control is
activated). This is set by right-clicking on the dial and selecting the required
IFB level. The IFB is activated using a control set up in Control Manager.
Page 304
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 9-11 Setting IFB Dim on Crosspoint
The level settings from +12dB to -30dB represent the levels set for audio
through the crosspoint and Mute stops all audio through the crosspoint. Below
this are the IFB dim levels from 0dB to -30dB and Mute (IFB completely
interrupts audio feed).
Setting Up V-series panel audio mixing IFBs in imported configurations
When a EHX 4.2 map is imported the IFB control information V-Series panels is
lost due to changes in the way the configuration data is organized. To restore
the IFBs and restore the control information:
1)
Open Panel Programming from the Configuration menu.
2)
Select the V-Series panel that the IFB control was originally
attached to.
3)
Open the audio mixer.
4)
Use the audio mixer to set the IFB dimming for EXT1 and EXT2
crosspoints as required. This action creates Panel IFB relays IFB1
and IFB2 for that panel.
Page 305
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
Close the audio mixer.
6)
Open the Control Manager.
7)
Select the Panel IFB relays tab. The available IFBs are displayed.
8)
Select a control or create a new control.
9)
Use the control manager to attach the IFB to the control.
10) Close the control manager.
11) In panel programming the control is now available under the
Controls tab to be assigned to a key on the panel in the normal
way.
9.2.8
Output area
The output area contains trim controllers for individual outputs displayed as
dials. When these are set whatever audio is being sent to the output is
changed by the specified amount. As before right clicking the dial displays the
audio settings available for that output. The dials are color coded to indicate
the trim applied as described for the crosspoint.
Figure 9-12 Output Settings
Page 306
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
10
Online mode
10.1
Introduction to Online mode
Online mode is a mode that allows changes to be made to the configuration of
a live system without the need to download a new configuration. The new
configuration is held in the matrix and even if the matrix is reset the modified
configuration is preserved rather than defaulting back to the original
configuration map.
The changes are not automatically added to the system configuration
controlled by EHX until the modified configuration is saved either by clicking on
the Save’ button in the File menu on exiting Online mode, by downloading a
map to the matrix or by exiting EHX and selecting Yes to save the
configuration.
Online mode allows:
 The labels on a key (including beltpacks) to be added, deleted or
moved in Panel Programming.
 Forced Listen and Blocked Listens to be updated in Local Advanced.
The functions which can be used in Online mode are indicated by green colorcoding of the menu entries and button text.
However there is an important limitation when using Online mode on linked
systems. If a label refers to a source or destination on a remote matrix (a
matrix linked to the current matrix) it cannot be assigned in Online mode
unless it is already present in the current map being modified. In order for
such a label to be present in a configuration it must have been assigned at
least once and then downloaded as part of a map.
In this way it is recognized by the matrix if it is assigned in Online mode. Local
sources and destinations (on the current matrix) can be assigned for the first
time in Online mode provided they have already been set up in the current
map. For example a local Party Line cannot be created in Online mode but it
can be assigned to a key for the first time in Online mode.
If a remote source or destination is assigned to a key for the first time in
Online mode the label is initially displayed in the panel mimic and then
disappear because the matrix rejects the assignment request. Further
information on this limitation is given later in this chapter.
Online mode operates in a completely live mode so that as soon as a change is
made in EHX the configuration in the matrix is updated. If a label on a key is
changed for example, the panel affected is updated without any further user
intervention.
EHX is notified of any changes that are made online, as a consequence of this,
if EHX running on any other PC which is also configuring the same matrix and
in Online mode it is also updated with the changes. Therefore it is possible for
Page 307
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
more than one EHX to be editing a configuration with each change being
displayed on all the copies of EHX connected and in Online mode. However this
mode of operation is not recommended due to the risk of the different copies
of the configuration diverging later if one of the instances of EHX ceases to be
online.
Figure 10-1 Online Update Sequence
10.2
Entering online mode
1)
Select the Online link in the System menu to open a drop-down
menu of online mode options.
Figure 10-2 Online Mode Options
The online modes have the following effects:
 No Merge - go online without merging the current EHX configuration
with the current matrix configuration.
 Merge Down - merge the current EHX configuration down to the
matrix; the EHX configuration takes precedence.
 Merge Up - merge the current matrix configuration up to EHX. The
matrix configuration takes precedence.
 Visual Merge - merge the configurations and offer the operator the
option to decide which configuration takes precedence in the event of a
conflict.
Page 308
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
If the name of the configuration on the matrix is different to the configuration
currently open in EHX Online mode displays an error message.
The user may continue with the operation by clicking on the Yes button but it
is generally not advisable. If the user does continue with the operation further
errors may be reported.
EHX then compares the matrix configuration with the current EHX
configuration. If inconsistencies are found between the current configuration in
EHX and the information from the matrix informatory messages are displayed.
EHX displays any differences between the current configuration open in EHX
and the information from the matrix. For example, if a key is present on a
panel in the EHX configuration but not in the matrix configuration then it be
reported as a difference.
The same approach applies to forced and blocked listens.
Beltpacks and panels attached to the matrix that are offline or disconnected
are not considered when EHX is checking for differences between the matrix
configuration and the EHX configuration.
The user is given the following options if the configurations cannot be merged:
 Upload On Matrix into EHX - overwrite the configuration in EHX with
the current matrix configuration.
 Download In EHX to matrix - overwrite the configuration in the matrix
with the current EHX configuration.
 Export - export the Online mode error report as a text file for analysis.
 Cancel - Cancel the Online operation and exit Online mode.
A number of conditions can cause the online merge to report errors. The most
common conditions are:
 Panels present in the EHX configuration but not in the matrix
configuration.
 Panels present on the matrix but not in the EHX configuration.
 Panels with locally assigned keys that are different to the keys set up in
the EHX configuration.
In general merge errors arise when there are mismatches in the configuration
through offline assignments in EHX or online assignments through a panel. The
online error report that can be exported from EHX should be used to resolve
conflicts if it is not desirable to overwrite either the EHX configuration or the
matrix configuration.
If the matrix configuration appears to merge without errors being reported but
there are apparent changes in areas such as panel programming the user
should check whether the map in EHX has been imported but not downloaded
before entering Online mode.
Page 309
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Once the configurations have been synchronized the background on the menu
pane turns green and online editing of panel setups may be carried out. The
Online button now displays Go Offline.
10.3
Using online mode
In the example below keys are assigned to a panel in Online mode to take
immediate effect.
Figure 10-3 Panel Programming Display with Online Active
If the keys are changed on this panel the changes are sent to the matrix and
then on to the panel. The matrix returns a confirmation to EHX that the panel
has been updated.
Forced and blocked listens on crosspoints in Local Advanced can also be set or
cleared using Online mode. It should be noted that the Forced Listens shown in
Local Advanced can be IFB sources.
As with panel labels these changes take immediate effect.
Page 310
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 10-4 Local Advanced Display with Online Active
10.4
Online limitations
Online mode provides much of the functionality of Panel Programming but it
cannot be used to create new entities. This must be done in EHX. Specifically
Online mode cannot:
 Create or edit a Party Line.
 Create or edit a Fixed Group.
 Create or edit a Control.
 Create a Talk and Forced Listen key.
 Create the first remote key to a Fixed Group.
 Create the first remote key to a Party Line.
 Create the first remote key to a Control.
 Create a stacked key.
 Create or edit an IFB.
Also, as noted previously Online cannot assign a label that refers to a remote
system unless it is already present in the current map. In order for such a label
Page 311
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
to be present in a configuration it must have been assigned at least once and
then downloaded as part of a map. In this way it is recognized by the matrix if
it is assigned in Online mode.
10.5
Exiting online mode
1)
To exit Online mode, click Go Offline.
The background color of the menu pane returns to gray. The button
text changes to Go Online.
At this point the configuration on EHX and on the matrix should be
synchronized but the configuration is not saved in the database at this point.
The configuration on the matrix is preserved in non-volatile memory in the
event of a power failure but it is lost if a new configuration is downloaded.
Therefore it is highly recommended that after a configuration is updated in
Online mode it should be saved in EHX either to the current project or as a
new project to ensure that the changes are preserved.
Online mode can also be ended as a result of other actions that force EHX out
of this online mode.
Possible actions include:
 Changing to a different configuration while online. This action causes
EHX to drop the connection to the matrix.
 Closing the current project without exiting online mode first.
 Selecting Apply Changes to download a new map to the matrix.
 A physical reset of the matrix. In this case as well as dropping online
mode the background of the menu pane turns red to indicate that the
connection to the matrix has been lost.
 Loss of the Ethernet connection to the matrix. As with a reset the menu
pane background changes to red to indicate that the connection has
been lost.
Page 312
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11
Networking
11.1
Network system configuration
Using the layout pane, the EHX operator can create, delete, or edit matrices for
a particular matrix system. From this screen the EHX operator can also allocate
configurations to Eclipse HX matrices, clear configurations and upload active
current configurations.
The layout screen also allows the management of Intelligent Linking Trunks.
This is explained in 11.2 Intelligent linking (trunking).
11.1.1 Configuration passwords
Individual configurations can be password protected to prevent unintended or
unauthorized changes to be made or the configuration to be downloaded to a
matrix.
1)
To set the password on the current configuration select the matrix
on the layout pane, and open the Configuration Manager.
Figure 11-1 Opening the Configuration Manager
When the Configuration Manager is open the properties of any of the available
configurations (on that matrix) can be viewed and edited.
Page 313
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 11-2 Configuration Properties Dialog
2)
To set or change the password for a configuration type the
password into the Password field and then retype in the Confirm
password field. Then click on the Update Details to add the
password to the configuration. The configuration must be saved
and closed before the password becomes operative.
EHX users with Admin rights can always open a configuration regardless of
whether a password has been set and reset the password if required. If an EHX
user without Admin rights opens a password protected configuration they are
asked for the password.
Figure 11-3 Configuration Password Entry
The correct password must be entered to open the configuration. Once the
configuration has been opened by an EHX user with User rights that user may
then change or remove the password.
The configuration password may be removed by opening the configuration
properties and clearing both the Password and Confirm password fields and
then saving the configuration. The next time the configuration is opened it is
no longer password protected.
11.1.2 Using the layout pane
The layout pane is accessed from the EHX menu pane. Below is a description of
each option.
Page 314
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The commands available to the user depend on whether the user has Admin
rights.
Figure 11-4 System Screen
Matrix status
The matrix icons in the layout pane are colored according to the status of the
matrices:
 Amber - the EHX configuration is not the same as the current matrix
configuration.
 Red - wrong firmware on matrix for current version of EHX.
 Grey - matrix unavailable or already connected to EHX.
 Green - matrix is connected and available.
Protocols and port numbers
The Eclipse HX system components (matrix and EHX) communicate using UDP
and TCP protocols.
Rack to rack
The volume of traffic both exchanged rack to rack and rack to/from EHX is not
large, there are however of course some points when this is at a peak. The
racks use both directed and broadcast UDP traffic to communicate.
Broadcast: UDP Port 42001
Directed: UDP Port 42001
Page 315
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Rack to EHX
UDP Port 1300
TCP Port 2048 to TCP Port 2055 inclusive (Lifetime of out of sequence packets
1 sec).
11.1.3 Allocating a configuration to a matrix
To allocate a configuration to a matrix:
1)
Select the matrix by clicking over the matrix icon on the layout
pane. The matrix is highlighted with a green border.
2)
Click Tools > Configuration Bank on the EHX toolbar to open the
menu listing the configuration slots available (normally four). Select
the bank for the configuration.
3)
Right-click the matrix to open the menu and select Configuration
> Configuration Manager.
4)
In Configuration Manager, select the configuration to be applied
to the matrix and then click on the Activate button to apply the
configuration to the matrix.
5)
Close the Configuration Manager. The name of the selected
configuration is displayed on the matrix.
11.1.4 Deleting a matrix from the project
To delete a matrix from the layout pane:
1)
Right-click the matrix.
2)
From the context menu, select Delete Matrix from Project.
The matrix is deleted from the current project and removed from the
layout pane.
11.1.5 Uploading the last downloaded configuration from the
matrix
To upload the last downloaded configuration from the matrix:
1)
Right-click on the matrix.
2)
From the context menu, select Configuration > Upload
Configuration from Matrix.
The last downloaded configuration is uploaded and added to the
currently selected slot on the matrix.
Page 316
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: The Upload Configuration functionality is not available over a serial
connection between the Eclipse HX matrix and the EHX PC.
11.2
Intelligent linking (trunking)
As many as 64 separate Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median, Eclipse HXDelta and Eclipse HX-PiCo system matrices can be intelligently linked, using
dedicated audio trunk lines and an Ethernet network. Audio travels between
the matrices on the dedicated trunk lines, while control data travels on the
Ethernet network.
You can intelligently link Eclipse HX matrices using:
 Fiber-optic connections (using E-FIB fiber cards).
 Four-wire connections (using MVX-A16 analog cards).
 E1/T1 connections (using E-QUE cards).
 MADI connections (using E-MADI64 cards). When using E-MADI64
cards, ensure that Trunk Port 1 on the first card is connected to Trunk
Port 1 on the second card, and similarly for Trunk Port 2.
 IP trunks/directs between two IVC-32 cards in separate matrices (see
5.22.5 IP port options
Note: Fiber, E1/T1, MADI and IP trunks/directs linking is only available to
Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta matrices.
You can intelligently link Eclipse HX-PiCo matrices using:
 Four-wire connections.
 The PiCo-link to PiCo-link.
Note: PiCo-link is only available for Eclipse HX-PiCo to Eclipse HX-PiCo
connections. The PiCo-link does not support hopping.
The sections below on Fiber trunking and Four-wire trunking provide a basic
overview of the intelligent linking process.
 The relevant matrix user guide.
 The Eclipse HX Installation Guide.
11.2.1 Fiber trunking
To enable fiber trunking, you must install and configure E-FIB fiber cards in the
matrices you want to connect.
Fiber trunked matrix matrices are normally connected in a ring configuration.
An example connection layout (the IP addresses increment to match the
system numbers) is shown below.
Page 317
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 11-5 Fiber Connections
An example of matrices with trunks is shown below.
Figure 11-6 Trunk Connections
Page 318
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11.2.2 Four-wire trunks
To configure four-wire trunks:
1)
Open Hardware > Cards and Ports, then select the MVX card on
the first matrix where the trunks are to be configured.
2)
Configure the required ports as Trunks.
3)
Switch to the MVX card on the second matrix, and configure the
required ports as Trunks.
4)
On the layout pane, ensure that the required systems layout is
open
The systems layout should be automatically updated with the trunk
information on both matrices. The trunks have been added to the
bottom of each matrix and the port number should be shown.
5)
To apply the configuration changes, Select Apply changes To
System in the System menu.
6)
Open the File menu and select Save project or Save Project As
to save the updated project.
Note: User-configured trunk labels are ignored in Online mode and the
default labels should be accepted. When changing the trunking
information between matrices all of the matrices in the linked set
should be reset. The option to reset matrices is available from the
download dialog.
11.2.3 IP directs and trunks
The Eclipse IVC-32 cards allow directs and trunks over IP network
infrastructure. All IP trunks and directs can be compared directly to four-wire
trunks and directs. They comprise:
 A single duplex audio channel
 A known start point and end point
Links have to be made over IP before the trunk/direct can be used.
One side calls the other to set up the link and is known as the caller. The other
side receiving the call checks and decides if it can set up the link – this is the
recipient.
If a recipient is not reachable:
 The caller tries three times to establish call
 After it stops trying, a low level thread checks to see if it’s reachable
again
Page 319
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Calls will start to try again if the thread sees the recipient
Calls can be refused by the receiver, if:
 The caller is trying to use a non-existent user name
 The caller is using the wrong password
 The caller is not the expected port type (for example, Trunk calling a
Panel)
 The call is refused three times, the caller stops calling
If the call is refused three times, to continue making the call you must select
Restart Blocked Connections at the bottom of the IVC-32 Diagnostics
screen (see Restart blocked connections on page 233).
Figure 11-7 IVC-32 Diagnostics screen
You can also access the Restart Blocked Connections button by selecting
Detailed at the top right of the Monitoring screen.
Page 320
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 11-8 Restart Blocked Connections
Configuring an IP direct
1)
In the Cards and Ports screen, for each of the IVC-32 cards, right
click on the card and select Card Properties.
2)
From the IVC-32 Card Properties screen, enter valid IP
addresses and gateways for the card.
3)
In the Cards and Ports screen, select the direct port.
4)
From the properties list, select IP Port Options.
Page 321
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 11-9 IP Port Options
5)
For the caller IVC-32 card, select the VOIP Caller checkbox. The
other card will be the recipient.
6)
Enter the IP address of the recipient’s IVC-32 card into the caller’s
Remote IP Address so it can make setup the call.
7)
Enter a unique User ID and Password set which matches for caller
and recipient to identify the port it is linking to.
Note: The following settings can be ignored:
 Local User ID/Password can be ignored for caller
 Remote IP and User ID/Password can be ignored for recipient
Once set up, the IP Direct ports will behave in the same manner as all other
Direct ports
As each caller can point to a unique IP address, IP directs on one IVC-32 can
link to 32 different destination devices. IP directs cannot link back to a direct
on the same card, but can link to other cards on the same Eclipse matrix.
Configuring an IP trunk
1)
In the Cards and Ports screen, for each of the IVC-32 cards, right
click on the card and select Card Properties.
2)
From the IVC-32 Card Properties screen, enter valid IP
addresses and gateways for the card.
Page 322
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
In the Cards and Ports screen, select the trunk port.
4)
From the properties list, select IP Port Options, and enter valid
settings for the Network Connection, Audio Codec and VOIP
Caller.
Figure 11-10 IP Port Options
5)
Repeat for any matrices in the linked set you wish to link over IP (1
port per trunk link, point to point).
6)
In the Layout screen, drag the trunk links as required. The direction
of the drag creates the link as Caller to Recipient.
Right clicking on the link and the ports allow you to change caller, network
connection type and flip ports.
Figure 11-11 IP Links
11.2.4 Intelligent linking with PiCo-Link
Note: You can create a high capacity CAT-5 connection between two Eclipse HX-PiCo
matrix frames using the PiCo-Link connector on each device. Hopping is not
supported. The last four ports on an Eclipse HX-PiCo matrix frame are fourwire ports, and not available for panel connections.
Page 323
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
DTMF generation and detection is only supported on 16 ports (ports 17 – 32)
on an Eclipse HX-PiCo.
The 36 ports of the first matrix frame are intelligently linked to the 36 ports of
the second, creating a 72-port non-blocking system.
You can create one non-blocking 64 port Eclipse HX system by connecting two
Eclipse HX-PiCo matrix frames (matrices) together, using the PiCo -Link RJ-45
connectors on the matrices.
To make this connection, use a specially constructed screened CAT-5 cable of
maximum length 1 meter (3.28 feet). The cable is wired as shown in Table 6
below.
Cable end 1
Wire color
Cable end 2
Pin 1
White / orange
Pin 3
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 6
Pin 3
White / green
Pin 1
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White / blue
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 2
Pin 7
White / brown
Pin 7
Table 6: CAT-5 crossover cable pinout
To transfer data between two linked Eclipse HX-PiCo matrices using the PiCoLink also requires that the Ethernet ports are connected with either a crossover shielded CAT-5 cable or a hub or switch using conventional shielded CAT5 cable.
Setting up a Pico link
To set up a Pico link:
1)
In the Layout screen, for each Pico matrix, select Hardware >
Cards and Ports > PiCo-Link.
Figure 11-12 PiCo Link
2)
Page 324
In the drop-down list, select PiCo-Link.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
In the Layout screen, using the mouse drag a link from one Pico
matrix to the one you need to link to.
Figure 11-13 Pico-Link drag and drop
If you want to disable the link:
 On the Layout screen, click on the link connecting the two Pico matrices
and press Delete.
11.3
Programming remote labels
1)
To program remote labels onto panels, open Configuration >
Panels.
2)
From the Panel Programming area of the screen select the required
panel to be programmed by either selecting the panel from the
drop down list or cycling through the panels by selecting the left or
right arrows.
3)
To assign keys click on the required item in the list of available
labels, drag the items to the required key and drop them over the
display corresponding to the key and then click on the mouse to
confirm the assignment.
4)
When the labels have been programmed onto the required panel or
panels, download the changes by selecting the Apply Changes To
System link in the System menu. The newly programmed labels
should appear in the required positions.
Page 325
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
11.4
To program labels onto the next matrix, switch between the
configurations by selecting the required matrix from the layout
pane.
Remote fixed groups
Remote Members from one system can be added to a Fixed Group of a local
system.
To configure a remote member to a local Fixed group:
1)
Select Fixed Groups from the Configuration menu.
2)
Create a Fixed Group by clicking on the New button.
3)
Enter the Talk and Listen labels for the new Fixed Group and a
description if required.
4)
Set up the properties of the new Fixed Group using the properties
dialogue in the Properties pane.
Figure 11-14 Remote Fixed Groups
5)
Select the members of the group from the Available pane and
click on the > button to transfer them to the Attached pane. They
are now members of the group. To remove members from the
group select them in the Attached pane and click on the < to
transfer them back to the Available pane.
6)
Click on the Apply Changes to Matrix button to download the
new map to the matrix immediately or close the Fixed Groups
dialogue if other changes are to be made.
Note: The available members area is filtered according to the active matrix
filters, but the attached area always shows all attached members, even
if their matrices are filtered out.
Page 326
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11.5
Remote partylines
To add remote partyline members from one system to the partyline of a local
system:
1)
Select Partylines from the Configuration menu.
2)
Create a partyline by clicking on the New button.
3)
Enter the Talk and Listen labels for the new partyline and a
description if required.
4)
Set up the properties of the new partyline using the properties
dialog in the Properties pane.
Figure 11-15 Remote Partyline
5)
Select the members of the partyline from the Available pane and
click on the > button to transfer them to the Attached pane. They
are now members of the partyline. To remove members from the
partyline select them in the Attached pane and click on the < to
transfer them back to the Available pane.
6)
Click Apply Changes to download the new map to the matrix
immediately or close the Partyline dialog if other changes are to be
made.
Note: The available members area is filtered according to the active matrix
filters, but the attached area always shows all attached members, even
if their matrices are filtered out.
Page 327
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11.6
Remote 2-way radio
If a 2-way radio system is connected via a FOR-22, the 2-Way Radio can
operate over an intelligently linked system.
To configure a remote 2-way radio:
1)
Create a control. Attach the relay for the FOR-22, and set the
control as a secondary action on the FOR-22.
2)
Apply and reset the first matrix.
3)
Switch matrices, and open Panels > Remote Interfaces. Locate
the remote 2-way radio
4)
Program the 2-way radio onto the required panel and click Apply
Label Changes.
When a 2-way radio contributes audio to a partyline, the vox on the port will
detect the audio and fire any other 2-way radio that is in the partyline but will
NOT fire itself.
Note: The Vox timeout and activation level for the 2-way radio port should be
set to the users preference.
The relay for a 2-way radio in a partyline is also activated by the key from a
panel when the Audio Presence tally is off in the properties for that panel.
If more than one 2-way radio contributes audio to the partyline then all 2-way
radio relays including the contributors will turn on.
Note: A call signal to a partyline will also trigger the Relay.
Note: There may be some delay activating the 2-way radio relay when a
partyline has multiple 2-way radios in because audio coming into the
system on one radio will trigger the vox that will in turn activate the
PTTs on the other radios in the partyline.
For information about radio interfacing with Clear-Com systems, see the ClearCom Gateway product documentation.
11.7
Remote telephone
Remote Telephone functionality enables you to configure a TEL-14 telephone
module on one system to be available for use on another system. To make a
remote telephone call, DTMF tone generation is required.
An Eclipse HX user panel (V-Series or I-Series) can make remote calls both
manually (using the dial pad) and through speed dials.
Note: For more information about setting up and using the TEL-14 module,
see the TEL-14 User Guide. For more information about user panels,
see the V-Series User Guide and the I-Series manual.
Page 328
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
11.7.1 Remote manual dial
User panels can manually dial a remote telephone, using the dial pad. The
panel registers as a dialler to the telephone as soon as the panel starts dialling
the telephone through the dial pad.
When the panel comes out of dial mode (ends the call), registration to the
telephone port is released.
Note: Only one port at a time (local or remote) can dial the telephone.
11.7.2 Remote speed dial
To set up a speed dial to a remote telephone between two linked matrices:
1)
Open the Panels screen and locate the telephone interface in the
label palette
2)
Program the telephone interface onto any required panel(s)
3)
In Controls, select the control for the speed dial and program next
to the telephone interface
4)
Activate a talk for the telephone
5)
Activate the speed dial (make the call).
Alternatively:
1)
Set-up telephone and speed dial as above.
2)
Switch matrices
3)
Program the telephone interface onto any required panels
4)
Double click the talk label to the telephone interface
5)
Select controls and click on the speed dial control
6)
Add to the stacked key area.
7)
Download to the matrix
Activating the talk to the telephone operate the speed dial and the call
is made
11.7.3 Off hook and off hook tally
If a talk route is made to that telephone port from either a local or a remote
system the telephone is automatically placed off-hook.
Note: The telephone port must be set to Auto -Signal.
Page 329
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The off hook tally state of a telephone port is broadcast to all the systems in a
linked set.
To check if the telephone port has been configured as an off hook tally, see the
entity table.
11.7.4 Auto listen
In Eclipse HX, you can set Auto Listen for ports on both the local matrix and
remote matrices.
If a remote port on a matrix has Auto Listen set, any talk path made to it from
anywhere in the system has a return listen route made.
11.8
Remote controls
Controls from one system are made available for use in another system.
To configure remote controls
1)
Create the required controls on a local system
2)
Select Save Linked Configurations
Figure 11-16 Remote Controls
3)
Switch matrices
4)
Open Panels. Select the Controls tab in the labels section of the
window
Page 330
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 11-17 Controls on a Panel
11.9
5.
A complete list of controls is displayed. Locate the required control.
6.
Program onto any required panel, using drag and drop
7.
Download to the matrix.
Remote secondary actions
Other functionality implemented is the remote secondary action where a
control can be attached to a label as a secondary action.
11.10 Remote IFBs
Panels can have a key to an IFB configured on a remote matrix.
Page 331
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
12
Client server
12.1
Client/server operation
Client/Server operation enables multiple clients to share and download
configurations to one or more matrices using a central server which runs EHX.
The application ensures that while a user is editing a configuration, other users
are prohibited from also making edits to the same configuration.
If client/server operation is being used then all the EHX PCs on the network
should be configured to run in this mode.
Figure 12-1 EHX Client Server Wiring
12.1.1 Client
EHX must be installed on each client that is used to make edits to
configurations or update racks. The user chooses the server to use when
logging in as EHX starts up. The server distinguishes between clients by
Username.
12.1.2 Server
The server controls all communications between the clients and the matrices.
The server stores all of the projects and ensures that when one configuration is
being edited by a client, no other client can edit that configuration at the same
time.
The server must also be running IIS (Internet Information Services - a web
server provided by Microsoft).
The EHX server provides the back-end services, such as map-building,
configuration sharing, and access to the matrices. Clients access the server
with an Ethernet connection.
Page 332
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
12.1.3 Initial setup
The following steps need to be completed in the specified order:
1)
Install and configure IIS on the server system.
2)
Install EHX server.
3)
Install EHX on each client PC.
4)
Configure each client PC to access the server.
5)
Login to the server from a client machine.
Note: The default installation path is assumed to be C:\Program
Files\ClearCom\Eclipse HX Configuration Server
Installing and Configuring IIS on the Server
Stage 1 - Verify IIS is installed
To verify that IIS has been installed:
1)
Go to the Windows Control Panel.
2)
Double click Administrative Tools.
3)
Verify Internet Information Services exists and is at version 5.0
or above.
Note: For more information about the options that are not selected by
default, but which must be enabled for EHX to run successfully, see IIS
options that must be enabled below.
If IIS does not exist on the server, complete Stage 1b. Otherwise, proceed to
Stage 2.
Stage 1b - Install IIS
To install IIS:
1)
Open the Windows Control Panel.
2)
Double click Add or Remove Programs.
3)
Click the Add/Remove Windows Components tab. The OS
installation CD-ROM may be required.
4)
Select Internet Information Services and complete the install
using the wizard.
Page 333
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Note: For more information about the options that are not selected by
default, but which must be enabled for EHX to run successfully, see IIS
options that must be enabled below.
IIS options that must be enabled
When installing Internet Information Services, there are certain options which
are not selected by default, and that must be enabled to allow EHX to run
successfully. (You can select any other options in addition to these, without
risk to the installation).
Windows Vista
In Windows Vista:
1)
Go to Control Panel.
2)
Select Programs and Features.
3)
Click Turn Windows Features on or off on the left hand side of
the window.
4)
Under Internet Information Services, make sure the following
options are enabled:

Web Management Tools
o IIS 6 Management Compatibility

IIS 6 Management Console

IIS6 Scripting Tools

IIS6 WMI Compatibility

IIS Metabase and IIS6 configuration compatibility
o IIS Management Console

World Wide Web Services
o Application Development Features

Net Extensibility

ASP.NET

ISAPI Extensions

ISAPI Filters
o Common HTTP Features
Page 334

Default Document

Directory Browsing

HTTP Errors
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

Static Content
o Performance Features

Static Content Compression
o Security
5)

Basic Authentication

Windows Authentication
Under Microsoft .Net Framework 3.0, make sure the following
options are enabled:

Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation

Windows Communication Foundation Non-HTTP Activation
Windows 7
In Windows 7:
1)
Go to Control Panel.
2)
Select Programs > Turn Windows features on or off.
3)
Under Internet Information Services, make sure the following
options are enabled:

Web Management Tools
o IIS 6 Management Compatibility

IIS 6 Management Console

IIS6 Scripting Tools

IIS6 WMI Compatibility

IIS Metabase and IIS6 configuration compatibility
o IIS Management Console

World Wide Web Services
o Application Development Features

Net Extensibility

ASP.NET

ISAPI Extensions

ISAPI Filters
o Common HTTP Features
Page 335

Default Document

Directory Browsing
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

HTTP Errors

Static Content
o Performance Features

Static Content Compression
o Security
4)

Basic Authentication

Windows Authentication
Under Microsoft .Net Framework 3.0, make sure the following
options are enabled:

Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation

Windows Communication Foundation Non-HTTP Activation
Windows Server 2008
In Windows Server 2008:
1)
Go to Server Manager.
2)
Click Add Roles.
3)
Select Web server (IIS) and click Next.
4)
Under Role Services, ensure the following options are enabled:

Web Management Tools
o IIS 6 Management Compatibility

IIS 6 Management Console

IIS6 Scripting Tools

IIS6 WMI Compatibility

IIS Metabase and IIS6 configuration compatibility
o IIS Management Console

World Wide Web Services
o Application Development Features
Page 336

Net Extensibility

ASP.NET

ISAPI Extensions

ISAPI Filters
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
o Common HTTP Features

Default Document

Directory Browsing

HTTP Errors

Static Content
o Performance Features

Static Content Compression
o Security

Basic Authentication

Windows Authentication
5)
From Server Manager, click Add Features.
6)
Ensure that the following features are enabled:

Net Framework 3.5.1 Features
o Net Framework 3.5.1
o WCF Activation

HTTP Activation

Non-HTTP Activation
Windows 8
In Windows 8:
1)
Go to Control Panel
2)
Select Programs > Turn Windows features on or off
3)
Under Internet Information Services, make sure the following
options are enabled:

Web Management Tools
o IIS 6 Management Compatibility

IIS 6 Management Console

IIS 6 Scripting Tools

IIS 6 WMI Compatibility

IIS Metabase and IIS 6 configuration compatibility
o IIS Management Console
o IIS Management Scripts and Tools
Page 337
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide

World Wide Web Services
o Application Development Features

NET Extensibility 3.5

NET Extensibility 4.5

ASP.NET 3.5

ASP.NET 4.5

ISAPI Extensions

ISAPI Filters
o Common HTTP Features

Default Document

Directory Browsing

HTTP Errors

Static Content
o Performance Features

Static Content Compression
o Security
4)
5)

Basic Authentication

Windows Authentication
Under .NET Framework 3.5 (includes .Net 2.0 and 3.0)

Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation

Windows Communication Foundation Non-HTTP Activation
Under .NET Framework 4.5 Advanced Services

ASP.NET 4.5

WCF Services

HTTP Activation

Message Queuing (MSMQ) Activation

Named Pipe Activation

TCP Activation

TCP Port Sharing
Stage 2 - Install EHX Server
1)
Page 338
Install EHX Server (Run the EHX server installation *.exe file).
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
For Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7 systems, .Net Framework
should automatically be configured in IIS.
Client configuration
An EHX client installation is required on each client system.
Login to the server from a client machine
1)
At the EHX login dialog box click the Options button to display the
Log on to field.
2)
Type the following string, replacing <Machine Name> with the name
of the EHX server: http://<Machine Name>/EclipseServer/.
The client must able to connect to the server to login. If it cannot connect an
appropriate error is displayed. This problem may even be encountered in the
case where the client is on the same machine as the server when the machine
is not connected to the network.
If the access to the server is required with the machine in this state, setting
the EHX server as http://127.0.0.1/EclipseServer/ allows this (this is
using the network loopback address).
Figure 12-2 EHX Client Log in
Note: To determine the EHX Server Machine Name log in to the EHX Server.
Click Start and then Run. Type cmd into the box and click ok. At the
command prompt type ipconfig /all. Use the listed Host Name as
the EHX server name.
Using Client/server
Username
Each user is distinguished by Username and users on different clients should
always use different Usernames when logging in to the EHX Server.
Usernames on the EHX server are set up by logging in to the EHX Server and
using the User Management facility as described in chapter 3 to set up and
manage users.
Page 339
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
If a user on a client attempts to log in to the EHX Server with a Username that
is already in use a warning is shown. If the new user continues, the existing
user session is terminated, and the user who has now been logged out is
informed.
Host name
When logging in to an EHX server running in client/server mode use the
Options button to display the server that the user is logging on to and enter
the server name explicitly instead of using the default local host name.
Page 340
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
13
Eclipse HX downloads
When the EHX operator creates or edits a configuration, adds hardware to the
system, or performs a variety of other functions the changes must be
downloaded to the Eclipse HX system. Do one of the following to download the
configuration:
 Select Tools > Apply Changes to Matrix.
 Click Apply Changes from the context menu of the selected matrix in
the layout pane.
 Select Apply Changes to System in the System menu.
The first two methods of applying changes to the matrix merge the new
configuration with the existing configuration. They also enable the user to
select the reset type.
The third method only downloads a new configuration to the system.
13.1
Apply changes to matrix
1)
Select Tools > Apply Changes To Matrix.
When the download function is selected a dialog is displayed to confirm
the action.
Figure 13-1 Download Dialog
2)
Select Merge to allow the current EHX configuration to be merged
with the rack configuration before download. Use this facility if the
rack configuration has been changed as a result of making changes
in EHX Online mode or from assignment panels.
In both cases these changes are reflected in the current EHX configuration and
would be lost if a download was performed without first merging the
configurations. The merge button has the same effect as performing a merge
in Online mode and displays the same informatory messages.
Page 341
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
3)
To continue with the download to the matrix click the OK button.
To cancel the download click on Cancel.
The options button displays a further dialog allowing the user to set up actions
after the download.
Figure 13-2 Apply Configuration to Matrix Options
4)
Select the required option (or options) and then click OK to
continue with the download.
The configuration is built and downloaded to the matrix.
13.1.1 Apply changes with reset (red reset)
1)
Select Apply changes with reset (to initialise new hardware
or add trunks) to make the download reset the matrix and any
crosspoints. Talk/Listen paths are remade.
This type of reset (also known as a Red reset) is required for:
Page 342

Downloading completely new configurations

Hardware changes (not mandatory)

Any locally assigned keys are cleared.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
13.1.2 Apply changes with reset and clear all memory (black
reset)
1)
Select Apply changes with reset and clear all memory
(overwrite matrix with EHX configuration) to make the
download clear down any active routes and reset the matrix to the
EHX default configuration. Any local changes to groups, partylines
or IFBs made through I-Series panels are reset to the EHX map
default.
This type of reset (also known as a Black reset) is used for:
Page 343

Correcting erroneous or spurious crosspoints.

Any locally assigned keys are also lost.

Crosspoints - all active keys are reset to off.

Crosspoint levels - all panel listen levels are rest to normal.

Locally assigned keys - any locally assigned keys are
deleted.

Local panel microphone settings - all panel microphone
settings are set to the EHX downloaded value.

Local panel microphone gains- all panel microphone settings
are set to the EHX downloaded value.

Key status - all keys are unmade.

Any local changes to groups, party lines and IFBs made
through I-Series panels are reset to the EHX map default.

Locally assigned fixed groups - all groups are reset to the
EHX default.

Locally assigned partylines -all partylines are reset to the
EHX default.

Locally assigned IFBs -all IFBs are reset to the EHX default.

Locally assigned forced listens-all Forced listens are reset to
the EHX default.

Input levels - Matrix input levels are reset to the EHX
download value.

Output levels - Matrix output levels are reset to the EHX
download value.

OTA registration – OTA registration is cleared.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
13.2
Apply to all matrices
1)
13.3
Select this option if the EHX operator:

Is making the first download of a new linked set.

Has added or removed a Reserve Port.

Has added a remote member to a partyline.

Has added a remote key to a partyline.

Has changed the Port Count for a fiber card.
Preserving locally assigned keys
When a download is performed all the locally assigned keys (keys assigned
from a panel rather than EHX) are lost unless a merge operation is performed
before the download. If you wish to retain these keys in the new configuration:
1)
Go into Online mode and merge the locally assigned keys with the
new configuration before downloading and then save the modified
project.
The configuration can then be downloaded with the locally assigned keys
preserved in the new configuration.
13.4
Apply changes to all matrices
1)
Select System > Apply Changes to all Matrices to download a
configuration to all matrices in the system. Clicking this function
opens the following dialog. The dialog includes reset options.
Figure 13-3 Apply Changes to all Matrices
Page 344
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The reset options comprise:
 Apply with no reset. The configuration is applied without resetting
the matrices in the system.
 Apply and reset. The configuration and a red reset is applied to the
matrices after download (the matrices and any crosspoints are reset,
and Talk/Listen paths are remade).
 Apply and reset, clearing all talk paths and listen levels. The
configuration and a black reset is applied to the matrices after
download (the configuration is applied, the matrices are reset, and
active routes and local assignments are cleared).
2)
Page 345
Select an option. To continue with the download, click Apply
Changes to all Matrices.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
14
Using the diagnostic tools
The Diagnostics menu displays information about the state of the system’s
hardware and software operation that is useful for diagnosing and preventing
problems.
Note: The Save Diagnostics Information utility (Help > Save
Diagnostics Information) enables you to take a snapshot of the
current state of your project, the EHX PC and the matrices, and store
this information as a zip file on your computer. This information can
then be sent to Clear-Com support to assist with the diagnosis of
issues.
For more information, see 14.6 Save diagnostics information utility.
Figure 14-1 Diagnostics Menu
Note: The Beltpack Status and Antenna Status options are only available if
there is a FreeSpeak II card in the matrix.
14.1
Crosspoint map
1)
Select Crosspoint Map for a visual display of all crosspoints or
source-to-destination assignments in the matrix system. The
crosspoint map is a graphical representation of all inputs and
outputs in the system.
This map can be used to identify talk and listen assignments, forced
listens and blocked listens. It can also be used to make or cancel
crosspoints and to override input and output levels set up in the map.
The grey triangles denote active crosspoints, pink half circles denote
auto listen crosspoints, red crosses denote blocked listen crosspoints
and green half circles denote forced listen crosspoints.
The crosspoint map displays both the labels and the port numbers the
labels are associated with for ease of identification.
Page 346
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The outputs are listed down the left hand side of the table with the
output gain settings, while the inputs are listed along the top of the
table with the input gain settings.
Figure 14-2 Crosspoint Monitor Display
2)
Use Ctrl+ (zoom in) and Ctrl- (zoom out) to zoom in or out,
producing clearer views of the map, or if a wheel mouse is available
use Ctrl and the wheel to zoom.
3)
Click on the Refresh All Crosspoints button at the top of the
crosspoint map to request the crosspoint information from the
matrix and use it to update the crosspoint map.
When an input or output level is changed it affects all the crosspoints
that are connected to the port. If an input level for a port is reduced
the input level to all the crosspoints for that port is reduced (all the
crosspoints in the column below the level). If an output level is
changed all the crosspoints in that row are affected. Note that these
levels only change the input and output levels for the ports. They do
not change the crosspoint level settings.
4)
Right click on an input or output setting (the cell next to the port
information) to display a list of gain values.
Clicking a value in the list sets the input or output gain to the required
level in the matrix. This value remains in force until it is either changed
again using the Crosspoint Monitor or a new map is downloaded and
the matrix is reset to the default values in the map.
If the matrix is only reset without a new map download the modified
values set up using the Crosspoint Monitor remain in force.
The settable values are: +18, +15, 12, +9, +6, + 5, +4, +3, +2, +1,
0, -1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, -9, -10, -12, -14, -16, -20, -35, -45 and
-72dB.
The current value can also be reset to the default value set up in EHX
from this list.
Page 347
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The crosspoint level cells are color coded to show whether the level is
higher (red) or lower (green) than 0dB.
Figure 14-3 Input and Output Gain Settings
You can set the default port gain using the individual port settings on the Cards
& Ports screen. The setting is downloaded to the matrix as part of the map and
is displayed by the crosspoint monitor.
5)
Right-click the port gain setting to display the gain levels and show
this value as the default setting so the port may be reset to the
EHX value at any time without a new map download and reset.
If the port gain is set to a non-zero level in EHX and then set to zero
using the crosspoint monitor the gain is shown highlighted in light blue
to indicate that the zero value is not the default value in the map.
6)
Page 348
Right click a cell representing a crosspoint to display a list of
options. To toggle a crosspoint from the On state to the Off state
click on the State option and then click on Toggle in the next
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
menu. Select the Kill option from the State menu to clear a
crosspoint completely.
Figure 14-4 Crosspoint State Options
7)
To set the crosspoint level, select the level option on the menu to
display the crosspoint level slider and set the required level.
Figure 14-5 Crosspoint Level Slider
Note: Leave signalization still active on the panel.
8)
Select the Refresh All option to update the display with the
crosspoint settings current on the matrix.
14.1.1 Crosspoint settings and averaging
In some cases the same port may be placed on a panel as different key more
than once, for example on different shift pages (multiple instances of the port).
If these instances of the port or keys have been set up with different audio
levels then the level used on any of keys connected to the port is the average
of the levels of all the instances on the panel. This is to prevent a situation
where the audio level from the same port may vary greatly between different
keys assigned to that port depending on how the different keys have been set
up.
To improve the performance of the level averaging on I-Series panels the
crosspoint range for these panels is larger than previously. The preset levels in
the matrix for I-Series panels are:
 -30.2 dB
 -24.1 dB
 -18.1 dB
 -12.1 dB
 -9.2 dB
Page 349
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 -6.0 dB
 -3.9 dB
 -2.1 dB
 0 dB
 1.1 dB
 2.1 dB
 3.2 dB
 3.9 dB
 6.0 dB
 8.9 dB
 12.1 dB
The range for V-Series panels is -42 dB to +12 dB.
14.2
Matrix event log
In Live mode, messages are displayed in the Matrix Event Log as soon as they
are generated by the matrix. In offline mode, EHX makes a connection to the
database. The user sets search criteria and the resulting messages are
displayed on screen.
The Matrix Event Log gives the EHX user information about the state of the
matrix that is helpful in diagnosing and repairing problems.
1)
Select the event types to be logged in the Properties pane by
clicking on the required checkboxes. The message types that can
be selected for logging are Critical, Warning and Information.
2)
Set the logging mode to Live to report current messages, or
Historic to display previous logged messages. In Historic mode
the specific hour, minute, and second beginning and end dates to
search can be set. Click Display when these parameters have been
set to display the required log messages.
Page 350
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-6 Event Log
3)
Use the Export option in the Properties pane to export the log
messages to a file for further processing.
The logging export file is an XML file and can be imported into Excel using the
speech quotes (“) as the delimiter.
14.2.1 Request info
1)
Page 351
Select Request Info in the Properties pane to display a Request
Matrix Information screen which allows a number of matrix
parameters to be set or displayed.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-7 Request Matrix Information
2)
Select the required function in the left pane and the click on the
Send button to send the request or update.
The default functions are described below.
Matrix overview
Select this option to cause information about the current matrix status to be
output to the matrix event log.
IP address dump
Select this option to output information on the current matrix IP address
information to the event log.
Network status info
Select this option to output the current network status of the matrix to the
matrix event log.
Ethernet stats
Select this option to output the statistics of Ethernet transactions logged such
as packet losses to the matrix event log.
Change IP address
1)
Select this option to allow the primary and redundant IP address of
the target matrix to be set. These addresses correspond to the
LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear of the CPU card (see the
Eclipse HX-Omega, Eclipse HX-Median and Eclipse HX-Delta
User Guides) or the Eclipse HX-PiCo unit (LAN 1 only).
Figure 14-8 IP Address Setup Display
Page 352
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
2)
Select interface 1 or 2 (LAN1 or LAN2 port) and enter the required
IP address, subnet mask and default gateway and click on Send to
update the matrix.
Changing the IP address parameters may result in the EHX PC losing contact
with the matrix and may require the Ethernet configuration of the PC to be
changed.
Custom
Select this option to allow request parameters to be entered manually for
downloading to the matrix.
14.2.2 Audio alerts
Select this option in the Properties pane to allow audio alert sounds to be set
up for the three message types of Critical, Warning and Informatory. The audio
alerts are .wav files and the default is the standard Windows media files. You
can configure other sound files if required.
Click to select one or all of the following categories of messages to cause an
audio alert from the EHX computer.

Critical

Warning

Info
If no option is selected, no event in this category of messages causes an audio
alert.
14.2.3 Changing matrix IP address
It may be necessary to change the IP address of a matrix. It is recommended
that the following steps be followed when the right click layout screen IP
setting change is not available, for example when the serial interface is the
only available interface. The sequence of steps to change the IP address of a
matrix via the event log is:
1)
After starting EHX open the configuration.
2)
Ensure that the PC is connected to the matrix via Ethernet or a
serial link.
3)
Open Matrix Event Log from the Diagnostics menu (see 14 Using
the diagnostic tools for details on the Matrix Event Log).
To display the Diagnostics menu at least one matrix must be configured on the
layout pane.
4)
Page 353
To connect to the matrix, press Play.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-9 Press Play to Connect to Matrix
5)
When connection is established click on the Request Info button
which is displayed beside the Play icon.
Figure 14-10 Request Info Button
6)
Page 354
Choose Change IP Address from the list in the left hand pane and
enter the desired values listed below.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-11 IP Address Entry

Select parameter 1 and enter the pin code.

Select parameter 2 and enter interface 1 and then enter the
LAN1 port address.

Select parameter 2 and enter interface 2 and then enter the
LAN2 port address (Omega, Median and Delta matrix only).

Select parameter 3 and enter the subnet mask.

Select parameter 4 and enter the default gateway address
7)
Click on Send to update the matrix.
8)
A message from the Matrix indicating that the change was
successful is seen in the log, and the matrix resets.
9)
Close Matrix Event Log, and open My Systems.
10) Change the IP address in My Systems to be the same as the new
value in the matrix.
11) Press Save and Activate.
Note: It may be necessary to change the IP address and subnet mask o f the
PC if the new matrix IP address is from a different network range.
14.2.4 System monitoring
To start system monitoring:
1)
Page 355
Selecting System > Monitoring.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-12 System Menu
Monitoring displays all the matrices in the current configuration and
their status.
Figure 14-13 System Monitoring Screen
On the monitoring screen, all trunks are coloured light blue. Trunk lines
that are detected as being in error as coloured red, and those that are
detected as being in use in are colored blue. If EHX detects that only
one end of a trunk is in error (a trunk card has been pulled on one of
the matrices), the trunk is coloured red, as is the node on the matrix
that is in error.
Page 356
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Color coding is used to indicate system status, according to the
following key:
Figure 14-14 System Monitoring key
An error summary is listed in the right-hand side of the Monitoring
screen.
2)
Page 357
Select the Detailed button in the top-right of the Monitoring
screen to switch to an alternate view of the same information. This
provides a detailed tree view of the system. You can filter
information for matrix, error type or error priority.
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Figure 14-15 Detailed system monitoring view
If an error is selected, the right-hand side of the monitoring screen
shows detailed information about that particular error, including any
additional details that might be available and a short troubleshooting
guide. A history of the state of that particular error is also shown, so
you can see when this fault happened and whether it has happened
previously.
3)
14.3
You can ignore errors by right clicking on them in the error list (in
either overview or detailed view) and selecting Ignore from the
context menu. There is also an Ignore button shown in the details
for each error.
Beltpack status
The Beltpack Status screen shows the current status of each FreeSpeak II
beltpack on the matrix.
For beltpacks, users can see:
 Whether the beltpack is online or not
 The beltpack ID
 The beltpack role currently assigned to the beltpack
 The antenna currently used by the beltpack
 The DECT error rate of the beltpack
 The DECT signal strength of the beltpack
 The battery level of the beltpack, in hours and minutes if using Li-Ion
batteries, or percentage remaining if using AA.
 The type of the battery (Li-Ion or AA)
Page 358
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Whether a log is available on the beltpack
 Whether the beltpack is live logging
For the error rate, signal strength and battery levels, values are provided in
both graphical and text forms. The graphs for these values are colored using
standard traffic light colors to indicate good, acceptable and potentially
problematic values.
Figure 14-16 Beltpack Status screen
You can right-click on an online beltpack and select live logging of a beltpack’s
status.
When live logging is turned on, the beltpacks currently live logging will be
indicated on the beltpack status and the live logging pane will appear at the
bottom of the beltpack status screen.
Figure 14-17 Live logging screen
You can save the current log, clear the values currently displayed or o pen the
live log in a new window:
When the live log is open in a new window, users have the option of also
seeing any live logging data for antennas that is currently being output from
the matrix.
Page 359
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
The Live Log window shows the following details for each lo g:
 Time
 Category
 Peripheral Type (Beltpack or Antenna)
 Port
 Detail
When a log is saved, the output file is a CSV file containing the same
information shown in the log window.
14.3.1 Static log
When a static log has been generated by the beltpack, this will be sho wn in the
Is Log Available column of the Beltpack Status screen. To get the current
log, right click on the beltpack and select Get Log. A Diagnostic Log window
opens and shows the static log – users have the ability to save the log for
future reference.
The static log window shows the same details as the live log window. When a
log is saved, this is CSV format.
You can clear the log by right-clicking on the beltpack, and selecting Clear
Log.
Page 360
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
You can also navigate to the Beltpack, Role and Panel Programming entries for
the role from here.
14.3.2 Automatic Log Saving
It is possible to get EHX to automatically save wireless logs to a file. To do this,
you must specify a logging directory and a maximum file size/maximum
number of log files (to ensure that the hard disk does not fill up with wireless
logs). The settings that control this are found in the Wireless Log Settings
which can be accessed from either the Beltpack Status screen or the Antenna
Status screen when live logging is enabled.
14.4
Antenna status
The Antenna status screen behaves in a similar fashion to the Beltpack Status
screen, however with a different set of information available for the Antennas.
Page 361
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
For antennas, users can see:
 Whether the antenna is online or not
 The antenna port and antenna label
 The cable length compensation
 Whether a log is available on the antenna
 Whether the antenna is live logging
Live logging, static logging and navigation to the cards and ports screen entry
for the antenna are all the same as the beltpack status screen.
14.5
Resource chart
The Resource Chart allows you to view the system resources that would be
used by your current configuration if it were to be downloaded to the matrices.
When you build the current configuration for the Resource Chart, the system
resources are displayed as a percentage of the maximum permitted value.
Color coding indicates the different usage levels:
 Green = Low usage.
Page 362
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 Amber = Medium usage.
 Red = High usage.
Figure 14-18 Example resource chart
14.6
Save diagnostics information utility
The Save Diagnostics Information utility (Help > Save Diagnostics)
enables you to take a snapshot of the current state of your configuration, the
EHX PC and the matrices, and store this information as a compressed file on
your computer.
This information can then be sent to Clear-Com support to assist with the
diagnosis of issues.
The following information is captured:
Information captured
Description / comments
EHX version information
The version of EHX that is being run, the
address of the server that EHX is
connected to, and the operational mode of
EHX (Client-Only or Client-Server).
EHX Project (configuration)
Exported as a *.hxn file.
EHX Database
A copy of the EHX database is provided, if
available.
Matrix information
The name, ID, description and IP address
of the matrices in the current project,
along with details of their active
configurations.
Firmware report(s)
A firmware report from each of the
matrices in the current project.
Configurations currently running on the
matrices
Copies of the configurations that are
currently running on the matrices
Page 363
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Information captured
Description / comments
(achieved by performing an upload from
each of the matrices in the current
project).
EHX PC system Information.
Basic system information concerning the
EHX PC, including OS and hardware
information.
EHX PC process information
Information about the processes that are
currently running on the EHX PC.
EHX PC service information
Information about the services that are
configured on the EHX PC.
EHX exception logs
The exception logs from EHX
EHX event logs
The ADM event logs from EHX
Matrix diagnostics information
A dump of diagnostics information from
the matrices (including system
information, fiber allocation, IP and
Ethernet usage, and task performance
history)
Table 14-1 Save Diagnostics Info Utility
14.7
Clear unused memory
The .Net Framework used by EHX manages its own memory usage on the
system, allocating and releasing memory when appropriate. In some
circumstances, rather than release unused memory back to the operating
system, it may choose to hold on to the memory allocation if it believes it will
be used again in the near future. The Clear Unused Memory option under
Help causes EHX to ask the .Net Framework to release any unused memory,
even if it may be used in the future. In general, EHX and .Net manage the
memory allocation without any issues - this option should only be used if you
believe that EHX is leaking memory (progressively using more and more
memory) and wishes to get a more accurate view of the memory usage.
Page 364
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
15
Glossary
The glossary gives a brief explanation of some of the main terms that you
might encounter in this User Guide.
Agent IC remote client
An App that runs on iOS phones and tablets as a remote panel.
Alias label
A label that is temporarily assigned and replaces a previously labeled port or
conference.
Analog Port
Any of the Eclipse HX matrix’s analog input/output RJ-45 connectors that
are used to connect cable from the matrix to panels and interfaces. Each
port connects to a separate audio channel in the matrix intercom system.
Antenna/transceiver
A fixed unit that can receive and transmit RF signals to wireless beltpacks.
Used in wireless partyline systems such as FreeSpeak II.
Bus
A bus is the channel or path between the components in the matrix along
which electrical signals flow to carry information from one component to the
next. In the Eclipse HX matrix the bus is located in the etched surface of the
midplane.
Call Signal
A call signal is an electronic signal sent from one panel or interface to
another. A call signal can be audible and/or visual. Typically a call signal is
sent to get the attention of a panel operator who may have turned down
their intercom speaker’s volume or removed their headset. It can also be
sent to activate an electronic relay.
Canvas
The assignment area of Production Maestro which can have any user labeled
background.
Category-5 cable
EIA/TIA 568 category specification relating to network cabling. Shielded
category-5 cabling is required for Eclipse HX matrix wiring.
CellCom®
Digital wireless communications product. Sold under the CellCom name in
USA and as FreeSpeak in Europe and Asia.
Central Matrix
The term central matrix is used to differentiate the central hardware and
software of the intercom system from the connected audio devices. The
central matrix consists of:
 The metal housing for the circuit cards and power supplies.
 The circuit cards.
Page 365
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
 The power supplies.
 The rear panel connectors which connect the matrix’s hardware to
panels and interfaces.
Concert
Concert provides a secure and scalable solution for providing high quality
voice communication between single or multi-site facilities over an IP
infrastructure.
Conference
An internal matrix virtual party line or busbar where many panels and
interfaces can talk onto or listen from the party line without talking to
themselves.
Configuration.
Determines the operating parameters of the Eclipse HX matrix system,
including port functions, talk-and-listen audio routes, controls and other
functions. Configurations are created and managed in EHX, for download to
the matrices.
Destination
A device such as an intercom panel, beltpack, or interface to which audio
signals are sent. The device from which audio signals are sent is called a
source.
Duplex
All real-time communication between individuals talking face to face is full
duplex, meaning that they can both talk and listen simultaneously. The
Eclipse HX matrices provide full-duplex audio.
EHX
Eclipse HX Configuration Software. Software program that guides the
operation of the central matrix circuit cards and connected panels.
Ethernet
International standard which describes how information is transmitted
across a network. Provides for the efficient organization of network
components.
Fiber-optic Cable
A fiber-optic cable consists of a glass core covered with a reflective material
called cladding and several layers of buffer coating to protect the cable from
the environment. A laser sends light pulses through the glass core to the
other end of the cable.
FreeSpeak®
Digital wireless communications product. Sold under the FreeSpeak name in
Europe and Asia and CellCom name in USA.
FreeSpeak II™
Digital wireless communications product.
Full Duplex
Refers to transmission of signals in two directions simultaneously.
Page 366
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
Hosted Direct
An IVC-32 port function that is used when one or two additional IP ports are
configured on a panel.
IFB
Interruptible Foldback. The term foldback refers to sending program audio,
or some other audio mix, back to announcers while they are on the air.
Doing so allows announcers to monitor themselves, other announcers,
videotapes of commercials, or some mix of sources, while they on the air.
This is typically found in television news and live broadcast events.
Announcers typically wear a small ear piece so they can hear the selected
foldback audio mix. When a director wants to give directions to an
announcer on air, or to announce changes in the program, the director must
interrupt the foldback. To do this, the director uses a channel specifically set
up to interrupt the foldback audio.
Interface Module
A piece of electronic hardware designed to convert the four-wire signals of a
central matrix port to some other form of communication, such as 2-wire
party line, telephone, etc. The interface module is connected to a central
matrix port. The external non-four-wire device is then connected to the
interface module.
ISO
The ISO function, short for panel ISOlation, allows a panel operator to call a
destination and interrupt all of that destination’s other audio paths and
establish a private conversation. When the call is completed the
destination’s audio pathways are restored to their original state before the
interruption.
Key Group
Key Groups provide a way of assigning a label to multiple panels
simultaneously even within a networked matrix system. Once the Key
Groups have been defined using EHX, all the keys within a Key Group can be
changed with a single assignment in Production Maestro (Pro mode only).
Label
A label is an alphanumeric name of up to five characters that identifies a
source, destination, or control function accessed by an intercom panel.
Labels appear in the displays of the intercom panel. Labels can identify
panels, ports interfaced to other external equipment, fixed groups, party
lines, and special control functions.
Multiplexing
The process by which two or more signals are transmitted over a single
communications channel. Examples include time division and wavelength
division multiplexing.
Non-volatile Memory
Data stored in the CPU’s firmware (ROM) that is not lost when the power is
turned off.
Over The Air Registration
Page 367
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
A way to register a FreeSpeak II beltpack without requiring a wired
connection.
Palette
The port, keyGroup and Monitor selection screen in Production Maestro.
Panel
Also referred to as station in some cases (usually older manuals). Any
intelligent intercom device connected to the rear-panel analog ports of the
central matrix. This term does not refer to devices connected through
interface modules.
Partyline
A wired shared communication system based on a single screened pair of
wires.
Port
Any of the input/output connections (RJ-45 connectors) on the back panel of
the central matrix. These connectors and the attached cables connect the
central matrix to remote intercom devices. The term port emphasizes that
the connection is a portal between the central matrix and the remote
intercom devices.
Program
Any separate audio source that is fed into the intercom channels. In
television applications, for example, program audio is the audio that is
broadcast on air.
Project
A project (stored and exported as an *.hxn file) provides a container for
your configurations, and may comprise one or many configurations for one
or many matrices.
A project can be used to define every aspect of a complex intercom system,
including the connectivity between multiple, intelligently linked matrices
and/or the configurations for individual matrices.
Rack Unit or RU
Standardized unit of mounting space on a rack panel. Each rack unit is 1.75
inches (44.45 mm) of vertical mounting space. Therefore 1 RU is 1.75
inches (44.45 mm) of vertical mounting space, 2 RU is 3.5 inches (88.9
mm), 3 RU is 5.25 inches (133.35 mm), and so on.
Remote Panel
Any intelligent intercom device connected to the back-panel ports of the
central matrix. This term does not refer to devices connected through
interfaces.
Sidetone
The sound of the panel operator’s own voice heard in their own earphone as
they speak.
Source
Page 368
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
In this manual, the term source refers to a device—such as an intercom
panel, interface, or beltpack —that sends audio into the matrix. The device
to which audio is sent is called a destination.
VOX
In the Eclipse HX system, when audio at a panel exceeds a threshold, a light
switches on at the panel’s port card to visually cue the operator. The
threshold level is set in the Eclipse HX Configuration Software.
V-Series
Communications panels used with Eclipse HX systems providing advanced
facilities. Available in rack mount and desktop formats.
Page 369
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
16
Limited Warranty
This document details the Clear-Com Standard Limited Warranty for all new
products for sale within all regions with the exception of Military, Aerospace,
and Government (MAG).
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN ("LIMITED WARRANTY"), CLEAR-COM MAKES
NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.
1)
Standard Limited Warranty. Clear-Com warrants its products,
including supplied accessories, against defects in material or
workmanship for the time periods as set forth below provided it
was purchased from an authorized Clear-Com dealer or distributor.
Pursuant to this Limited Warranty, Clear-Com will, at its option:
repair the product using new or refurbished parts, or;
replace the product with a new or refurbished product.
Remedies: In the event of a defect, the rights detailed in 1 (a) are your
exclusive remedies. For purposes of this Limited Warranty,
"refurbished" means a product or part that has been returned to its
original specifications.
Standard Warranty Period (by Product):
i.
All Clear-Com brand systems and products, including
beltpacks, have a Limited Warranty of two years, with
the exception of;
1) Cables, accessories, components & consumable items
have a Limited Warranty of 90 days.
2) Any Clear-Com product that has been classified as
obsolete at the time of sale has a Limited Warranty of
90 days from sales and will be replaced with the same
product or a sales credit will be issued, at the sole
discretion of Clear-Com.
3) Headsets, handsets, microphones, and associated
spare parts, as well as UHF wireless IFB products, have
a Limited Warranty of one year.
4) UHF WBS Analog wireless intercom systems have a
Limited Warranty of three years.
Page 370
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5) All software products, including Concert (Client and
Server), ECS, Production Maestro and Logic Maestro
are warranted for one year and shall substantially
conform to published specifications. The media on
which the Software is furnished is warranted to be free
of defects in material and workmanship (under normal
use) for a period of one year.
6) Any Clear-Com products that are listed within the last
time buy period have the same Limited Warranty for
their type 1.i 1 - 1.i.5 as above.
Any Clear-Com product that is repaired or supplied as a replacement
under the terms of this Limited Warranty shall inherit the remaining
warranty period from the original product.
Standard Warranty Period Start Date
i.
Dealer / Distributor Sales: In view of Dealer or
Distributor stocking practices, the Standard Warranty
Period for products sold through Dealers or Distributors
will commence from the Clear-Com invoice date and will
include an automatic extension of three months. Any
valid warranty claim within the Standard Warranty
Period as determined by the Clear-Com invoice date will
be covered without further supporting evidence. All
warranty claims after this date must be supported by
the Customer's proof of purchase that demonstrates the
product is still within the Standard Warranty Period (as
detailed in Section 1.c.i above, plus the automatic three
month extension) from their purchase date.
Direct Sales: The Standard Warranty Period will commence from the date the
product was shipped from Clear-Com to the Customer. The Standard Warranty
Period start date for contracts that include commissioning will be the date of
the Site Acceptance Test (SAT) or one month from conclusion of the
commissioning project, whichever is earlier.
Invalidation of Warranty
i.
This Limited Warranty shall be invalidated if the
product's outer case has been opened and internal
modifications have been made or damage has occurred,
or upon the occurrence of other damage or failure not
attributable to normal wear and tear. Authorized
modifications with Clear-Com's express written
permission will not invalidate the warranty.
Software Updates
Page 371
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
i.
Software Updates are released periodically to correct
discovered program bugs. During the Warranty Period,
software updates are available to Customers free of
charge.
Software Upgrades
i.
Software Upgrades include new Features and/or
Functional Enhancements and are not included as part
of the Standard Warranty but may be purchased at the
published rates.
Note: In the absence of a Software Update containing a program correction
and no available workaround to mitigate the problem, at the discretion of
Service, Sales, Engineering, or Product Management, the Customer may be
provided a Software Upgrade under warranty.
2)
Exclusions. Services do not cover damage or failure caused by
any occurrence beyond Clear-Com's reasonable control, including
without limitation acts of God, fire, flooding, earthquake, lightning,
failure of electric power or air conditioning, neglect, misuse,
improper operation, war, government regulations, supply
shortages, riots, sabotage, terrorism, unauthorized modifications or
repair, strikes, labor disputes or any product failure that Clear-Com
determines is not a result of failure in the Services provided by
Clear-Com. Further Services excluded from this Agreement include:
services required due to errors or omissions in Customer purchase
orders; installation or maintenance of wiring, circuits, electrical
conduits or devices external to the products; replacement or
reconditioning of products which, in Clear-Com's opinion cannot be
reliably maintained or properly serviced due to excessive wear or
deterioration; Customer's failure to maintain the installation site in
accordance with the environmental specifications of the products;
or service on products removed from the location originally
specified by Customer and/or reinstalled without the prior written
approval of Clear-Com. Customer will pay Clear-Com's then current
published charges to restore such Covered Products to a condition
eligible for further service under this Agreement. Clear-Com shall
be excused from and shall not be liable for any failure or delay in
performance under this Agreement due to the foregoing or any
causes beyond its reasonable control.
3)
Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT WILL CLEAR-COM BE
LIABLE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS),
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, EVEN IF ADVISED
IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Page 372
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
4)
Assignment. Neither party may assign this Agreement or any
portion thereof without the prior written consent of the other,
except in the event of a merger, sale of all or substantially all of
the assets or other corporate reorganization.
5)
Ownership of replaced parts or product. All replaced parts or
products become the property of Clear-Com.
6)
Entire Agreement. This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter
hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous proposals,
oral or written, and all other communications between them
relating to the subject matter of this Agreement.
Page 373
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
17
Technical Support & Repair Policy
TECHNICAL SUPPORT POLICY
1)
Telephone, online, and e-mail technical support will be provided by
the Customer Service Center free of charge during the Warranty
Period.
2)
Technical support will be provided free of charge for all software
products under the following conditions:
a) The application, operating, and embedded software is installed
on a product covered by Clear-Com's Limited Warranty, and:
i.
The software is at the current release level; or,
The software is one (1) version removed from current.
Older versions of software will receive "best-effort" support,
but will not be updated to correct reported bugs or add
requested functionality.
3)
For Technical Support:
a) North and South America, (incl. Canada, Mexico, and the
Caribbean) & US Military:
Hours:
0800 - 1700 Pacific Time
Days:
Monday - Friday
Tel:
+1 510 337 6600
Email:
[email protected]
Europe, the Middle East and Africa:
Asia-Pacific:
4)
Page 374
Hours:
Days:
Tel:
Email:
0800 - 2000 Central European Time
Monday - Friday
+49 40 853 999 700
[email protected]
Hours:
Days:
Tel:
Email:
0800 - 1700 Pacific Time
Monday - Friday
+1 510 337 6600
[email protected]
Email Technical Support is available for all Clear-Com branded
products free of charge for the life of the product, or two years
after a product has been classified as obsolete, whichever comes
first. To log or update a request, send an email to:
[email protected]
EHX Configuration Software | User Guide
5)
Support for Distributor and Dealer Sales
a) Distributors and Dealers may utilize the Customer Service
Centers once a system has been installed and commissioned.
Clear-Com Systems and Applications Engineers will provide
support to the Distributor from the pre-sales stage through to
satisfactory installation for new system purchases. Customers
will be encouraged to contact their Dealer or Distributor with
their installation and technical support enquires rather than
using the Customer Service Centers directly.
6)
Support for Direct Sales
Customers may utilize the Customer Service Centers once a
system has been installed and commissioned by Clear-Com
Systems and Applications Engineers, or in the case of project
installations, once the Project Team has completed the handover to the Support Centers.
Page 375
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement